view dbox help

43A - D

Dialog box - F1 helpA - D

Adams/View2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool

44

2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool

Build → Joints → Curve-Curve Constraint

Creates a curve-curve constraint that restricts a curve defined on the first part to remain in contact with a second curve defined on a second part. The curve-curve constraint is useful for modeling cams where the point of contact between two parts changes during the motion of the mechanism. The curve-curve constraint removes three Degrees of freedom from your model.

Learn more about Curve-Curve Constraints.

For the option: Do the following:

First and Second For the first and second parts, select whether you are defining the curve-curve constraint along a curve or an edge of a part:

• Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered curves.

• Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For example, you can use a Parasolid object representing a cam that you imported into Adams/View.

45A - D3D Plot Viewer

3D Plot Viewer

Build → Data Elements → Spline → New → Type → 3D → 3D Preview

Lets you view a plot of a three-dimensional spline.

• Right-click on the background to use the Shortcut menus of view controls.

• Right-click on the plot to display information about the plot, delete the plot, or rename it.

Learn about Viewing a Three-Dimensional Plot in the Spline Editor.

Adams/ViewAbout Adams

46

About Adams

Help → About

Displays the following information:

• Software version number and the date it was built

• Directory where Adams is installed

• Copyright statement

47A - DAbout the Adams/View Modeling Database

About the Adams/View Modeling DatabaseThe Adams/View Modeling database is a hierarchical database. Each object in the database has an object that owns it, called its parent, and many objects own other objects, called their children. The top level objects in the database are models, views, plots, and libraries containing such things as dialog boxes.

The following shows the hierarchy of a database called Database_1 that contains one model and a plot of the model.

Names of objects in the database use a hierarchical naming structure. For example, a block built on the ground part is named .model_1.ground.block.

Adams/ViewActivate/Deactivate

48

Activate/Deactivate

Right-click object → (De)activate

Sets the Activation status of a selected object and whether or not the object’s children inherit the activation status of the parent.

Learn about About the Adams/View Modeling Database.


Object Enter the name of the object.

Object Active Select if you want the object active during a Simulation.

Learn About Activation Status.

Object's Dependent's Active Select if you want the object's children to also be active.

Learn About Inheriting Activation Status.

49A - DAdams/Insight Display

Adams/Insight Display

Simulate → Adams/Insight → Display

Opens an existing experiment file from the current directory.

After you complete the dialog box and select OK, Adams/View closes and starts Adams/Insight, displaying the specified experiment. After you've completed your work in Adams/Insight and exited, Adams/View appears.

If you exit Adams/Insight by using the Run Simulations tool or the Data → Simulation menu, Adams/View will execute the experiment runs. If you exit Adams/Insight by using the File → Close Adams/Insight Window menu or the window manager, Adams/View will return, waiting for your next interactive input.


Experiment Enter the name of the experiment to be opened. The file is saved with an .xml extension in the current directory.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes

Note: If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams/View session, you can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams/View with the MDI INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment after the workspace has been defined, returning to Adams/View, and then issuing the MDI INSIGHT BUILD command.

simulate multi_run set save_analysis=nosimulate multi_run set chart_objectives=nosimulate multi_run set chart_variables=nosimulate multi_run set show_summary=nosimulate single_run set save_analysis=nosimulate single_run set update=nonesimulate single_run set monitor=none

Adams/ViewAdams/Insight Export

50

Adams/Insight Export

Simulate → Adams/Insight → Export

Creates a new experiment file or overwrites an existing experiment file.

After you complete the dialog box and select OK, Adams/View populates the Adams/Insight experiment file (in the current directory) with the factors and responses that have been defined in the specified model. Factors consist of design variables, hardpoint x,y,z components, and UDE parameters. Responses consist of design objectives.

Next, Adams/View closes and starts Adams/Insight.

If you reused an old experiment and Adams/Insight is able to use it to create a work space for the new experiment, Adams/Insight immediately adds the work space to the new experiment file and returns to Adams/View. Adams/View then appears and begins running the experiment.

Otherwise, Adams/Insight opens and displays the new experiment. After you've completed your work in Adams/Insight and exited, Adams/View appears.

If you exit Adams/Insight by using the Run Simulations tool or the Data → Simulation menu, Adams/View will execute the experiment runs. If you exit Adams/Insight by using the File → Close Adams/Insight Window menu or the window manager, Adams/View will return, waiting for your next interactive input.


Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Experiment Enter the name of the experiment to be created. The file is saved with an .xml extension in the current directory.

Model Enter the name of the model to use for the investigation. The contents of the specified model will be interrogated to build up the Candidate list of responses and factors.

Simulation Script Enter the simulation script you want to use during the experiment.

Reuse Experiment Optionally, enter the name of an existing experiment file. If you enter an experiment to reuse, Adams/Insight will reuse as many components of the old experiment as possible in the new experiment. For more information, see Reusing Components.

51A - DAdams/Insight Export

Note: If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams/View session, you can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams/View with the MDI INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment after the workspace has been defined, returning to Adams/View, and then issuing the MDI INSIGHT BUILD command.

simulate multi_run set save_analysis=nosimulate multi_run set chart_objectives=nosimulate multi_run set chart_variables=nosimulate multi_run set show_summary=nosimulate single_run set save_analysis=nosimulate single_run set update=nonesimulate single_run set monitor=none

Adams/ViewAdams/View Keyboard Shortcuts

52

Adams/View Keyboard ShortcutsThe entries in this section show the keyboard shortcuts for Adams/View organized by operation. Keyboard shortcuts are key combinations that access commands quickly. When you enter a keyboard shortcut, the focus must be in the main window except when entering a keyboard shortcut that works in dialog boxes.

The shortcuts are organized into the following operations:

• File Operations

• Edit Operations

• Display Operations

• Viewing Operations

• Drawing Operations

File Operations

Edit Operations

To: Select:

Create a new modeling database Ctrl + n

Open an existing modeling database Ctrl + o

Save the current modeling database Ctrl + s

Print Ctrl + p

Read command file F2

Exit Ctrl + q

To: Select:

Undo the last operation Ctrl + z

Redo the last undone operation Ctrl- Shift + z

Copy objects Ctrl + c

Paste text in text boxes in dialog boxes and as comments Ctrl + v

Cut text from text boxes in dialog boxes Ctrl + x

Quickly clear text from text boxes Left-click at the start of the text box, and then press Ctrl-k or Ctrl-K

Delete selected object Del

Modify object Ctrl + e

Escape operation Esc

53A - DAdams/View Keyboard Shortcuts

Display Operations

Viewing Operations

To display: Select:

Command window F3

Coordinate window F4

Menu Builder F5

Dialog Box Builder F6

Working grid g

Plotting window (Adams/PostProcessor) F8

Help window F1

To: Select:

Rotate view in the XY directions r

Rotate view in the Z direction (s pin) s (lowercase)

Translate view t

Change perspective depth d

Dynamically zoom view z

Use dynamic increment Shift

Define a zoom area w

Center view c

Orient view to object (e lement) e

Fit view f

Fit view - no ground Ctrl + F

Orient view to front F

Orient view to right R

Orient view to top T

Orient view to isometric I

Toggle render mode between wireframe and shaded S (Uppercase)

Toggle screen icons on and off v

Adams/ViewAdams/View Keyboard Shortcuts

54

Drawing Operations

To: Select and hold:

Turn off snapping to geometry Ctrl

Turn off highlighting of geometry during selection Ctrl

55A - DAdams2Nastran

Adams2Nastran

Simulate → Adams2Nastran

Export a linearized NASTRAN model from Adams at the current-time/dynamic/kinematic/static/quasi-static equilibrium operating point.


Model Name Select the model which you want to export

Type Choose the type of export, that is low fidelity (white box) or high fidelity (black box)

Nastran Output File Prefix Choose the file prefix to be used for the exported Nastran file(s).

Operating Point Choose the operating point at which the model will be exported (options are current-time, dynamic, kinematic, static and quasi-static)

If you chose current-time then Adams exports a NASTRAN model immediately with no further analysis specification, in other words model is exported at any current and valid operating point (i.e. static, quasi-static, dynamic, and kinematic)

If you chose a dynamic/kinematic/quasi-static operating point following four options will be available

End Time Specify the simulation end time as an alternative to the duration of simulation

Duration Specify the duration of simulation as an alternative to the simulation end time

Number Of Steps Specify the number of steps, as an alternative to the step size

Step Size Specify the step size as an alternative to the number of steps parameter

Configuration File Name Specify a configuration file to be used to control the exporting of the model. See Nastran bulk data deck export for more information.

Reset After Export Select if the simulation has to be reset automatically after the export operation

Export all graphics Select if all the graphics are to be exported

Write To Terminal Select if the output file is to be displayed in the info window after the export operation

Adams/ViewAdd/Replace Simulations

56

Add/Replace Simulations

File → Replace Simulations

Updates the data in the plots with that stored in simulation result files, without recreating the plots. Also lets you add data from other Simulations to your existing plots.

When you update your plots, Adams/PostProcessor looks for simulation results in the original simulation Results file (for example, a Request file) from which you imported the current data. If the time and date stamp on the original file is more recent than the time and date stamp on the plot, Adams/PostProcessor reloads the plot with the updated data.

If you use the Add Simulation option, a new legend, called the simulation legend, appears on the left side of the plot. The simulation legend identifies the source of the data grouped by color or line style. The original legend, called the curve legend, continues to show information about the original curves.


Add Simulation Select to add new curves.

Replace Simulation Select to update the curves already on the plot.

New Runs/

Last Runs

Enter the name of the simulation containing the simulation results to be replaced. By default, the results of the last simulation (Last_run) replaces any simulation results that the curves use.

If you selected Add Simulations, the following options are available:

Auto Color/

Auto Style/

Auto Weight

You can:

• Select Auto to allow Adams/PostProcessor to automatically assign colors, styles, or weights to the curves.

• Clear the selection of Auto to use the pull-down menu to set the colors, styles, or weights. If you select No Change, Adams/PostProcessor uses the current color of the curve representing the data to be added.

Update Pages Select the pages containing the plots that you want to update. Enter a range of pages in the Start Page and End Page text boxes.

57A - DAggregate Mass

Aggregate Mass

Tools → Aggregate Mass Shared Dialog Box

Calculates the total mass of a part or parts in your model. Adams/View returns the information in the Information window or in a specified file. It ignores the ground part or any part that has no mass.

By default, Adams/View calculates all location coordinates and orientation angles in the current global coordinate system. You can select a different coordinate system or reference frame relative to which you would like the coordinates and angles returned. When you express the aggregate mass in the global coordinate system, Adams/View essentially places a temporary marker at the center of mass location and then it provides the inertia properties about the CM location with respect to the global coordinate system orientation.

The orientation shown is the orientation of the principal moments of inertia.

Learn about Calculating Aggregate Mass of Parts.


Model Enter the name of the model whose parts you want to calculate total mass for.

Bodies Choose one of the following:

• All - Calculates the aggregate mass of all bodies in your model.

• Selected - Calculates the mass of only certain parts.

Select Select if you chose to calculate the mass of certain parts.

Select the desired parts from the list of parts in your model.

Tips To select objects:

Relative To Optional. Enter another coordinate system with respect to which you'd like calculations to be relative. Default calculations are relative to the global coordinate system.


Info Window If aggregate mass is written to Information Window, replace or append existing information. Choose one of the following:

• Replace

• Append

• None

File Select if you want the output displayed to a file.

Enter the name of the file in which you want to save the information in the text box.

Brief Output Select to show only a brief summary of aggregate mass information.

Adams/ViewAngle Measure

58

Angle Measure

Build → Measure → Angle → New/Modify

Creates an angle measure.

Learn more about:

• Angle Measures

• About Simulation Output


Measure Name Change the name for the measure.

First Marker Enter the marker that defines the tip of the first vector.

Middle Marker Enter the second marker that defines the vertex.

Last Marker Enter the marker that defines the tip of the second vector.

Create Strip Chart Select to display a Strip chart of the measure.

Set the attributes of the measure. Only available when you are modifying a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help.

59A - DAnimation Controls

Animation Controls

Review → Animation Controls

Main toolbox →

Allows you to work with Animations and control the frames from your simulation. Animations provide instant feedback to you as your simulation runs.

By default, each time you run a simulation, Adams/Solver replaces the previous animation frames. To replay earlier animations, you must save them in your modeling database.

Adams/ViewAnimation Controls

60

During animations, Adams/View displays frames as quickly as it can based on the graphics capabilities of your computer hardware.

Animation Controls Container on Main Toolbox

Animation Controls Dialog Box


Option/Icon Description

Plays the animation backward.

Stops the animation.

Plays the animation forward.

Rewinds the animation.

Advances one frame.

Rewinds one frame.

Plays the animation in fast-backward mode.

Plays the animation in fast-forward mode.

Slider Click and drag until you reach the number of the frame you want to display.

Base Part/Fixed Base/Std Camera

Lets you set the view perspective or camera angle for an Animation. Setting different animation view perspectives can be especially useful when parts undergo large motions and move off your screen during an animation, such as with vehicle simulations.

Learn about Specifying the View Perspective of Animations.

Contour plots Toggles the display of Contour plots of flexible bodies. The default is set to off to improve the speed of the animation, and to remove any caching of the animation before playing it.

To learn about setting defaults for caching animations see PPT Preferences - Animation.

To learn about displaying contour plots on flexible bodies see Animating Deformations, Modal Forces, and Stress/Strain.

Adams/ViewAnimation Controls

62

Cycles/Loop Sets how many times to replay the animation. The default is to play the specified sequence of frames once.

In the Cycles box, enter a whole number representing the number of times you want Adams/View to play the animation. It automatically rewinds the animation before each replay.

Displays the full Animation Controls dialog box.

Render See Rendering mode.

Icons Toggles the Screen icons during animations.

Shortcut: Type a lowercase v.

Analysis Do one of the following:

• Enter the name of a saved Simulation.

• To animate multiple simulations simultaneously, enter the names of the simulations you want to animate. Separate each simulation name with a comma.

Note: When animating multiple simulations simultaneously, each simulation must have the same number of output steps or frames associated with it, as well as the same output time step size.

View Do one of the following:

• Play animations in a different view window, by entering the name of any view window that is currently visible on your screen. The default name is the currently active view.

• Play animation in multiple view windows at the same time by entering multiple view names, separating each name with a comma.

Note: If you choose to animate in more than one view simultaneously, every view you specify must animate the same simulation results. You cannot display one simulation in one view and another simulation in another view.

No Trace/Trace You can trace the paths of points during animation. See Tracing Paths of Points During Animations.



Learn about:

• Using Animations

• Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes

Time Range Defines a subset of the complete sequence of frames in an animation to play. By default, Adams/View plays the complete sequence of frames. You can set the interval to view based on time or frame number.

Choose from:

• Time Range - Enter a start time and stop time in the text box. Adams/View replays those frames whose time is within the specified range.

• Time - Enter an interval and select Apply.

• Frame Range - Enter a start frame and an end frame.

• Frame - Enter a frame number and select Apply.

Frame Increment

Enter a number of frames to skip. For example, enter 5 to have Adams/View display only every fifth frame.

Superimpose Toggles the overlay of frames on top of one another. By default, during an animation, Adams/View erases the previous frame before drawing the next frame.

We recommend that you use the frame or time range features, as well as the frame increment so that only certain frames are superimposed on top of one another.


Adams/ViewAppend Run Commands

64

Append Run CommandsInstead of having to know command names and syntax for many commands for running Simulations and for saving and resetting simulation, you can enter values for the operations and then append the appropriate commands to the current selected Script. Assistance on modeling commands is not available.

For additional assistance, you can also:

• Use the Command Navigator to see the available Adams/View commands, their keywords, and parameters.

• Look at your aview.Log file to see the commands that have been executed and their syntax.


Run command to be appended to script

Select the simulation operation that you’d like to add to your script. For example, select Transient - Dynamic to enter a command for performing a dynamic simulation.

Options for the operation you selected appear in the dialog box. For example, text boxes and option button appear for setting the duration of a simulation.

If you select Transient - Dynamic or Transient - Kinematic, the following options appear:

Start at equilibrium

For a Transient Dynamic or Kinematic, select to have Adams/View perform a static simulation before performing a Dynamic simulation.

End Time/Duration

Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how you want it defined. You can select:

• End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want the simulation to stop.

• Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the simulation to run.

Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams/View outputs data during your simulation. You can specify:

• Steps - Represents the total number of times you want Adams/View to provide output information over your entire simulation. For example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an output frequency of 50 steps/second.

• Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units, between output steps. The output frequency remains constant even if you change your simulation end time or duration. For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01 seconds per step, which yields an output frequency of 100 steps/second.

If you select Transient - Static Steps/Step Size and End Time/Durations options appear

If you select Equilibrium no other options will appear

65A - DAppend Run Commands

If you select Eigensolution following options appear:

Employ Damping Select if you would like apply damping during simulation

Generate Eigenvectors

Select if you would like to generate eigen vectors

If you select Nastran Export - Static following options appear:

Write To Terminal Select if the output file is to be displayed in the info window after the export operation

Type Choose the type of export, that is low fidelity (white box) or high fidelity (black box)

Nastran Output File Prefix

Choose the file prefix to be used for the exported Nastran file(s).

Configuration File Name

Specify a configuration file to be used to control the exporting of the model

If you select Nastran Export - Quasi Static along with the options for Nastran Export - Static, Steps/Step Size and End Time/Duration options appear:

If you select Sate Matrix following options appear:

Plant Input Select an existing Plant Input

Plant Output Select an existing Plant Output

Matrix Format Select suitable controls design and analysis package format

Matrix File Name Specify a file name to which Adams/Solver (C++) writes the state matrices. If the output is in the MATRIXX format, all matrices are written to this file. For the MATLAB format, the file name is used as a base name. Each matrix is written to a separate file, whose name Adams/Solver (C++) automatically constructs by appending the matrix name to the user-specified base name.

If you select Assemble no options will appear

If you select Scripted following options will appear

Simulation Script Specify an existing script

Do a ‘simulation single_run reset’ first

Select if you would like to reset the simulation controls to their initial configuration

OK Will insert the appropriate Adams/View commands based on the options and entries you selected/specified

Cancel Cancels the insertion of Adams/View commands

Enter any comments to help you manage and identify the script. Learn about Comments.


Adams/ViewArc Tool

66

Arc Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Arc Tool

Creates arcs and circles centered about a location. You begin drawing an arc by specifying its starting and ending angles. You then indicate its center location and set its radius and the orientation of its x-axis. You can also specify the arc’s radius before you draw it. The Arc tool draws the angle starting from the x-axis that you specify and moving counterclockwise (right-hand rule).

See Elements of an arc.

Before you create arc geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the arc geometry or add the arc geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed of only wire geometry. You can extrude a circle into solid geometry that has mass. Learn about Extruding Construction Geometry Along a Path.

Learn about Creating Arcs and Circles.


New Part/Add to Part/On Ground

Select either:

• New Part - Creates a new part.

• Add to Part - Adds the arc to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the arc to ground.

Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be added to ground.

Radius Enter the radius of the arc

Start Angle Enter the angle at which to start the arc. The default is to create a 90-degree arc from a starting angle of 0 degrees.

End Angle Enter the angle at which to end the arc.

Circle Select to create a circle.

67A - DAssembly Measure

Assembly MeasureCreates a measure on an assembly.

See Measures and Assemblies.


Measure Name Change the name for the measure.

Object Select the object to be measured.


Characteristic Select the object characteristic to measure.


Select to display the attributes of the measure. Not available for all types of assembly measures, such as a spring-dampers, and only available when you are modifying a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help for more information.

Adams/ViewAssociativity

68

Associativity

Database Navigator → Associativity

Allows you to display the objects that a selected object uses. For example, you can select a joint in the tree list to show the I and J markers that the joint uses. You can also select to view the objects that use the selected object.

Learn about Viewing the Associativity of Objects.


Uses Select if you want to show the objects that the selected object uses.

Is Used By Select if you want to show the objects that use the selected object.

Auto Navigate Select if you want to set up an automatic navigation of the objects.

Save to File Select if you want to save the current associativity information to a file.

69A - DAuto Disable Modes by Strain Energy

Auto Disable Modes by Strain Energy

Flexible Body Modify dialog box → auto

Lets you disable or enable modes based on their contribution of strain energy. Learn more about Enabling and Disabling Modes Based on Strain Energy Contribution.


Flexible Body Name Enter the name of the flexible body to modify.

Analysis Name Enter the name of a pilot simulation.


Energy Tolerance Enter a fractional value. Adams/Flex will disable all modes that contributed less than the specified fraction to the total strain energy during the test simulation. For example, to disable all modes that contributed less than 0.1% of the strain energy, enter 0.001.

Adams/ViewBackground Color Tool Stack

70

Background Color Tool Stack

Main Toolbox → Background Color Tool Stack

Contains four colors to which you can set the background of the View window.

To change the background color:

• Select a color from the Background Color tool stack.

The background of all view windows changes to the selected color.

Learn about Setting View Background Colors.

71A - DBeam

Beam

Build → Forces → Beam Tool

Creates a massless beam with a uniform cross-section.

You enter values of the beam’s physical properties, and Adams/Solver calculates the matrix entries defining the forces that the beam produces. The beam transmits forces and torques between the two parts in accordance with Timoshenko beam theory.

Learn about:

• Creating Beams

• Modifying Beams

Adams/ViewBode Plots

72

Bode Plots

Plot → Bode Plots

Creates a Bode plot in Adams/PostProcessor. Bode plots provide a way to study frequency response functions (FRFs) for linear systems and linearized representations of nonlinear systems. The frequency response function measures the response at the outputs due to unit harmonic excitation at the inputs at various frequencies. A Bode plot in Adams/PostProcessor shows the amplitude gain and the phase shift between input to output for all output/input combinations of the linear system.


Input Format Select the type of input format.

Learn about Ways to Construct Bode Plots.

The elements in the dialog box change depending on the input format you selected. You can select any one of the following input formats:

• Adams/Linear State Matrices

• Adams Matrices

• Linear State Equation

• TFSISO

• Transfer Function Coefficients

• Time Domain Measures

• Time Domain Results Set Components

Adams/Linear State Matrices

Enter values for the following:

• The frequency sweep by entering the starting and ending frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples, or Step Size).

• In the State Matrices text box, the state matrices.

• In the Inputs and Outputs text boxes, the input and output results you would like to use for bode plot calculations. If you do not select any inputs or outputs, Adams/PostProcessor computes all combinations.

73A - DBode Plots

Adams Matrices Enter values for the following:


• In the A through D Matrix text boxes, the A through D matrices that define the state matrix.


Linear State Equation Enter values for the following:


• In the Linear State Equation text box, the linear state equation to be plotted.


TFSISO Enter values for the following:


• In the TFSISO text box, the transfer function to be plotted.

Transfer Function Coefficients


• The frequency sweep by entering the starting and ending frequencies for the Bode plot in the From and To text boxes and selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples, or Step Size).

• In the Numerator Coefficients text box, the coefficients of the transfer function numerator polynomial.

• In the Denominator Coefficients text box, the coefficients of the transfer function denominator polynomial.


Adams/ViewBode Plots

74

Time Domain Measures Enter values for the following:

• In the Input Measure text box, the pre-defined or user-defined measure of the system input.

• In the Output Measure text box, the pre-defined or user-defined measure of the system output.

Note that the data determines the frequency range, unlike the previous options.

Time Domain Results Set Components


• In the Input Component text box, the results set component characterizing system input.

• In the Output Component text box, the results set component characterizing system output.

Note that the data determines the frequency range, unlike the previous options.


75A - DBodies

BodiesDisplays tools for creating rigid body geometry.

Icon Link Icon Link

Solids Construction

Box Tool Point Tool

Cylinder Tool Marker Tool

Sphere Tool Polyline Tool

Frustum Tool Arc Tool

Torus Tool Spline Tool

Link Tool Point Mass

Plate Tool Booleans

Extrusion Tool Unite Tool

Revolution Tool Merge Tool

Plane Tool Intersect Tool

Adams/ViewBodies

76

Flexible Bodies Cut Tool

Adams/Flex Split Tool

Flex to Flex Chain Tool

Discrete Flexible Link Features

Rigid to Flex Fillet Tool

MNX Xform Chamfer Tool

ViewFlex Hole Tool

Boss Tool

Hollow Tool

Construction or Settings Container

Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link, Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions for many values.

Icon Link Icon Link

77A - DBorder and Separation

Border and Separation

Dialog- Box Builder → Preferences → Separation

Allows you to enter values to be used by the Dialog-Box Builder functions that change the geometry of Interface objects such as align, move, and create predefined. See Aligning Interface Objects and Moving Interface Objects for more information.


Horizontal Border Width Enter a value to specify the horizontal distance from the object to the dialog box border.

Vertical Border Width Enter a value to specify the vertical distance from the object to the dialog box border.

Horizontal Separation Enter a value to specify the horizontal distance between dialog box objects.

Vertical Separation Enter a value to specify the vertical distance between dialog box objects.

Adams/ViewBoss Tool

78

Boss Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Boss Tool

Creates circular protrusions or bosses on the face of solid objects

As you create a boss, you can specify its radius and height.

Learn about Creating a Hole or Boss.


Radius Enter the radius of the boss.

Height Enter the height of the boss.

79A - DBox Tool

Box Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Box Tool

Creates a three-dimensional solid block.

You draw the box’s length and width in the plane of the screen or the working grid, if it is turned on. The Box tool creates a solid box with a depth that is twice that of the shortest dimension of the box (d = 2 * min(l,h)). You can also specify the length, height, or depth of the box before you draw it.

The box dimensions are in screen coordinates with the height up, length to the left, and depth out of the screen or grid:

Learn about Creating a Box.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the box to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the box to ground.


Length Enter the length of the box, if desired.

Height Enter the height of the box, if desired.

Depth Enter the depth of the box. If you do not specify a depth, Adams/View creates a solid box with a depth that is twice that of the shortest dimension of the box (d = 2 * min(l,h)).

Adams/ViewBox Tool

80

Note: One hotpoint appears after you draw the box. It lets you modify the length, height, and depth of the box. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry

81A - DBushing Tool

Bushing Tool

Build → Forces → Bushing Tool

A bushing is a linear force that represents the forces acting between two parts over a distance. The bushing applies a force and a torque. You define the force and torque using six components (Fx, Fy, Fz, Tx, Ty, Tz).

To define a bushing, you need to create two markers, one for each part. The marker on the first part that you specify is called the I marker. The marker on the second part that you specify is called the J marker.

Learn about:

• Bushings


Construction Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application points. You can select the following:

• 1 Location

• 2 Bodies - 1 Location

• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations

Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.

Normal to Grid/Pick Feature

Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:

• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the screen.

• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams/View automatically calculates the x- and y-axes.

Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.

Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.

Rotational K Enter the rotational stiffness coefficients.

Translational C Enter the rotational damping coefficients.

Adams/ViewCatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP, IGES, Acis, VDA ('Adams CAD Translators' only)

82

CatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP, IGES, Acis, VDA ('Adams CAD Translators' only)Exports CAD geometry using 'Adams CAD Translator'. It writes the geometric definition of an Adams model or part from to the specified CAD file format. You can then read the CAD file into a CAD program.

You can export an entire model, an individual part of a model, or a model as it exists at a particular simulation time, which is helpful for transferring position data of an Adams model to a drafting program to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation.

83A - DCatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP, IGES, Acis, VDA ('Adams CAD Translators' only)


File Type Set to type of geometry that you want to export (CatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP, IGES, Acis, VDA).

File Name Enter the name of the file that you want to create. The file will contain the exported CAD geometry. You do not need to enter a file extension. Adams automatically generates the appropriate extension for the type of geometry you are exporting. For example, if you are exporting IGES geometry, Adams adds an .igs extension.

Part/Model/Analysis Name

Select the geometry that you want to export, and then enter the name of the geometry in the text box next to the pull-down menu. You can select:

• Model Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View model to be written to the CAD file. Adams places each rigid body in the model on a separate level. All geometry written to the IGES file is defined with respect to the global coordinate system of the Adams/View model.

• Part Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View part to be written to the CAD file. Adams writes all the geometry owned by the part to the CAD file. It defines all geometry in the CAD file with respect to the part coordinate system.

• Analysis Name - Lets you export a model at a particular simulation frame (time) of a particular analysis. This is helpful for transferring position data of an Adams/View model to a drafting program to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation. Adams writes all parts and geometry to the CAD file in the same relative position as they appear in a single frame display.

Display Summary Select to write a verbose log file to the disk. A message will be displayed indicating the log file to which the translation operation details have been written.

Translation Options Click on this button to invoke the Manage Geometry Translation Options dialog box for the relevant geometry and translation operation (read or write). The dialog box would be pre-filled with the option name, short description of what the option is for and the default value.

Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The translation options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.

Note: The translation via 'Adams CAD Translators' is applicable for STEP and IGES only if MSC_GEOM_TRANSLATE_INTEROP is set to an integral value of 1.

Adams/ViewChain Tool

84

Chain Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Chain Tool

Links together wire Construction geometry to create a complex profile, which you can then extrude. The geometry to be chained together must touch at one endpoint and cannot be closed geometry.

The Chain tool adds the final chained geometry to the part that owns the first geometry that you selected

Learn about Chaining Wire Geometry.

Note: If you want to use the chained geometry with a pin-in-slot or curve-to-curve constraint, you must turn the geometry into a spline. See the Spline Tool.

85A - DChamfer Tool

Chamfer Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Chamfer Tool

Creates beveled (chamfered) edges and corners on a solid geometry:

Learn about:

• Chamfering and Filleting Objects

• Fillet Tool

Note: You will get different results when you chamfer one edge at a time than when you chamfer all edges at once. Also, you may not be able to chamfer an edge if an adjoining edge has already been chamfered. It depends on the complexity of the chamfering.


Width Specify the width of the bevel.

Adams/ViewClearance Compute

86

Clearance Compute

Tools → Clearance →Compute

When you request to run a Clearance study, Adams/PostProcessor calculates the minimum and maximum distances between a pair of objects using data from a selected Simulation. It adds the information to the animation associated with the simulation, which you can subsequently run. You can also generate a report of the data and plot it.

Learn about Defining a Clearance Study.

Note: The number of frames in your animation can have a significant effect on the accuracy of the distances reported. Therefore, for best results, we recommend that you perform at least one clearance study with a large number of frames in the animation (time steps in the simulation).


Simulation Select the simulation data against which you want to run the clearance study.

Treat Flexible Bodies as Rigid

Select if you want to calculate the clearance study as if flexible bodies were rigid. This reduces computations and allows the clearance study to run faster but does not give you information about the effects of flexibility.

87A - DClearance Export Results

Clearance Export Results

Tools → Clearance → Write

Export reports of clearance studies. See Clearance study.

Learn about Viewing Clearance Data as Reports.


File Name Enter the name of the file to which to export the clearance study.

Simulation Enter the name of the Simulation result against which you created the clearance study.

Adams/ViewColor Picker

88

Color Picker

Settings → Colors → Color Picker

Lets you select a basic color or create a custom color to be used for displaying objects and the background of the Main window and any View windows that you create.


Basic Colors Select a color from the 48 basic colors available.

Tip: You can define a custom color by clicking the closest basic color, modifying it, and then selecting Add to Custom Colors.

Custom Colors Select an empty box to create a custom color or select a custom color you've already defined so you can modify it.

Color Matrix Click anywhere to select a custom color. Use the pointer to change the hue and Saturation. Change hue by moving the pointer horizontally; change saturation by moving the pointer vertically.

Luminosity Slider Drag the slider to change the luminosity or relative lightness or darkness of a color. Changes the value in the Value text box.

Hue Specify the hue of a color. The values range from 0 to 239.

Saturation Specify the saturation of a color.

Value Specify the luminosity of a color.

Red Specify the amount of red in a color. You can use any combination of red, green, or blue to define a color.

Green Specify the amount of green in a color. You can use any combination of red, green, or blue to define a color.

Blue Specify the amount of blue in a color. You can use any combination of red, green, or blue to define a color.

Add to Custom Colors Select to add the color currently displayed in the color matrix to the palette of custom colors.

89A - DCommand File

Command File

Settings → Command File

Allows you to specify whether Adams/View displays the command that it executes in the Command window or displays the results of the commands on the screen. In addition, it lets you specify what Adams/View should do when it encounters an error while reading an Adams/View command file.

Learn more with Import - Adams/View Command Files dialog box help.


Echo Commands Select if you want to see the commands that Adams/View executes as it imports the file.

Update Screen Select if you want to see the results of the commands in the main window. If you do not select this, Adams/View displays the results when it finishes reading the command file.

If Adams/View encounters an error, you can select to:

Continue the Command Select if you want Adams/View to continue processing the line as if it were typed interactively. This can be dangerous if there is no correction later on in the line because Adams/View keeps issuing error messages until the error is corrected. The errors can continue beyond the end of the line, even to the end of the file, if carriage returns are invalid.

Note: Use this value only if the command file is a literal recording of your key strokes, complete with back spaces or other corrections of mistakes.

Ignore Command Select if you want Adams/View to ignore the line on which it found the error and start processing the next line as a new command.

Note: Adams/View can usually recover and execute subsequent commands in the file. However, if subsequent commands depend on the results of the invalid command, they may fail or give unexpected results.

Abort Execution Select to instruct Adams/View to immediately close all the command files and return control to interactive input. This is the most conservative setting because it guarantees that subsequent commands will cause no further errors or unexpected results.

Adams/ViewCommand Navigator

90

Command Navigator

Tools → Command Navigator Shared Dialog Box

Enables you to enter Adams/View commands without having to know the entire syntax of the commands.

The Command Navigator displays a list of all Adams/View command Keywords. A plus (+) in front of a keyword indicates that the command has more keywords below it but they are hidden. A minus (-) indicates that all keywords below the keyword are displayed. No indicator in front of a keyword indicates that there are no more keywords below the object. When you select an object with no indicator, a dialog box appears in which you enter parameters for executing the command.

Learn about:

• Showing, Hiding, or Selecting Keywords

• Getting help in the Command Navigator

91A - DCommand Window

Command Window

View → Command Window F3

Provides a text-based way to enter Adams/View commands. Learn About Adams/View Commands. It assumes that you understand the Adams/View command language underlying the Adams/View interface. The command window contains both a command entry area for entering commands and a command information area for displaying informational and error messages:

Learn about Using the Command Window.

Adams/ViewComments

92

Comments

Database Navigator → Comments

Allows you to add comments to any object in the Modeling database.

Learn about Adding Comments Through the Database Navigator.


Text Box Enter or modify comments associated with the selected object.

Apply Select to add the comment to the selected object.

Save to File Select to save the comment to a file.

93A - DCompute Linear Modes dialog box

Compute Linear Modes dialog box

Simulate → Interactive → →

Adams/Solver (C++only). Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.

Lets you run a linear simulation using a plant state. Learn about Creating Plant States.


Plant State Specify the plant state to be used to define a set of states that are to be used in the linearization scheme.

Reference Marker Specify the reference marker.

Adams/ViewCompute and Export Linear States

94

Compute and Export Linear States

Simulate → Interactive →

Generates a state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system, for use with a control system design application, such as MATLAB, MATRIXx, or EASY5.


Name Enter the name of the object.

Plant Input Specify the plant input that Adams/Solver uses as plant inputs in the state matrices computation. If you do not specify a plant input, Adams/Solver does not output the B and D matrices. Learn about creating plant inputs with Data Element Create Plant State dialog box help.

Plant Output Specify the plant output that Adams/Solver uses as plant outputs in the state matrices computation. If you do not specify a plant output, Adams/Solver does not output the C and D matrices. Learn about creating Data Element Create Plant Outputs.

Plant State Specify a plant state to be used to define a set of states that are to be used in the linearization scheme. Learn about Creating Plant States. Adams/Solver C++ only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.

Reference Marker Specify the reference marker.

File Format Specify the name of the software in whose input format Adams/Solver is to output the state matrices. Currently, two software formats are supported: MATRIXx (FSAVE format) and MATLAB (ASCII flat file format).

95A - DConnectors

ConnectorsDisplays tools for creating joints. The tab contains the entire library of joints.

Icon Link Icon Link

Joints Primitives

Fixed Joint Tool Parallel Axes Joint Tool

Revolute Joint Tool Orientation Joint Tool

Translational Joint Tool Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

Cylindrical Joint Tool Inplane Joint Tool

Spherical Joint Tool Inline Joint Tool

Constant-Velocity Joint Tool Couplers

Hooke/Universal Joint Tool Gear Joint Tool

Screw Joint Tool Coupler Joint Tool

Planar Joint Tool Special

Adams/ViewConnectors

96

Point-Curve Constraint Tool

Create/Modify General Constraint

2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool



Icon Link Icon Link

97A - DConstant-Velocity Joint Tool

Constant-Velocity Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Constant-Velocity Joint Tool

Creates a constant-velocity joint that allows two rotations on one part with respect to another part, while remaining coincident and maintaining a constant velocity through the spin axis.

Adams/ViewConstant-Velocity Joint Tool

98

Learn about Creating Idealized Joints.


1 Location (Bodies Implicit)/2 Bodies - 1 Location/2 Bodies - 2 Locations

Set how you want to connect the joint to parts:

• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to that part and ground.

• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.

• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.

Learn about Connecting Constraints to Parts.

Normal to Grid/Pick Geometry Feature

Set how you want to orient the joint:

• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.

• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.

First Body/Second Body (only appears if you select to explicitly define the bodies using the options 2 Bodies - 1 Location or 2 Bodies - 2 Locations explained above)

Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:

• Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.

• Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.

99A - DConstraint Create Complex Joint Gear

Constraint Create Complex Joint Gear

Right-click joint → Modify

Creates a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact. Learn more About Gears.


Gear Name Enter the name for the gear. If you are creating a gear, Adams/View assigns a default name to the gear.

Adams Id Enter a positive integer for the ID or enter 0 to let Adams/Solver set the ID for you. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the gear to help you manage and identify the gear. See Comments.

Adams/ViewConstraint Create Complex Joint Gear

100

Joint Name Enter the two translational, revolute, or cylindrical joints to be geared together. Adams/View automatically separates the joint names with a comma (,).

Common Velocity Marker

Enter the marker defining the point of contact between the geared parts. You need to make sure the z-axis of the CV marker points in the direction of motion of the gear teeth that are in contact. The following figure shows how the z-axis of the CV marker is tangent to the pitch circle of the spur gears.

To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and then select Create.

Tip: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious configuration, the z-axis of the CV marker is probably oriented incorrectly.


101A - DConstraint Modify Complex Joint Gear

Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear

Build → Joints → Gear Joint Tool

Modifies a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact. Learn more About Gears.


Gear Name Displays the name of the gear.

Adams Id Enter a positive integer for the ID or enter 0 to let Adams/Solver set the ID for you. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the gear to help you manage and identify the gear. See Comments.

Adams/ViewConstraint Modify Complex Joint Gear

102

Joint Name Enter the two translational, revolute, or cylindrical joints to be geared together. Adams/View automatically separates the joint names with a comma (,).

Common Velocity Marker

Enter the marker defining the point of contact between the geared parts. You need to make sure the z-axis of the CV marker points in the direction of motion of the gear teeth that are in contact. The following figure shows how the z-axis of the CV marker is tangent to the pitch circle of the spur gears.

To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and then select Create.

Tip: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious configuration, the z-axis of the CV marker is probably oriented incorrectly.


103A - DConstraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve

Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve

Right-click 2D curve-curve constraint → Modify

Changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a 2D curve-curve constraint. Learn more with 2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool.

Learn about working with Curve-Curve Constraints.

Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.


Point Curve Name Enter the 2D curve-curve to modify.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the 2D curve-curve. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the 2D curve-curve to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

I Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape of the curve that moves along the second curve (J curve). You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element. Learn about working with Curves.

J Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape of the curve along which the first curve (I curve) moves. You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element. Learn about working with Curves.

I Ref Marker Name Enter a marker that is fixed on the part containing the first curve (I curve). Adams/View uses the reference marker to associate the shape defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference marker.

J Ref Marker Name Enter a marker that is fixed on the part containing the second curve (J curve). Adams/View uses the reference marker to associate the shape defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference marker.

I Floating Marker Name Enter a floating marker. Adams/View positions the origin of the floating marker at the instantaneous point of contact on the first curve, which is also the global position of the J floating marker on the second curve. Adams/View orients the marker so that its x-axis is along the tangent at the instantaneous contact point, its y-axis is along the instantaneous normal, and its z-axis is along the resultant binormal.

Adams/ViewConstraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve

104

J Floating Marker Name Enter a floating marker. Adams/View positions the origin of the floating marker at the instantaneous point of contact on the second curve, which is also the position of the I floating marker on the first curve. Adams/View orients the marker so that its x-axis is along the tangent at the instantaneous contact point, its y-axis is along the instantaneous normal, and its z-axis is along the resultant binormal.

Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.

I Displacement Ic/ No I Displacement Ic

Select either:

• I Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the first curve (I curve). If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve, Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default, you specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of the part containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of the marker you specify for I Ic Ref Marker Name.

• No I Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.

J Displacement Ic/ No J Displacement Ic

Select either:

• J Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the second curve (J curve). If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve, Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default, you specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of the part containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of the marker you specify for J Ic Ref Marker Name.

• No J Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.

I Velocity Ic/No I Velocity Ic

Select either:

• I Velocity - Enter the initial velocity of the contact point along the first curve (I curve). This is the speed at which the contact point is initially moving relative to the curve. The velocity is:

• Negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the curve.

• Positive if it is moving towards the end of the curve.

• Zero if it is stationary on the curve.

• No I Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.


105A - DConstraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve

J Velocity Ic or No J Velocity Ic

Select either:

• J Velocity- Enter the initial velocity of the contact point along the second curve (J curve). This is the speed at which the contact point is initially moving relative to the curve. The velocity is:

• Negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the curve.

• Positive if it is moving toward the end of the curve.

• Zero if it is stationary on the curve.

• No J Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.

I Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact (displacement) on the first curve (I curve) is specified.

• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part containing the curve.

J Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact (displacement) on the second curve (J curve) is specified.

• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part containing the curve


Adams/ViewConstraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve

106

Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve

Right-click point-curve constraint → Modify

Changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a point-curve constraint. Learn more with Point-Curve Constraint Tool.

Learn more about Working with Higher-Pair Constraints.

Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.


Point Curve Name Enter the name of the constraint to modify.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the constraint. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the constraint to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape on which the point can move. You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element. Learn about working with Curves.

I Marker Name Point that moves along the curve.

107A - DConstraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve

J Floating Marker Name

Enter a marker that is a floating marker. Adams/Solver positions the origin of the floating marker at the instantaneous point of contact on the curve. It orients the marker so that its x-axis is tangent to the curve at the contact point, its y-axis points outward from the curve’s center of curvature at the contact point, and its z-axis is along the binormal at the contact point.

.

Ref Marker Name Enter marker that is fixed on the part containing the curve on which the point must move. Adams/Solver uses the reference marker to associate the shape defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference marker.

Displacement Ic/ No Displacement Ic

Select either:

• Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the curve. If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve, Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default, you specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of the part containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of the marker you specify for Ic Ref Marker Name.

• No Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.

Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.


Adams/ViewConstraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve

108

Velocity Ic/No Velocity Ic

Select either:

• Velocity Ic - Velocity with which the point (I marker) moves along the curve. You specify the velocity in the coordinate system of the part containing the curve.

• No I Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.

Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve is specified.

• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part containing the curve.


109A - DControls_measure_panel

Controls_measure_panel

Modify Controls Block dialog box → Output Measure button

Creates an output measure for a control block.

Learn about adding controls Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.


Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the measure.

Controls Block Enter the control block to be measured.


Create Strip Chart Select to create a Strip chart of the measure.

Adams/ViewCoordinate System

110

Coordinate System

Settings → Coordinate System

Main toolbox → Move toolstack → Coordinate System Tool

Lets you set the default coordinate system for a Modeling database.

Learn about Coordinate Systems in Adams/View.


Location Coordinate Select the type of location coordinate systems:

• Cartesian.

• Cylindrical.

• Spherical.

Rotation Sequence Select the type of rotation sequence. See Rotation Sequences.

Body Fixed/Space Fixed Select either:

• Space fixed - Adams/View applies the rotations about axes that remain in their original orientation.

• Body fixed - Adams/View applies the rotations about axes that move with the body as it rotates.

As Adams/View applies each rotation to an axis, it produces a new set of axes.

111A - DCoupler Joint Tool

Coupler Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Coupler Tool

Creates a coupler between two or three Joints.

It relates the translational and/or rotational motion of the joints through a linear scaling of the relative motions or through nonlinear relationships that you define by entering parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine that is linked into Adams/View. Couplers are useful if your model uses belts and pulleys or chains and sprockets to transfer motion and energy. Although you can couple only two or three joints, more than one coupler can come from the same joint, as shown in the figure above.

When you create a coupler, you can only create a two-joint coupler. You select the driver joint, the joint to which the second joint is coupled, and the coupled joint, the joint that follows the driver joint. To specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler, you modify the coupler.

Learn about Creating Couplers.

Adams/ViewCreate Butterworth Filter

112

Create Butterworth Filter(Adams/PostProcessor)

Curve Edit toolbar → Filter Curve Tool → Right-click Filter Name text box → filter_function → Create → Create from Butterworth Filter

Creates a Butterworth filter to define the coefficients of a transfer function when creating a curve filter function. The first four options in the dialog box are the same as when you are creating a Butterworth filter directly. See Create/Modify Filter Function dialog box help. To generate these options based on Passband and Stopband options, select the Generate Filter Order _ Frequency checkbox.

Learn about Filtering Curve Data.


Digital/Analog Select analog or digital filtering.

Filter Type Select the type of filter:

• Low Pass - Removes frequencies above the cutoff frequency.

• High Pass - Removes frequencies below the cutoff frequency.

• Band Pass - Removes frequencies outside the two cutoff frequencies.

• Band Stop - Removes frequencies between the two cutoff frequencies.

Order Set how much the filter will have damped the signal at the cutoff frequency, often referred to as how sharp the filter is.

• First-order filter damps 3dB at the cutoff frequency.

• Second-order filter damps 6dB.

• Third-order filter damps 9dB.

Scaled Cutoff Frequency

Set the frequency of cutoff.

• For a digital filter - Determines the cutoff frequency as a ratio of the Nyquist frequency (half the sample frequency). Therefore, for a signal sampled (simulated) with 100 Hz, the Nyquist frequency is 100/2=50Hz. A scaled cutoff frequency=0.3 then has a cutoff frequency=0.3*50=15 Hz.

Note that if the same filter is applied to a signal sampled at 200 Hz, the filter cutoff is at 30 Hz. If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop for Filter Type, you must provide two cutoff frequencies.

• For an analog filter - Enter the cutoff frequency in the current units (rad/s or Hz). If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop for Filter Type, you must provide two cutoff frequencies.

113A - DCreate Butterworth Filter

Generate Filter Order _ Frequency

Select to enable more options to define the Butterworth filter, and use those options to define the order and cutoff frequency above.

If you selected Generate Filter Order _ Frequency, the options listed below appear.

Using the notation Passband Corner Frequency=fp and Corner Frequency=fs, the following rules apply for the options below:

• To create a low-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp < fs.

• To create a high-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp > fs.

• To create a bandpass filter, specify two values each for fp and fs, such that fs1< fp1< fp2 < fs2.

You cannot create a bandstop filter using the options below.

See an Example of Defining a Transfer Function from a Butterworth Filter.

Passband Corner Frequency (Wp) (Hz - for analog)

Enter the frequency where the damping is at least Passband Ripple dB.

Stopband Corner Frequency (Ws) (Hz - for analog)

Enter the frequency outside of which the damping is at least Stopband Attenuation dB.

Passband Ripple (Rp) (Hz - for analog)

Enter the passband ripple.

Stopband Attenuation (Rs) (Hz - for analog)

Enter the stopband attenuation.

Generate Order _ Frequency

Calculates the appropriate order and cutoff frequency (frequencies) based on the values in the lower portion of the dialog box and loads them in the upper portion. It does not transfer them to the Create Filter Function dialog box until you select OK or Apply.


Adams/ViewCreate Clearance

114

Create Clearance

Tools → Clearance → Create

Defines a Clearance study.

Learn more about Defining a Clearance Study.


Model Select the model to be used for the study.

I Body Select the first object in the pair.

You can also select Pick to select the object from the screen. (You can select more than one object at a time.)

J Body Select the second object in the pair.

You can also select Pick to select the object from the screen. (You can select more than one object at a time.)

Name Enter a name for the study. If you are creating several studies (by selecting more than one I and J body), you can enter a base name for the studies, and Adams/PostProcessor will add a suffix to the name (base_1, base_2, and so on).

Maximum Set the maximum distance for the clearance beyond which clearances will not be computed at any given frame. Leave the text box empty if you always want to calculate the minimum distance.

Method Select the method for calculating the minimum distances.

• Polygon

• Vertex

115A - DCreate Design Constraint

Create Design Constraint

Simulate → Design Constraint → New

For Optimization only.

Allows you to create constraint objects to limit the changes that the optimizer can make. Often an optimization finds a configuration that optimizes the objective you provided, but is unrealistic because it violates overall design constraints such as weight, size, speed, or force limits.

To avoid results that violate the design constraints, you can create constraints for the optimization. The optimization analysis improves the objective as much as possible without violating the constraints.

Each constraint object creates an inequality constraint. The optimization keeps the value of the constraint less than or equal to zero. You can create an equality constraint, in effect, by creating a pair of constraint objects, each the negative of the other.

Constraints can involve the simulation results, but are not required to do so. You can constrain overall size, weight, or other factors that depend only on model data. In these cases, use the function or macro/variable option for the constraint, and ignore the analysis data that Adams/View supplies. Instead, compute the constraint directly from the appropriate model data.

Note: You do not need to create an explicit constraint to limit the value of a design variable. You can do this directly by setting properties for the variable.


Name Displays the name of the constraint.

Definition by Select the type of function you want to use from the pull-down menu.

Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or macro and variable. If you are entering a Result set component, enter the name of the result set and component, for example req1.x.

Design Constraint's value is the Select a value.

Select to add comments to help you manage and identify the constraint object. See Comments.

Adams/ViewCreate Design Objective

116

Create Design Objective

Simulate → Design Objective → New

Allows you to create an objective object if a measure is not flexible enough. Objective objects have options for processing simulation results and are valuable when you want to do complex or multi-step computations on model outputs.

Learn more about Creating an Objective Object.


Name Enter the name of the design objective.

Definition by Select the type of object function you want:

• Measure - Use a measure. Learn about Using Measures for Objectives.

• Result set component - Select to use a new Result set component produced by a subsequent simulation.Learn about using a result set component.

• Existing result set component - Select to use an existing results set.

• /View function - Select to use an Adams/View function. Learn about using functions.

• /View Variable and Macro - Select to use a variable and macro. Learn about using variable and macro.

Note: Objectives usually involve simulation results, but they are not required to do so. You can create an objective that depends only on the model data, such as overall weight or size. You can then use Adams/View to vary, or even optimize, the design variables and immediately see the results on the model.

Tip: In this case, use the function or variable/macro option for the objective, and ignore the analysis argument or parameter that Adams/View supplies. Because you do not need simulation results, you should also create a dummy simulation script that does nothing. Then, Adams/View repeatedly sets the variables and evaluates the objective, but does not run any simulations.

Measure/Result Set Comp./Function/Variable and Macro

Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or macro and variable. If you are entering a result set component, enter the name of the result set and component, for example req1.x.


117A - DCreate Design Objective

Design objective's value is

If you are using a measure or result set component, set the design objective’s value. For a measure, enter minimum, maximum, average, last value, absolute minimum, and absolute maximum of the measure. For a results set component, enter minimum, maximum, average, or last value of the result set component.

Select to add any comments for the objective to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


Adams/ViewCreate FEMDATA

118

Create FEMDATA

Build → Data Elements → FEMdata → New/Modify

Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite element or fatigue life analysis for use in third-party products. You use the Settings → Solver → Output → More → Durability Files to specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver Settings - Output dialog box help and the Adams/Durability online help). Adams/View will not output to any files unless you specify the format. For more information, see About Setting Simulation Controls.



Name Enter the name of the FEMDATA element in the Modeling database to create or modify.

Type Select the information that you want output:

• Loads on Rigid Body/Flex Body - Outputs all external forces (reaction and applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and, optionally, inertial forces of the specified body (angular velocity and acceleration, including effects of gravity) as a function of time. Load data will be output in the simulation set of units.

• Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible body. Adams/View will only export coordinates of the active modes in the simulation.

• Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible. Adams/View writes the deformations in the simulation set of units.

• Strain - Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the Modal Neutral File (MNF) of the specified flexible body and an Adams/Durability license is available. Adams/Durability outputs all six components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body except where specified below.

• Stress - Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the MNF of the flexible body and an Adams/Durability license is available. Adams/Durability outputs all six components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs stresses in the simulation set of units in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body except where specified below.

../../adams_durability/master.htm

119A - DCreate FEMDATA

Inertia Check Inertia if you want Adams/View to include inertial loads (linear acceleration, angular acceleration, and velocity) when outputting the loads acting on the body. Otherwise, Adams/View outputs no inertial loads and you will need to rely on an inertia relief capability in the finite element program to balance the external loads with the internal loads.

If you selected Loads on Rigid Body, the following options appear:

R Marker Enter the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system to output loads. Because Adams/Solver resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the coordinate system of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA basic coordinate system of the part's finite element (FE) model.

Peak Slice Select that FE model load data are to be output only at those time steps where the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time options, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG, TX, TY, TZ, and TMAG.

If you selected Loads on Flexible Body, the following options appear:

Inertia Check Inertia if you want Adams/View to include inertial loads (linear acceleration, angular acceleration, and velocity) when outputting the loads acting on the body. Otherwise, Adams/View outputs no inertial loads and you will need to rely on an inertia relief capability in the finite element program to balance the external loads with the internal loads.

Flex Body Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.

Peak Slice Select that FE model load data are to be output only at those time steps where the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time options, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG, TX, TY, TZ, and TMAG.

If you selected Modal Deformation, the following option appears:


If you selected Nodal Deformation, the following option appears:



Adams/ViewCreate FEMDATA

120

Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is specified that does not belong to the flexible body.

Datum Enter a node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal displacements. Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you do not specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of nodal displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified node does not belong to the flexible body.

If you selected Stress or Strain, the following options appear:

Flex Body Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/Durability outputs the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.

On Nodes/Hot Spots Lets you select either output on nodes or Hotspots. The options in the dialog box change depending on the selection, as explained in the next rows of the table. For an example of defining hot spots, see the FEMDATA statement and near the end of it, the Definition of Hotspots.

If you selected On Nodes, the following options appear:

Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not belong to the flexible body.

R Marker Enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform the stress or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, you can reference a marker whose orientation does match.

If you selected Hot Spots, the following options appear:

Hotspots Enter the number of hot spots to locate and output. With this option, a text file containing a tab-delimited table of hot spot information, such as node ID, maximum value, time when the maximum value occurred, and location, is generated.

Note: When you set the Time options, Adams/Durability only checks the time steps within those specifications for the hot spots.


121A - DCreate FEMDATA

Von Mises/Max Prin/Min Prin.,/Max Shear/Normal-X/Normal-Y/Normal-Z/Shear-XY/Shear-YZ/Shear-ZX

Specify the value of stress/strain in determining hotspots from one of Von Mises, Max Prin., Min Prin., Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY, Shear-YZ, or Shear-ZX. For more information, see the FEMDATA statement.

Radius Enter a radius that defines the spherical extent of each hotspot. A default value of 0.0 (zero) means that all nodes in the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.

R Marker Enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform the stress or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, one can reference a marker whose orientation does match.

The following options appear for all types of FE model data:

File Enter the output file name for the FE model data. You can specify an existing directory, root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be composed of the Adams run and body IDs according to the type of data and file format that you specified in Solver → Settings → Output → More → Durability Files (for more information, see the Adams/Durability online help).

Time Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:

• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the start of the simulation.

• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a peak load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.



Adams/ViewCreate Forces Palette and Tool Stack

122

Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack

Build → Forces Main toolbox → Right-click Create Forces tool stack

Displays tools for creating forces. The Create Forces palette and tool stack are shown below. Learn about Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes. Learn more about Forces.

Forces Tool Stack Create Forces Palette (from Build Menu)

123A - DCreate Forces Palette and Tool Stack

Icon Link

Translational Spring Damper Tool

Single-Component Force tool

Create/Modify Contact

Torsion SpringTool

Single-Component Torque tool

Create/Modify Wheel and Tire

Bushing Tool

Six-Component General Force tool

Create/Modify Modal Force

Field Element Tool

Three-Component Force tool

Gravity

Beam

Three-Component Torque tool

Adams/ViewCreate New Color

124

Create New Color

Settings → Colors → New Color

Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to Edit Color dialog box to define its red, green, and blue values.


Color Name Enter the name of the new color.

125A - DCreate Run-Time Clearance

Create Run-Time Clearance

Simulate → Run-Time Clearance → New

Run-Time Clearances can be used to monitor the clearance distance between two selected geometries/flexible bodies. This clearance distance is based upon tesselation of geometry or analytical representation of known geometry. For flexible parts, clearance is based upon the external face geometry in the MNF. After a simulation is complete, the minimum clearance location between the two geometries/flexible bodies may be animated. This is represented as a line between the objects involved. You can also plot the clearance result sets and export the clearance data in the results file.


Clearance Name Enter the name for the Clearance analysis.

Clearance Type Set to the type according to the participating bodies in the clearance analysis. Clearances can be created between geometries, flexible parts or between flexible parts and geometries.The text boxes change depending on the clearance type you selected.

Threshold Optional field to allow the user to specify a maximum distance for which the clearance calculations will not be computed. Set to 0.0 by default.

If you selected Geometry to Geometry, Adams/View displays the following two options:

I Geometry Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.

J Geometry Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.

If you selected Geometry to Flexible Body, Adams/View displays the following four options:


J Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.

J Region This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered, then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. J Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by right-clicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node" option.Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the nodes with the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse button to finish.

Exclusion Radius Specifies the radius for excluding connection between the two parts selected for clearance analysis. The nodes that lie in the specified radius of any joints connecting the specified J flexible body and the I Geometry will be excluded from the clearance computation.

If you selected Flexible Body to Geometry Adams/View displays the following four options:

Adams/ViewCreate Run-Time Clearance

126

I Flex Body Select a Flexible Body

I Region This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered, then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. I Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by right-clicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node" option. Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the nodes with the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse button to finish.


Exclusion Radius Specifies the radius for excluding connection between the two parts selected for clearance analysis. The nodes that lie in the specified radius of any joints connecting the specified I flexible body and the J Geometry will be excluded from the clearance computation.

If you selected Flexible Body to Flexible Body Adams/View displays the following five options:



Note: By default nodes can be selected from the last created/selected flexible body. In case a new flexible body has been created or selected after the I Flex Body or the J Flex Body fields have been entered, the original flexible body needs to be made the default flexible body by the command "defaults model flexible_body_name= name"

J Flex Body Select a Flexible Body.


127A - DCreate Run-Time Clearance



Exclusion Radius Specifies the radius for excluding connection between the two parts selected for clearance analysis. The nodes that lie in the specified radius of any joints connecting the specified I flexible body and the J flexible body will be excluded from the clearance computation.


Adams/ViewCreate Spec Line

128

Create Spec Line

Adams/PostProcessor → Plot → Create Spec Line

Adds Spec lines to your plots to help you compare curves to a constant baseline value. A spec line can be a horizontal, vertical, or diagonal line that indicates a value of significance on the vertical axis. You can start the spec line at any X or Y position.

For example, if you are plotting acceleration and you want to keep the acceleration below a certain value, you can add a spec line marking that value on the plot. You can then compare any curves that you add to that plot to see if the curves fall beneath the spec line. There are no limits to the number of spec lines you can add to a plot.


Spec Line Name Enter the name you want to assign to the spec line. The box shows the complete name of the spec line, including its parentsin the database.

Y Value Enter a Y value if you want a horizontal spec line.

X Value Enter an X value if you want a vertical spec line.

Note: To create a diagonal spec line, enter a value for both X and Y.

Color Select a color for the spec line.

Line Style Select a line style.

Thickness Select the thickness for the spec line.

129A - DCreate State Variable for Plant State

Create State Variable for Plant State

Data Element Create Plant State dialog box → Create State Variable for Plant State

Creates state variables for use in a plant state object. The variables that a plant state object can only contain functions of displacement:

• Learn more about plant state objects in the LINERAR command

• Learn about plant states with Data Element Create Plant State dialog box help.



State Variable Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the state variable.

To Marker Enter the marker to which to measure.

From Marker Enter the marker or point from which to measure.

Along Marker Enter the reference marker along which the measure is to be taken.

From Component Select the component in which you are interested. The components available depend on the coordinate system.

Adams/ViewCreate a Flexible Body

130

Create a Flexible Body

Build → Flexible Bodies → Adams/Flex

Imports a flexible body into Adams/Flex. You specify a Modal Neutral File (MNF) or an MD DB file (.master) and Adams/View creates the necessary Adams/View geometry for displaying the flexible body. It also creates a mesh on the flexible body representing the flexible body nodes.

By default, Adams/Flex places the flexible body so the flexible body’s local body reference frame (LBRF) is at the origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the location and orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element in Adams/View.


Flexible Body Name Enter the name you want assigned to the flexible body.

Modal Neutral File Name

or

MD DB File Name

Select the appropriate option and enter the name of the MNF or the MD DB file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Note: When you use the Browse command to search for a file, it places the absolute path to the file in the text box. When you save the database or a command file, Adams/View uses the absolute path in the saved file. If you are sharing the database or command file with other users, you may want to edit the path that the Browse command places in the text box so it is a relative path or remove it altogether if the MNF/MD DB file is in the current working directory.

Index The parameter applies only, when the user is creating a flexible body out of the MD DB. The parameter specifies the index of the flexible body in the specified MD DB. The parameter is optional. If not specified, it is assumed to have the value 1.

Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB, using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the displayed list.

Import All This option can be used as an alternative to specifying an index. Using this option will import all flexible bodies in the specified MD DB at once. All the created bodies will have a default location and orientation as (0,0,0).

131A - DCreate a Flexible Body

Damping Ratio Do one of the following:

• Leave use default selected to accept the default nonzero damping as follows:

• 1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.

• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.

• 100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.

• Clear the selection of use default, and then enter:

• Scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.

• Adams run-time function expressions to create complex damping phenomena in your flexible body. In addition, function expressions, such as FXFREQ and FXMODE, allow you to apply different levels of damping to individual modes.

To get help entering a function expression, right-click the Damping text box, and then select Expression Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see Adams/View Function Builder online help.

Shortcut to Function Builder: Click the More button .

Learn more about Specifying Damping.

Generalized Damping Select one:

• Off - Disables the generalized damping.

• Full - Enables the complete generalized damping matrix, including the effects of a resultant damping force.

• Internal Only - Only enables the portion of the generalized damping matrix corresponding to the modal coordinates (that is, ignore the resultant damping force).

Location Enter x, y, z coordinate defining the flexible body's location in the default coordinate system.

Orientation Specify either of these three orientation methods:

• Orientation

• Along Axis Orientation

• In Plane Oriention


../../adams_view_fn/master.htm


Adams/ViewCreate a Flexible Body

132

Relative to You can:

• Specify the orientation coordinates.

• Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.

FEM Translate Select to display the FEM Translate dialog box to translate either:

• MSC.Nastran output data into a MNF. You generate the output data by first running MSC.Nastran with the AdamsMNF Case Control command or a special DMAP alter.

• Universal file into a MNF that you can use to create a flexible body with a constant coupling inertia invariant formulation.

MNF XForm Select to display the MNF XForm dialog box to transform the flexible body.

If you check the More option following parameters will appear

Dynamic Limit Specify the threshold frequency for quasi-static modes. Any mode with frequency higher than this value will be treated as quasi-static.

Stability Factor Specify the amount of damping needed to add to the quasi-static modes. This is required to stabilize the simulation.


133A - DCreate a Request

Create a Request

Build → Measure → REQUEST → New

Creates a request. Note that the options for providing result and component names are only available if the output of the results set is XML format. See Results (.res) Options dialog box help.

Learn more about Requests.



Request Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the request in the Modeling database.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the request. See Adams/Solver ID.

Component Names Available for XML result files only.

Enter one or more strings that identify the names of the result set components the request produces. Learn more about About Naming Results and Components in Requests.

Component Labels/Component Units

Available for XML result files only.

Select either of the following to further identify the components of the results set:

• Component Units - Enter one or more strings that identify the unit dimension of the result set components in XML result files. If you do not specify units, then the units of the components are predefined based upon standard request type (for example, displacement, velocity, and acceleration). See standard units.

• Component Labels - Enter one or more strings that identify the labels to be used when plotting the result set components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define the string if you se special characters or white space.

Adams/ViewCreate a Request

134

Results Name Specifies the name of the result set in which all result set components produced by this request are placed when the result file is written in XML. If there is an existing result set with this name, then the result set components are placed in that result set. If there isn't an existing result set, then a new one is created and all the result set components are placed there.

This is helpful if you want to group the output from multiple requests into a single result set. For example, you might have several different requests measuring driver input for a vehicle, and you might want to place them all within a result set named Driver_Inputs for easier viewing in Adams/PostProcessor.

Comments Add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Define Using Type & Markers/

Define Using Function Expressions/

Define Using Subroutines/Define Using Variables

Set to:

• Define Using Type & Markers

• Define Using Function Expressions

• Define Using Subroutines

• Define Using Variables

If you selected Define Using Type & Markers, the following options appear:

Output Type Select the type of output (Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, or Force).

I Marker, J Marker, R Marker Specify the Markers with respect to which the output will be calculated.

If you selected Define Using Subroutines, the following options appear:

User Function Enter parameters to the user-written subroutine REQSUB. Enter the user function using the following format where r1 through r30 are constants passed to the subroutine:

r1, ..., r30

Learn About Specifying a Subroutine.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine REQSUB. Learn about ROUTINE Argument.


135A - DCreate a Request

Title If you specified to write an output file (.out), enter up to eight headings for columns of request output. Separate each heading with a comma (,).

Each heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters, including underscores (_). The first character in each heading must be alphabetic. You cannot use a comma (,), a semicolon (;), an ampersand (&), or an exclamation point (!).

If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two quotation marks (" ") with no characters between them.

If you selected Define Using Function Expressions, the following options appear:

f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 Enter function expressions in the boxes f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 . Do not use f1 and f5 . Adams/Solver uses them to hold magnitudes for the three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a function in every text box. Learn About Specifying Function Expressions.

Title Enter a title for the top of each set of information output. The entire comment must be on one line. The title can be only eighty characters long. You can use blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters. However, you cannot use the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!).

If you selected Define Using Variables, the following options appear:

Variables Enter the variables in the text box. Learn about Creating and Modifying State Variables.


Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Contact

136

Create/Modify Contact

Build → Forces → Contact Force Tool

Creates or modifies a contact force between two geometries. Learn About Contact Forces. For solids and curves, you can select more than one geometry as long as the geometry belongs to the same part. The first geometry is called the I geometry and the second geometry is called the J geometry. For sphere-to-sphere contacts, you can specify that the contact be inside or outside the sphere.

Learn more about Contacts.



If you type a geometry object name directly in the text box, you must press Enter to register the value.

Contact Name Enter the name of the contact to create or modify.

Contact Type Set to the type of geometry to come into contact. The text boxes change depending on the type of contact force you selected.

If you selected Solid to Solid, Adams/View displays the following two options:

I Solid Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.

J Solid Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.

If you selected Curve to Curve, Adams/View displays the following four options:

I Curve Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same part.

I Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and then select the Change Direction tool .

J Curve Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same part.

J Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and then select the Change Direction tool .

If you selected Point to Curve, Adams/View displays the following two options:

Marker Enter a marker.

Curve Enter one or more curves.

Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and then select the Change Direction tool .

If you selected Point to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:

Marker Enter a marker.

Plane Enter a plane.

137A - DCreate/Modify Contact

If you selected Curve to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:

Curve Enter one or more curves.



If you selected Sphere to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:

Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .



If you selected Sphere to Sphere, Adams/View displays the following two options:



If you selected Flex Body to Solid, Adams/View displays the following two options:

I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.

J Solid Select a Geometry Solid.

If you selected Flex Body to Flex Body, Adams/View displays the following two options:



If you selected Flex Edge to Curve, Adams/View displays the following three options:


To reset the Edge, select the Reset The Edge tool .

I Flex Edge Select a Flex Edge on I Flexible Body.

To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .

J Curve Select a Curve. Multiple curves are not allowed.

If you selected Flex Edge to Flex Edge, Adams/View displays the following four options:





138





J Flex Edge Select a Flex Edge on J Flexible Body .


If you selected Flex Edge to Plane, Adams/View displays the following three options:





Plane Select a Plane. Multiple Planes are not allowed.

The following options apply to all types of geometry:

Force Display/Color Select to turn on the force display of both normal and friction forces, and select a color for the force display.

Note: If you are using an External Adams/Solver, you must set the output files to XML to view the force display. See Solver Settings - Output dialog box help.

Normal Force Select either:

• Restitution - To define the normal force as restitution-based. This option is not available with Flex Body to Solid and Flex Body to Flex Body type of contacts.

• Impact - To define the normal force based on an impact using the IMPACT function.

• User Defined - To define the force based on a User-written subroutine.

Learn about the types of Contact Force Algorithms and also see Learning More about the Contact Detection Algorithm.

If you selected Restitution for Normal Force, define the following two options:



Penalty Enter a penalty value to define the local stiffness properties between the contacting material.

A large penalty value ensures that the penetration of one geometry into another will be small. Large values, however, will cause numerical integration difficulties. A value of 1E6 is appropriate for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec. For more information on how to specify this value, see the Extended Definition for the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

Notes: The penalty value of 1.0E+06 is recommended value for users who have no prior experience with restitution based contacts. Experienced users will find values that are both smaller and larger that are applicable to their models.

The value of 1.0E+06 was determined heuristically by simulating real world models (for example, billiard ball collisions). It is appropriate for bodies with masses in the range of 0.1 to 1.0e+03 Kilograms and velocities in the range of 0.01 to 1.0e+03 meters/second. For collisions involving asteroids, a larger value may be needed.

Many contact parameters (for example, stiffness, damping, exponent) have default values that are not suitable for all models. They are intended to help users who has very little modeling background. The reason that contact parameters exist is to give users as much flexibility as possible in building and simulating their models.

Restitution Coefficient

Enter the coefficient of restitution, which models the energy loss during contact.

• A value of zero specifies a perfectly plastic contact between the two colliding bodies.

• A value of one specifies a perfectly elastic contact. There is no energy loss.

The coefficient of restitution is a function of the two materials that are coming into contact. For information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of restitution, see the table for the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

If you selected Impact for Normal Force, define the following four options:



140

Stiffness Enter a material stiffness that is to be used to calculate the normal force for the impact model. In general, the higher the stiffness, the more rigid or hard the bodies in contact are.

Note: When changing the length units in Adams/View, stiffnesses in contacts are scaled by (length conversion factor**exponent). When changing the force unit, stiffness is only scaled by the force conversion factor.

Force Exponent Adams/Solver models normal force as a nonlinear springdamper. If the damping penetration, below, is the instantaneous penetration between the contacting geometry, Adams/Solver calculates the contribution of the material stiffness to the instantaneous normal forces as:

STIFFNESS * (PENALTY)**EXPONENT

For more information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams/Solver online help.

Damping Enter a value to define the damping properties of the contacting material. Consider a damping coefficient that is about one percent of the stiffness coefficient.

Penetration Depth Enter a value to define the penetration at which Adams/Solver turns on full damping. Adams/Solver uses a cubic STEP function to increase the damping coefficient from zero, at zero penetration, to full damping when the penetration reaches the damping penetration. A reasonable value for this parameter is 0.01 mm. For more information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams/Solver online help.

If you selected User Defined for Normal Force, define the following two options:

User function Specify the user parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine CNFSUB. For more on user-written subroutines, see the Adams/Solver online help.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about ROUTINE Argument.

The following option is available for all choices:

Augmented Lagrangian

Select to refine the normal force between two sets of rigid geometries that are in contact. When you select Augmented Lagrangian, Adams/View uses iterative refinement to ensure that penetration between the geometries is minimal. It also ensures that the normal force magnitude is relatively insensitive to the penalty or stiffness used to model the local material compliance effects.

Note: Augmented Lagrangian is only available when defining a Restitution-based contact.



Friction Force Select to model the friction effects at the contact locations using the Coulomb friction model, no friction, or as user-defined subroutine. The Coulomb friction model models dynamic friction but not stiction in contacts.

For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In addition, read the information for the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

If you selected Coulomb for Friction Force, define the following four options:

Coulomb Friction Specify whether the friction effects are to be included at run time:

• On

• Off

• Dynamics Only

Static Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is smaller than the value for Static Transition Vel. For information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of static friction, see Material Contact Properties Table.

Excessively large values of Static Coefficient can cause integration difficulties.

Range: Static Coefficient 0

Dynamic Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is larger than the value for Friction Transition Vel.

For information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficientof the dynamic coefficient of friction, see Material Contact Properties Table.

Excessively large values of Dynamic Coefficient can cause integration difficulties.

Range: 0 Dynamic Coefficient Static Coefficient



142

Static Transition Vel. Enter the static transition velocity.The figure below shows how the coefficient of friction varies with slip velocity at a typical contact point.

In this simple model:

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•


μ Vs–( ) μs=

μ Vs( ) μs–=

μ 0( ) 0=

μ Vd–( ) μd=

μ Vd( ) μd=

μ V( ) sign V( ) μd⋅–= for V Vd>( )

μ V( ) step V Vd μd Vs μs, , , ,( ) sign V( )⋅–= for Vs V< Vd>( )

μ V( ) step V V– s μs Vs μ– s, , , ,( )= for Vs– V< Vs>( )


Static Transition Vel. (cont.)

In the figure:

• Vs, the slip velocity at which the coefficient friction achieves a maximum value of , is denoted as

STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY.

• is the coefficient of static friction.

• is the coefficient of dynamic friction.

For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In addition, read the information for the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

Range: 0 < Static Transition Vel. Friction Transition Vel.

Friction Transition Vel.

Enter the friction transition velocity.

Adams/Solver gradually transitions the coefficient of friction from the value for Static Coefficent to the value for Dynamic Coefficient as the slip velocity at the contact point increases. When the slip velocity is equal to the value specified for Friction Transition Vel., the effective coefficient of friction is set to Dynamic Coefficient. For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In addition, read the information for the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

Note: Small values for this option cause the integrator difficulties. You should specify this value as:

Friction Transition Vel. 5* ERROR

where: ERROR is the integration error used for the solution. Its default value is 1E-3.

Range: Friction Transition Vel. Static Transition Vel. > 0

If you selected User Defined for Friction Force, define the following two options:

User function Specify the user parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine. For more on user-written subroutines, see Adams/Solver online help.

Routine Enter the name of the function to call. The default is CNFSUB.


μs

μs

μd

../../adams_solver/master.htm

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Contact Arrays

144

Create/Modify Contact ArraysContact arrays define the characteristics of force-based contacts. You specify a contact array for each force-based contact. You can, however, use the same contact array with multiple contact forces.

The options for defining the normal force magnitudes for contact arrays are identical to the parameters in the IMPACT function. For information on the IMPACT function, see Adams/View Function Builder online help.


Contact Array Name Enter the name of the contact array to modify.

Stiffness Force Enter the force generated for each unit of penetration depth.

Force Exponent Enter the exponent of the force deformation characteristic.

Damping Maximum Enter the viscous damping coefficient.

Penetration Depth Enter the penetration depth at which full damping is applied.

Static Friction Coefficient (µs) Enter the proportion of normal force applied in the opposite direction of relative motion, from zero velocity to static threshold velocity.

Static Friction Slip Velocity (Vs) Enter the velocity at which full value of the static friction coefficient is applied.

Dynamic Friction Coefficient (µk) Enter the proportion of normal force applied in the opposite direction of relative motion, from slip velocity to dynamic transition velocity.

Dynamic Friction Transition Velocity (Vk)

Enter the velocity at which the value of the dynamic friction coefficient has fully transitioned from the static friction coefficient.



145A - DCreate/Modify Design Variable

Create/Modify Design Variable

Build → Design Variable → New/Modify

Creates or modifies a design variable.

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Design Variable

146

Learn more about Using Design Variables.


Name Enter the name of the design variable.

Type Select Real, Integer, String, or Object.

If you selected the type Real, you have the option:

Units Optionally, select the type of units.

If you selected the type Real or Integer, the following four options appear:

Standard Value Enter or change the default value for the design variable.

Value Range by Set the one of the following and enter the limits in the Min/Max or +/- Delta text boxes:

• Absolute Min and Max Values - Specifies a value range (an upper and lower limit)

• +/- Delta Relative to Value - Specifies increments relative to the standard value.

• +/- Percent Relative to Value - Specifies percentage increments relative to the standard value.

If only a certain range of values is possible, use absolute limits to keep the variable within that fixed range. Otherwise, use relative or percent relative limits to include a reasonable amount above and below your initial value. Relative and percent-relative limits tie the range to the value of the variable, so if you change the value of the variable, the limits automatically change with it.To learn more about the choices, see Preparing for Parametric Analyses.

- Delta/Min Value Enter the lower limit for the range or the relative amount or percentage below the standard value.

+ Delta/Max Value Enter the upper limit for the range or the relative amount or percentage above the standard value.

Allow Optimization to ignore range

If you want to allow an optimization to use any value for the variable, select Allow Optimization to ignore range.

Selecting Allow Optimization to ignore range does not disable the range for a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE). The range is used for a design study or DOE only if a list of values has not been specified or is to be ignored.

147A - DCreate/Modify Design Variable

List of allowed value If you want to specify a list of values, select List of allowed values and enter the values in the text box that appears. This lets you to use unequally spaced values or always use the same set of values. By default, the list of values takes precedence over the range in a design study or DOE.

Note: The Value Range setting also affects the allowed values you enter. For example, if you have selected a Value Range of percent relative, then Adams/View interprets your entered allowed values as percentages relative to the standard value.

If you selected List of allowed values, the following two options appear:

Generate Creates a list of values for you automatically.

Allow Design Study to ignore list

To keep the list of values and still use the range for a design study and DOE, select Allow Design Study to ignore list. By selecting Allow Design Study to ignore list, you can switch back and forth between using the range and the list of values without re-entering the list each time.

If you selected String, the following option appears:

String value Enter the alphanumeric string for the design variable.

If you selected Object, the following option appears:

Object value Enter the database object for the design variable (for example, .model_1.part_1). For more on objects and their database name, see Getting Object Names and Data Dictionary in the Adams/View Function Builder online help.

Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


Note: Now that you have created a design variable, you’ll need to reference it in your model. You can enter the design variable directly, using the Reference Design Variable command, or you can type it into a text box. You can also use the Function Builder to create a more complex expression using the design variable. When you reference your design variable, Adams/View places parentheses () around the variable because you are creating a simple expression that references the value of the design variable.



Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Differential Equation

148

Create/Modify Differential Equation

Build → System Elements → Differential Equation→ New/Modify

Creates or modifies a differential equation.

Learn about:

• About Using Differential Equations.

• Creating and Modifying Differential Equations.



Name Enter the name of the differential equation.

Type Select either Explicit or Implicit to indicate that the function expression or subroutine defines the explicit or implicit form of the equation.

Learn about Ways to Define Differential Equations.

Definition Set to either:

• Run-time Expression to enter a function expression that Adams/Solver evaluates during a Simulation. In the function expression, the system variable DIF(i) is the value of the dependent variable that the differential equation defines, and DIF1(j) is the first derivative of the dependent variable that the differential equation defines.

• User written subroutine to enter a subroutine that defines the equation.

y' = • If you selected Run-time Expression, enter the function expression

that defines the differential equation. Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See the Adams/View Function Builder online help.

• If you selected User written subroutine, enter constants to the User-written subroutine DIFSUB to define a variable. see the Adams/Solver Subroutines online help.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine DIFSUB. Learn about ROUTINE Argument.



149A - DCreate/Modify Differential Equation

Initial Conditions Specify:

• The initial value of the differential equation at the start of the simulation.

• Optionally, if you are defining an implicit equation, an approximate value of the initial time derivative of the differential equation at the start of the simulation. (You do not need to supply a second value when you enter a explicit equation because Adams/Solver can compute the initial time derivative directly from the equation.)

Adams/Solver might adjust the value of the time derivative when it performs an initial conditions simulation. Entering an initial value for the time derivative helps Adams/Solver converge to a desired initial conditions solution.

Keep value constant during static analyses.

Select whether or not Adams/Solver should hold constant the value of the differential equation during Static equilibrium and Quasi-static simulations. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.


Adams/ViewCreate/modify an External System

150

Create/modify an External System

Build → External Systems → New…

The dialog box operates in two modes,

• Create mode: To create a new External system in the model. When the dialog is opened from the menu (Build → External Systems → New…) it opens in ‘Create’ mode.

• Modify mode: To modify an existing External System in the model. If an existing external system in the model, is selected for modification (by right clicking the body and choosing the 'Modify' option) then the same dialog opens in 'Modify' mode. In the Modify mode, the fields on the dialog will be pre-populated with the values of the external system being modified.

Note: By default, the external system is placed so its local body reference frame (LBRF) is at the origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the location and orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element in Adams/View. This is applicable only for external systems that have a visual representation.


External System Name Enter the name you want assigned to the external system.

type The type of external system. Select one from the following options,

1. Nastran

2. User

The default option when the dialog is opened in the Create mode is ‘Nastran’.

input_file_name File containing the input source parameters for the external system. The

button provided on the side of the field can be used to view and / or

edit the specified file.

modal_neutral_file_name An optional (rigid only) MNF, if a visual representation of the external system is required.

md_db_file_name An optional MD DB, if a visual representation of the external system is required.

index_in_database Index of the body in the specified MD DB. Valid only if the parameter md_db_file_name is specified.

151A - DCreate/modify an External System

Note: You may optionally specify a modal neutral file (MNF) or an MD DB file (.master) and Adams/View creates the necessary Adams/View geometry for displaying the external system. It also creates a mesh on the external system representing the external system nodes. The external system will have a visual representation only if either of MNF/MD DB is specified.

user_function Specifies up to 30 values for Adams/Solver to pass to a user-written subroutine. Valid only if the external system type is 'user'. Otherwise the corresponding fields will be disabled for input.

interface_routines Specifies an alternative library and subroutine names for the user subroutines EXTSYS_DERIV, EXTSYS_UPDATE, EXTSYS_OUTPUT, EXTSYS_SAMP, EXTSYS_SET_NS, EXTSYS_SET_ND, EXTSYS_SENSUB, EXTSYS_SET_STATIC_HOLD, EXTSYS_SET_SAMPLE_OFFSET, respectively. Valid only if the external system type is 'user'. Otherwise the corresponding fields will be disabled for input.

Location Enter x, y, z coordinate defining the flexible body's location in the default coordinate system.

Orientation Specify either of these three orientation methods,

• Orientation


• In Plane Orientation

Relative to You can:


• Leave blank to use the default coordinate system


Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Filter Function

152

Create/Modify Filter Function(Adams/PostProcessor)

Plot → Filter → Create/Modify

Shortcut: Curve Edit toolbar → Filter Curve Tool → Right-click Filter Name text box → filter_function → Create

Creates or modifies a curve filter to eliminate noise on time signals or to emphasize a specific frequency content of a time signal. Adams/PostProcessor supports two different types of filters:

• Butterworth filter - butter() in MATLAB™ developed by The MathWorks, Inc.

• Transfer function - A filter you define by directly specifying the coefficients of a transfer function.

Once you create a filter, you can apply it to any curve.

Learn about Filtering Curve Data.


Filter Name If creating a filter function, enter a name for the filter.

Defined by Select to create either a Butterworth filter or a transfer function.

If you selected Butterworth, Adams/PostProcessor displays the following options:

Analog/Digital Select to create either an analog or digital Butterworth filter. Learn About Filtering Methods.

Filter Type Select the type of filter:

• Low Pass - Removes frequencies above the cutoff frequency.

• High Pass - Removes frequencies below the cutoff frequency.

• Band Pass - Removes frequencies outside the two cutoff frequencies.

• Band Stop - Removes frequencies between the two cutoff frequencies.

Order Set how much the filter will have damped the signal at the cutoff frequency, often referred to as how sharp the filter is.

• First-order filter damps 3dB at the cutoff frequency.

• Second-order damps 6dB.

• Third-order damps 9dB.

153A - DCreate/Modify Filter Function

Cutoff Frequency (Scaled) - Digital filters

Cutoff Frequency (Hz) - Analog filters

Set the frequency of cutoff.

• For a digital filter - Determines the cutoff frequency as a ratio of the Nyquist frequency (half the sample frequency). Therefore, for a signal sampled (simulated) with 100 Hz, the Nyquist frequency is 100/2=50Hz. A scaled cutoff frequency=0.3 then has a cutoff frequency=0.3*50=15 Hz.

Note that if the same filter is applied to a signal sampled at 200 Hz, the filter cutoff is at 30 Hz. If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop for Filter Type, you must provide two cutoff frequencies.

• For an analog filter - Enter the cutoff frequency in the current units (rad/s or Hz). If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop for Filter Type, you must provide two cutoff frequencies.

If you selected Transfer Function, Adams/PostProcessor displays the following options:

Analog/Digital Select to create either an analog or digital Butterworth filter.

Create from Butterworth Filter

Select to display the Create Butterworth Filter dialog box to define the transfer function coefficients based on a Butterworth filter.


Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Filter Function

154

Numerator/Denominator Coefficients

Specify the coefficients for the transfer function that define the filter.

• For an analog filter, the transfer function is defined by the continuous Laplace s polynomial.

• For a digital filter, the transfer function is defined in the z-plane.

The coefficients should be given according to MATLAB convention, which is descending powers of s (or z):

This differs from how a transfer function is defined for Adams/Solver, where the coefficients are given in increasing order:

Check Format and Display Plot

Select to display a plot of the transfer function's gain (magnitude) or phase. Always check the filter before using it.

Note:

• If you have not defined the filter correctly, an error message appears.

• If you’ve defined the filter correctly, a plot appears in which you can switch between the filter’s gain and phase plots and change scales.


155A - DCreate/Modify Friction

Create/Modify Friction

Right-click joint → Modify → Friction tool

Models both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical, hooke/universal, and spherical joints. You cannot apply friction to joints connected to Flexible bodies or Point masses.

For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, select a type of joint below:

• Revolute Joint Options

• Cylindrical Joint Options

• Translational Joint Options

• Spherical Joint Options

• Universal/Hooke Joint Options

Learn about:

• Friction Regime Determination (FRD)

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify General Constraint

156


Build → Joints → General Constraint Tool Edit → Modify → select general constraint

Available with Adams/Solver (C++) only

Creates or modifies a general constraint that lets you define an arbitrary constraint specific to a particular model. As its name implies, it is more general than the idealized joints, which describe physically recognizable combination of constraints that are used to connect bodies together. You can also use the general constraint to equivalently define an existing idealized joint. Read more about the GCON statement in Adams/Solver (C++).

We advise that you use the general constraint with caution. Be sure to read the Known Limitations in the GCON statement.


Name Enter the name for the general constraint. If you are creating a general constraint, Adams/View assigns a default name to it.

f(q)= Enter a runtime expression that Adams/Solver (C++) forces to zero during the simulation. To enter a function expression, next to the f (q)= text

box, select the More tool to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see the Function Builder online help. Learn more about defining a runtime expression for a general constraint with Extended Definition of GCON statement.

Report action forces on marker Enter a marker to have the reaction force on this marker measured and reported as part of standard results. The reaction force reported is the force that is exerted on the marker to satisfy the constraint equation. Note that if you specify a marker and the runtine expression has no dependency on it, the general constraint reports a zero force.

Default value is the ground coordinate system (GCS).

Note: You cannot enter the Adams ID for the marker; you must enter the name of the marker. Learn about Adams/Solver IDs.

Add any comments about the general constraint that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


157A - DCreate/Modify General State Equation

Create/Modify General State Equation

Build → System Elements → General State Equation → New/Modify

Lets you represent a subsystem that has well defined inputs (u), internal states (x), and a set of well defined outputs (y).

Learn about:

• Creating and Modifying General State Equations

• System Elements



General State Equation Enter the name of the GSE.

Solver ID Assign a unique ID number to the GSE. See Adams/Solver ID.

U Array (Inputs) Specify the array element that defines the input variables for the GSE. The U array is optional. When not specified, there are no system inputs. The number of inputs to the GSE is inferred from the number of variables in the U array.

Y Array (Outputs) Specify the array element that defines the output variables for the GSE.

User Function Parameters Specifies the parameters that are to be passed to the User-written subroutines that define the constitutive equations of a GSE, viz., Equations (1), (2), and (3).

Three user subroutines are associated with a GSE:

• GSE_DERIV is called to evaluate fc() in Equations 1.

• GSE_UPDATE is called to evaluate fd() in Equations 2.

• GSE_OUTPUT is called to evaluate g() in Equations 3.

See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.

Interface Function Names If you specify a user function, enter function names to use other than the standard names GSE_DERIV, GSE_UPDATE, and GSE_OUTPUT.

States Set to:

• Continuous

• Discrete

• Sampled

• None (No options appear)

If you selected Continuous or Sampled, the following options appear:


Adams/ViewCreate/Modify General State Equation

158

X Array (Continous) Enter the array element that defines the continuous states for the GSE. The array element must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.

IC Array (Continous) Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the continuous states in the system.

When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the continuous states are initialized to zero.

Static Hold Indicate whether or not the continuous GSE states are permitted to change during static and Quasi-static simulations.

If you selected Discrete or Sampled, the following options appear:

X Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that is used to access the discrete states for the GSE. It must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.

IC Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the discrete states in the system. The array is optional. The array element must be of the IC type.

When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the discrete states are initialized to zero.

First Sample Time Specify the Simulation time at which the sampling of the discrete states is to start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to be at the initial condition specified. The default is zero.

Sample Function/Sample User Parameters

Specify the sampling period associated with the discrete states of a GSE. This tells Adams/Solver to control its step size so that the discrete states of the GSE are updated at:

last_sample_time + sample_period

In cases where an expression for the sampling period is difficult to write, you can specify it in a user-written subroutine GSE_SAMP. Adams/Solver will call this function at each sample time to find out the next sample period.

Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See Function Builder and the Adams/View Function Builder online help.

Add any comments about the GSE to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.




159A - DCreate/Modify Material

Create/Modify Material

Build → Materials

Creates or modifies a material, which you can then assign to parts.

You define a material by its composition, such as restitution coefficient, Young's modulus, Poisson’s ratio, and mass density. Part material properties are important in determining the mass moments of inertia of a part.

Learn about the Standard Material Properties.


Name If desired, change the default name assigned to the new material type.

Youngs Modulus Enter the values for Young’s Modulus.

Poissons Ratio Enter Poisson’s Ratio.

Density Enter mass density.

Select to enter any comments you want associated with the material type. See Comments.

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Matrix

160

Create/Modify Matrix

Build → Data Elements → Matrix → New/Modify

Creates or modifies a Data element matrix.

Learn about creating and modifying Matrices.

Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams/View model if multiple matrices are to be read from the same file.



Matrix Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the matrix.

Units Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not want units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams/View automatically performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your default modeling units.

Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify the array. See Comments.

Full Matrix/

Sparse Matrix/

From a File

Set to:

• Full Matrix

• Sparse Matrix

• From a File

Learn more about Matrix Format Types.

If you selected Full Matrix, the following options appear:

Enter Input Ordered by Columns/

Enter Input Ordered by Rows

Set to either:

• Enter Input Ordered by Columns - Specify that matrix values are arranged in order by column.

• Enter Input Ordered by Rows - Specify that matrix values are arranged in order by row.

User Entered Numbers/

Result Set Component Names

Select either:

• User Entered Numbers to enter the values yourself.

• Result Set Component Names to obtain the values from the results of a Simulation from a Result set component.

See an Example of Entering Matrix in Full Format.

161A - DCreate/Modify Matrix

Row Count For user-entered numbers only, enter the number of rows in the matrix.

Column Count For user-entered numbers only, enter the number of columns in the matrix.

Values Enter the values in the matrix in either row or column order depending on the order you selected above. You can separate the values using a comma or by pressing Enter after each value.

Result Set Component Names

For result set components only, enter the names of the components.

If you selected Sparse Matrix, the following option appears:

Row Index Enter the row numbers, separated by commas, in your matrix containing nonzero values. Enter the row number each time there is a value in the row.

Column Index Enter the column numbers, separated by commas, containing nonzero values. Enter the column number each time there is a value in the column.

Values Enter the nonzero values in your matrix starting with the first column. Separate each value with a comma.

If you selected From a File, the following option appears:

File Enter the name of the file containing the matrix values and the name of the matrix in the file. The name of the matrix is necessary even if the file contains only one matrix. You will need to create additional matrices to read other matrices from the same file.

Learn About the Format for Matrix Data Files.


Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Modal Force

162

Create/Modify Modal Force

Build → Forces → Modal Force Tool

Creates or modifies a modal force (MFORCE).

For more information, see:

• Modal Forces

• Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed Flexible Bodies


Force Name Enter the default MFORCE name to create or modify. When creating a MFORCE, Adams/View automatically assigns a default name of MFORCE followed by an underscore and a number to make the name unique (for example, MFORCE_1).

Flexible Body Specify the flexible body to which the MFORCE is applied.

Reaction Part If desired, in the text box, enter the name of an existing part to which to apply the reaction of the modal force resultant. If you enter a part name, Adams/View automatically creates a Floating marker associated with this part when it creates the MFORCE. Adams/View keeps the marker coincident with the flexible body analysis coordinate system during the simulation. Therefore, the need for the point of reaction to be a floating marker.

In addition, because floating markers cannot be defined on flexible bodies, the reaction part is restricted to rigid bodies only. You can use the Info command to see the floating marker that Adams/View creates when you reference a reaction part.

163A - DCreate/Modify Modal Force

Define Using Select how you want to define the modal force:

• Function - Lets you select the modal loadcase and scale function of the MFORCE. Note that you cannot select Function when defining an MFORCE on a flexible body that does not contain any modal load case information in its corresponding MNF.

• Subroutine - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the modal load case and scale function whose product is the modal force applied to the flexible body. The scale function can depend on time or the state of the system. The load case can only be a function of time.

• Force - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the modal force on the flexible body. Each component of the modal force can depend on time or the state of the system. (Adams/Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.)

To use a subroutine, you need to build a version of the Adams/Solver that contains your version of the MFOSUB routine that quantifies the modal force. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help. You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in the Routine text box. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.

If you selected to specify a flexible body with modal load case information, you also specify the following two options:

Load Case Select a modal load case label from a list. The list of modal loadcase labels is generated from the MNF. Learn about Creating Loadcase Files.

Scale Function Specify an expression for the scale factor to be applied to the modal load case.




Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Point Mass

164

Create/Modify Point Mass

Build → Point Mass → New/Modify

Point masses are points that have mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities. They are computationally more efficient when rotational effects are not important.

For example, you could use point masses to represent the concentrated masses in a net. You could then represent the ropes between the masses as forces or springs.


Name If you are creating a point mass, enter a name for the point mass.

Mass Set the mass of the point mass.

Note: By default, Adams/View creates a point mass with a mass of 1 in current units.

Location Set or adjust its location as desired.

Note: By default, Adams/View places the point mass in the center of the main window.

Select to enter comments to help you manage and identify the point mass. See Comments.

If you are modifying a point mass, the following also appear:

Displays the Precision Move dialog box to let you change the position of the point mass.

Displays the Point Mass Measure dialog box to let you create a measure for the point mass. Learn about creating Object Measures.

Position ICs/

Velocity ICs

Displays the Modify Body dialog box set to let you change the initial position or velocity of the point mass.

165A - DCreate/Modify Road

Create/Modify RoadAdds a road assembly to your model. If your model includes tires, you must specify a road because each tire must reference a road. The road determines the surface friction, bumps, and other inputs to tires.


Name Enter the name of the road to create or modify.

Part Enter a part, typically the ground part, to which the road belongs. Generally the road is fixed in ground but in some cases, the road may move (for example, a military vehicle driving on the deck of a warship).

Property File Enter the name of a road property file. The road property file determines the kind or road (smooth or rough, wet or dry). You can view the contents of the road property file using the View File button

.

Graphics Select On to display road graphics or select Off to hide any road graphics. You may want to hide the road graphics when you work on your model. Roads graphics are typically large and can affect operations such as fitting to view.

Location and Orientation

Location Enter a location for the road. The location determines the origin of the road and, along with the road property file, determines whether any tires referencing this road are initially contacting the road.

Orient Using Select a method to orient the road, either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors. The z direction of the road orientation is always vertical direction. Therefore, you should orient this axis of the road so it matches the vertical direction in your model.

If you selected Euler Angles, the following option is available:

Euler Angles Enter the euler angles (body 3,1,3) to orient the road.

If you selected Direction Vectors, the following two options become available:

X Vector/Z Vector

Enter the x- and z-direction vectors to orient the road. The x-, y-, and z-axes of the road are determine from the direction vectors as follows:

• Z = z-vector / | z-vector |

• Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-vector |

• X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |

For more information on XP-ZP method in Adams/Solver, see argument XP in the MARKER statement.

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Road

166


Select to display the contents of the road property file in the Information window. This helps you determine what kind of road the file models.


167A - DCreate/Modify Sensor

Create/Modify Sensor

Simulate → Sensor → New

Right-click sensor → Modify

Allows you to add a sensor to your model or modify an existing one. A sensor monitors a Simulation for a specified event and changes a set of simulation controls when the event occurs.

Learn about:

• Adding Sensors to Your Model

• SENSOR statement in the Adams/Solver online help


Name Enter a name for the sensor.

Event Definition Choose either:

• Run-Time Expression - Defines the triggering event using a run-time function expression.

• User-Written Subroutine - Defines the triggering event using a subroutine.

If you selected Run-Time Expression, the following two options are available:

Expression Enter a function expression.

Select to display the Adams/View Function Builder.

If you selected User-Written Subroutine, the following option is available:

Parameter List Enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine SENSUB. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View is to pass to SENSUB.

For more information on user-written subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.

The following option is available for all choices:


Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Sensor

168

Event Evaluation Choose either:

• Run-Time Expression - Specifies an expression that is evaluated when the event Adams/View is monitoring becomes true. You can obtain the scalar value of the expression using the SENVAL function expression.

• User-Written Subroutine - Defines and passes constants to a user-written subroutine that is evaluated when the event Adams/View is monitoring becomes true. You can obtain the return value of the user-written subroutine using the SENVAL function.

Example:

If you set the following values, you can retrieve the distance between two markers. You use the SENVAL function to retrieve the distance.

• Event Definition: Run-time Expression

• Expression: MOD (time, .5)

• Event Evaluation: Run-Time Expression

• Expression: DY(3,2)

• Target: 0

If you selected Run-Time Expression, the following two options are available:

Expression Enter a function expression.

Select to display the Adams/View Function Builder.

If you selected User-Written Subroutine, the following option is available:

Parameter List Enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine SEVSUB. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View is to pass to SEVSUB.

For more information on user-written subroutines, the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.

The following options are available for all choices:

Non-Angular Values Select to indicate that the expression measures non-angular values.

Angular Values Select to indicate that the expression measures angular values.



169A - DCreate/Modify Sensor

Pull-Down Menu Select one of the following:

• Equal - From (Target - Error) to (Target + Error).

• Greater than or equal - Greater than or equal to (Target - Error).

• Less than or equal - Less than or equal to (Target + Error).

See example of the choices.

In the figure, the sensor triggers whenever the value of the function being monitored is in the shaded areas. Be careful that your function does not evaluate in the shaded area at the start of your simulation unless you want your sensor to trigger immediately. It is a good idea to define a function measure using the same expression used for your sensor so you can check it by plotting it.

Value Enter the target value that triggers an action.

End Tolerance Enter the absolute value of allowable error between the targeted value and the actual sensed value.

Generate additional Output Step at event

Select to create an extra Output step when Adams/Solver triggers the sensor so you can capture the action.

Set Output Stepsize Select to redefine the time between consecutive output steps. Adams/Solver uses this value until it is changed. The default is the current time between output steps for the simulation.


Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Sensor

170

Terminate current simulation and...[stop, or continue with a simulation script]

Select to:

• Stop the simulation

• Stop the current command in the simulation Script and continue with the next command.

Set Integration Stepsize

Select to redefine the next integration step size. This change is temporary and lasts only for the next solution step.

The default is an integrator-determined value except when you’ve included restarting the integrator as part of the sensor action as explained next. In this case, the step size defaults to the integrator step size.

Restart Integrator Select to restart integration and reduce the integration order to one. If you also set integration step size as explained above, Adams/Solver reinitializes the integration step size to the specified value. If you do not specify the step size, Adams/Solver reinitializes the integration step size to the integrator's default step size.

To define integration order, see Solver Settings - Dynamic.

Refactorize Jacobian Select to cause Adams/Solver to generate a new pivot sequence for matrix factorization. This can help the integrator produce more accurate data or proceed more robustly through the simulation. Adams/Solver generates a pivot sequence for matrix factorization before starting the simulation. Adams/Solver does not generate a new pivot sequence unless you specify to refactorize the Jacobian or it is necessary to refactorize to reach convergence.

Dump State Variable Factor

Select to write the entire array of state variable values to a text file in your current working directory.

Select to add any comments about the sensor to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Only available for Run-Time Expression.

Create two measures to monitor the expression and state of a sensor during simulation. Learn about Object Measures.


171A - DCreate/Modify Simulation Script

Create/Modify Simulation Script

Simulate → Simulation Script → New/Modify

Creates or modifies a simulation Script.

Learn about Performing a Scripted Simulation.


Script Enter the name of the script to create or modify.

Script Type Select either:

• Simple Run

• Adams/View Commands

• Adams/Solver Commands

Learn more about the Types of Simulation Scripts.

If you select Simple Run:

End Time/Duration Enter the time interval over which the Simulation takes place and set how you want it defined. You can select:






Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Simulation Script

172

Simulation Type Select a type of simulation to run:

• Transient - Default

• Transient - Dynamic

• Transient - Kinematic

• Transient - Static

Learn more about Types of Simulations.

Start at equilibrium Select to have Adams/View perform a static simulation before performing a dynamic simulation.

If you select Adams/View Commands:

Adams/View Commands Enter commands below the comment line !Insert /View commands here:.

Append Run Commands Select to get assistance with Adams/View simulation commands. See Getting Assistance with Adams/View Commands.

Select and enter any comments you want associated with the script. See Comments.

If you select Adams/Solver Commands:

Adams/Solver Commands

Enter commands below the comment line !Insert ACF commands here:.

Append ACF Command Select to get assistance with Adams/Solver commands. See Getting Assistance with Adams/Solver Commands.

Select and enter any comments you want associated with the script. See Comments.


173A - DCreate/Modify Solver Array

Create/Modify Solver Array

Build → Data Elements → Array → New/Modify

Creates or modifies a data element Array.

Learn more about data element Arrays.


Array Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the array.

Tips: You might find it easier to track which array element goes with which system element if you name the array elements and the corresponding system elements with like names. For example, the states (X) array that goes with general state equation GSE_100 would be ARRAY_100 ; the inputs (U) array would be ARRAY_101 ; and the outputs (Y) array would be ARRAY_102 .

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams/Solver ID.


General/Initial Conditions (ICs)/

X (States)/

Y (Outputs)/

U (Inputs)

Set to:

• General

• Initial Conditions (ICs)

• X (States)

• Y (Outputs)

• U (Inputs)

Learn more about Types of Arrays.

If you selected Define General or Initial Conditions, Adams/View displays the following option:

Numbers Enter the values to be stored in the array.

If you selected X (States) or Y (Outputs), Adams/View displays the following option:

Size Enter the size of the array.

If you selected U (Inputs), Adams/View displays the following option:

Variables Enter the variables to be stored. If the array is used as input to a transfer function, then you can only enter one variable.

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Spline

174

Create/Modify Spline

Build → Data Element → Spline → New/Modify

The Spline Editor provides a tabular or plot view of your spline data for editing and plotting. You can drag points on your spline plots and see the effect of different curve-fitting techniques on your spline. You can also select linear extrapolation and view its effect.

Using the Spline Editor, you can create a two- or three-dimensional splines. Note, however, that the Spline Editor does not display a three-dimensional spline in plot view.

Learn about Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor.

To set the view of the Spline Editor:

• Set View As to either Tabular Data or Plot.

175A - DCreate/Modify Standard Controls Block

Create/Modify Standard Controls Block

Build → Controls Toolkit

Displays the Adams/View Controls toolkit, which provides basic control elements such as filters, gains, and PIDs.

Adams/View implements these controllers within the model as differential equations (that is, linear continuous control). You can modify the user-defined control inputs and outputs for later use with Adams/Linear and Adams/Controls.

Learn more about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Standard Controls Block

176

Icon Link

Input-Signal Function Block

Summing Junction Block

Gain Block

Integrator Block

Low-Pass Filter Block

Lead-Lag Filter Block

User-Defined Transfer Function Block

Second-Order Filter Block

PID Controller

Switch Block

177A - DCreate/Modify State Variable

Create/Modify State Variable

Build → System Elements → State Variable → New/Modify

Creates or modifies a state variable.

Learn about:

• Creating and Modifying State Variables

• System Elements


Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the state variable.

Definition Set to either:

• Run-time Expression

• User written subroutine

Learn more about Ways to Define State Variables.

F(time...,) = • If you selected Run-time Expression, enter the function expression

that defines the variable. Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See the Adams/View Function Builder online help.

• If you selected User written subroutine, enter constants to the user-written subroutine VARSUB to define a variable. See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine VARSUB. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.

Guess for F(1, 0..) and Select and then specify an approximate initial value for the variable, if desired. Adams/Solver may adjust the value when it performs an Initial conditions simulation. Entering an accurate value for initial conditions can help Adams/Solver converge to the initial conditions solution.




Adams/ViewCreate/Modify String

178

Create/Modify String

Build → Data Elements → String → New/Modify

Creates or modifies a string element that defines a character string that you can refer to later in the execution of Adams/View or Adams/Solver. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the next line. It can, however, be longer than a single line. You can use the GTSTRG subroutine to retrieve the character string in a User-written subroutine. For example, you could use a string element to pass a file name to a user-written subroutine. For more information, see Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.



Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the string.

String Enter the string values.


179A - DCreate/Modify Transfer Function

Create/Modify Transfer Function

Build → System Elements → Transfer Function → New/Modify

Creates or modifies a transfer function.

Learn about:

• Creating and Modifying Transfer Functions

• TFSISO statement.

• System Elements



Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the transfer function.

Input Array Name (U) Enter the array that defines the input (or control) for the transfer function. The array must be an inputs (U) array. If you specified the size of the array when you created it, it must be one.

State Array Name (X) Enter the array that defines the state variable array for the transfer function. The array must be a states (X) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specified the size of the array when you created it, it must be one less than the number of coefficients in the denominator.

Output Array (Y) Enter the array that defines the output for the transfer function. The array must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specify the size of the array when you created it, its size must be one.

IC Array Name (IC) Enter the array that defines the initial conditions array for the transfer function. The array must be an IC array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specified the size of the array when you created it, it must be equal to the size of the state array.

Numerator Coefficients and Denominator Coefficients

Specify the coefficients of the polynomial in the numerator and denominator of the transfer function. List the coefficients in order of ascending power of s, starting with s to the zero power, including any intermediate zero coefficients. The number of coefficients for the denominator must be greater than or equal to the number of coefficients for the numerator.

Check Format and Display Plot

Display a plot of the transfer function.

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Transfer Function

180

Keep value constant during static analyses.

Select whether or not Adams/Solver should hold constant the value of the transfer equation during static and Quasi-static simulations. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.

Select to enter comments about the transfer function to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


181A - DCreate/Modify Wheel and Tire

Create/Modify Wheel and TireAdds a wheel and tire assembly to your model. Learn about Defining Tires in Adams/View.


Name Enter the name of the wheel-tire assembly to create or modify.

Side (left,right) Select the side of the vehicle on which this wheel-tire assembly will be located. Some road use this information to apply different inputs to left and right tires (for example, the 2D stochastic (random) road). If you are modeling a motorcycle, we recommend selecting left for both the front and rear wheel tires.

CM Offset Optionally, enter the wheel center of mass offset. This is the distance the wheel center of mass is offset along the wheel-spin (z) axis from the wheel center.

Mass Enter the mass of wheel. Typically, the mass of the wheel and tire are lumped together. If you select a property file for the SWIFT or FTIRE models, however, enter only the mass of the wheel itself as these models include the mass affects of the tire.

Ixx Iyy Enter the moment of inertia about the x- and y-axes (camber and steer axes). Enter one value because Ixx is assumed to equal Iyy for wheel-tire.

Izz Enter the moment of inertia about the wheel-tire's z- (Spin) axis.

Wheel Center offset (0ptional) Enter the offset of the wheel center geometry along the z-axis of the wheel part.

Tire Property File Specify the property file containing the data for the tire. When the dialog box is first displayed, the default filename mdi_0001.tir appears in the text box. Use the View File button to view the contents of the tire property file.


Longitudinal Velocity (Optional)

Enter the initial longitudinal velocity of the wheel-tire. The longitudinal velocity is velocity along the X axis of the wheel-tire.

Adams/ViewCreate/Modify Wheel and Tire

182

Spin Velocity (Optional)

Enter the initial spin velocity of the wheel-tire. The spin velocity is the rotational velocity of the wheel-tire about its z-axis in negative direction. A good approximation of the initial spin velocity is the longitudinal velocity divided by the unloaded radius of the tire:

Spin Velocity = Longitudinal Velocity / Unloaded Radius

Road Enter the name of an existing road property file. To create a road, right-click the text box, point to vpg_road, and then select Create. The Create/Modify Road dialog box appears. The road determines the input your tire sees—rough or smooth, wet or dry, and so on.

Location and Orientation

Location Enter the location of the wheel center.

Orient using Select either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors.

Euler Angles Enter the euler angles (body 3,1,3 angles) to orient the wheel-tire assembly.

X Vector Enter the x-direction vector. The x- and z- direction vectors determine the x,y,z orientation of the wheel-tire in the following way:

• Z = z-vector / | z-vector |

• Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-vector |

• X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |

For more information on XP-ZP method, see the argument XP in the MARKER statement.

Z Vector Enter the z-direction vector (see X Vector above).


Select to display the contents of the road or tire property file in the Information window. This helps you determine what kind of road the file models.


183A - DCreate/Modify model

Create/Modify model

Build → Model → New/Modify

Creates or modifies a Model. You can store more than one model in a Modeling database. You may find it helpful to store multiple models in the same database because it lets you:

• Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.

• Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.

• Compare results between models.


Model Name Enter a name for the model. You can enter up to 80 alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as spaces or periods.

Copy gravity settings of current model.

Only available if creating a model.

Select whether or not you want to use the same gravity settings as the current model in your database. Learn about Specifying Gravitational Force.

Select to add any comments about the marker to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Adams/ViewCustom Inertial Modeling

184

Custom Inertial Modeling

Flexible Body Modify dialog box → Custom

Use to select the inertia invariants to define the modal formulation of the flexible body. Use the Tool tips to help you decide which invariants to select. Learn more about defining the modal formulation.

185A - DCut Tool

Cut Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Cut Tool

Removes the volume where one solid intersects another solid to create a new solid. It subtracts the geometry of the second part that you select from the geometry of the first part. The remaining geometry belongs to the second part that you selected. The following is an example of cutting a solid:

You cannot cut the geometry so that the remaining geometry is split into two solids. For example, you cannot cut a block from the center of a cylinder so that two cylinders remain after the cut. The following is an example of cutting a solid into two solids:

Adams/ViewCut Tool

186

If a part completely envelopes another part, you cannot cut that part from the enveloped part because no geometry would result. For example, if a box completely envelopes a sphere, you cannot cut the box from the sphere and leave a zero mass part. The following is an example of cutting a solid into a zero-mass part

:Learn about Cutting a Solid.

187A - DCylinder Tool

Cylinder Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Cylinder Tool

Creates a Solid geometry with a circular base. You draw the cylinder’s centerline and Adams/View creates the cylinder with a radius 25% of the length of the centerline. Before you draw a cylinder, you can also specify its length and radius:

The Cylinder tool draws the centerline of the cylinder in the plane of the screen or the Working grid, if you have it turned on.

Learn about Creating a Cylinder.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the cylinder to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the cylinder to ground.

Tip: Add the geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be added to ground.

Length Enter the length of a cylinder, if desired.

Radius Enter a radius, if desired.

If you do not enter a radius, Adams/View creates the cylinder with a radius 25% of the length of the center line.

Note: Two hotpoints appear after you draw a cylinder. One lets you modify the length of the cylinder and one lets you set its radius. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

Adams/ViewCylindrical Joint Tool

188

Cylindrical Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Cylindrical Joint Tool

Creates a cylindrical joint that allows both relative rotation as well as relative translation of one part with respect to another part. A cylindrical joint can be located anywhere along the axis about which the parts can rotate or slide with respect to each other.

The orientation of the cylindrical joint defines the direction of the axis about which the parts can rotate or slide along with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the cylindrical joint is parallel to the orientation vector and passes through the location.

Learn about:

• Creating Idealized Joints

189A - DCylindrical Joint Tool

• Adding Friction to Idealized Joints


1 Location (Bodies Implicit)/

2 Bodies - 1 Location/

2 Bodies - 2 Locations

Set how you want the joint connected to parts:





Normal to Grid/

Pick Feature

Set how you want the joint oriented:


• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.





Adams/ViewData Element Create Array U Input Array

190

Data Element Create Array U Input Array

Build → Controls Toolkit → U Input Array

Groups together a set of variables to define the inputs for a system element, either linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.

Learn about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.




Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Size Specify the size of the array.

If you enter a size, it should match the number of variables. Adams/View provides the size parameter mainly for your convenience in model creation (it is not required).

Variable Name Enter the list of variables.

191A - DData Element Create Array X State Array

Data Element Create Array X State Array

Build → Controls Toolkit → X State Array

Defines a list of state variables (X) associated with a system element, such as a linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. To use this array, you must reference the array name as the state variable array in the system element definition. You can use each X state array with only one system element in your model.



Adams ID Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Size Specify the size of the array. The corresponding system element automatically determines the size of the array and checks it against the size you entered.

• For linear state equation, the X state array size is the row dimension of the A state matrix.

• For transfer functions, the transformation from polynomial ratio type to canonical state space type internally determines the X state array size.

• For general state equations, the X state array size is the state equation count as defined in the general state equation.

Adams/ViewData Element Create Array Y Output Array

192

Data Element Create Array Y Output Array

Build → Controls Toolkit → Y Output Array

Specifies the output array for a system element, either linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. To use these arrays, you must reference the array name as the output array in the system element definition. You can use each Y output array with only a single system element.

Learn about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.





Size Specify the size of the array. The corresponding system's modeling element automatically determines the size of the array and checks it against the size you entered.

• For linear state equations, the Y output array size is the row dimension of the C output matrix or the D feedforward matrix.

• For transfer functions, the Y output array size is always 1.

• For general state equations, the Y output array size is the output equation count, as defined in the general state equation.

193A - DData Element Create Curve

Data Element Create Curve

Build → Data Elements → Curve → New

Creates a data element curve.

Learn more about Curves.


Curve Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the curve.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the curve. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the curve to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Closed Set to either no to create an open curve or yes to create a closed curve.

Define Using Matrix/

Define Using Subroutine

Set to either:

• Define Using Matrix

• Define Using Subroutine

Learn about Defining Data Element Curves.

If you selected Define Using Matrix, the following option appears:

Matrix Name Enter the matrix name.

Interpolation Order Specify the order of the b-spline interpolating the curve. The order is 1 plus the degree of the functions used to define the spline. The order also affects the number of points used to determine each spline segment. For example, splines of order 2 are basically polylines, while the segments used to create an spline of order 4 are of the 3rd order. 4 is the default order of splines, which is a cubic b-sline.

Note: B-splines of order K will have K - 2 continious derivatives. The discontinuities appear where the polynomial segments joint together. Increasing the order of the b-spline arbitrarily may introduce unwanted oscillation into the curve.

If you selected Define Using Subroutine, the following options appear:

User Function Enter parameters to the user-written subroutine CURSUB. Enter the user function using the following format where r1 through r30 are constants passed to the subroutine:

r1, ..., r30

Learn About Specifying a Subroutine.

Minimum Parameter Enter the minimum value of the curve parameter for a user-written curve.

Adams/ViewData Element Create Curve

194

Maximum Parameter Enter the maximum value of the curve parameter for a user-written curve.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.


195A - DData Element Create Plant Input

Data Element Create Plant Input

Build → Controls Toolkit → Plant Input

Build → Data Elements → Plant → Plant Input → New...

Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant Input text box

Defines a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams/Solver recognizes as system input during an Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant input acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.

Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:

• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not the ID of the variable.

• User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help).

Learn more:

• Plant Inputs and Outputs

• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output

Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more sets of state matrices at the same time.


Plant Input Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant input.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant input. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the plant input to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.



Adams/ViewData Element Create Plant Output

196

Data Element Create Plant Output

Build → Controls Toolkit → Plant Output

Build → Data Elements → Plant → Plant Output → New ...

Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant Output text box

Defines a set of output (state variables) that Adams/Solver recognizes as system output during an Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.

Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:

• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2), where i1 specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list. Note that i2 is not the ID of the variable.

• User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help).

Learn more:



Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more sets of state matrices at the same time.


Plant Output Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant output.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant output. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the plant output to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.



197A - DData Element Create Plant State

Data Element Create Plant State

Build → Controls Toolkit → Plant State

Build → Data Elements → Plant → Plant State → New ...

Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant State text box

Adams/Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.

Adams/Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used to linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of states are provided, then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the ones that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams/Solver identifies and discards the redundant states.

Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can instruct Adams/Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.

• For more information, see the Adams/Solver (C++) LINEAR command.

• For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016460.

• For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.


Plant State Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant state.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant state. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the plant state to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


Create State Variable for Plant State Displays the Create State Variable for Plant State dialog box, which allows you to create state variables for use in a plant state object.

http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com/infocenter/index?page=content&id=KB8016460&actp=search&searchid=1324025669934



Adams/ViewData Element Create Spline

198

Data Element Create Spline

Build → Data Elements → Spline → General

Creates data element splines using the general method.

Learn more about creating and modifying data element Splines.



Spline Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the spline.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the spline. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the spline to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Linear Extrapolate Set to yes to extrapolate a spline by applying a linear function over the first or last two data points. By default, for user-defined files, Adams/Solver extrapolates a spline that exceeds a defined range by applying a parabolic function over the first or last three data points. For RPC III or DAC files, the default method of extrapolation is zero-order (constant).

Learn about Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View.

Units Enter the units that you want assigned for values in your spline.

File/Result Set Component/Numerical

Set to:

• File

• Result Set Component

• Numerical

If you selected File, the following three options appear:

File Name Enter the name of the file.

Block Name If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want Adams/View to take the data. The block must be specifically named in the file.

Channel Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with time response data in RPC III files only. For more information, see Adams/Durability online help.

If you selected Numerical, the following options appear:


199A - DData Element Create Spline

X, Y, Z Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes.

• Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x values, n, depends on whether you specify a single curve or a family of curves.

• Values must be constants; Adams/Solver does not allow expressions.

• Values must be in increasing order: x1 < x2 < x3 , and so on.

If you selected Result Set Components, the following options appear:

X, Y, Z Result Set Component

Enter the Result set components to be used for the x, y, and z values in the text boxes.


Adams/ViewData Element Modify Curve

200

Data Element Modify Curve

Build → Data Elements → Curve → Modify

Modify a data element curve.

Learn more about working with data element Curves.



Curve Name Enter the name of the curve being modified.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the curve. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the curve to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Closed Set to either no to create an open curve or yes to create a closed curve.

Learn About Specifying Open or Closed Curves.

Define Using Matrix/

Define Using Subroutine

Set to either:

• Define Using Matrix

• Define Using Subroutine

Learn about Defining Data Element Curves.

If you selected Define Using Matrix, the following option appears:

Matrix Name Enter the matrix name.

Interpolation Order Specify the order of the b-spline interpolating the curve. The order is 1 plus the degree of the functions used to define the spline. The order also affects the number of points used to determine each spline segment. For example, splines of order 2 are basically polylines, while the segments used to create an spline of order 4 are of the 3rd order. 4 is the default order of splines, which is a cubic b-sline.

Note: B-splines of order K will have K - 2 continious derivatives. The discontinuities appear where the polynomial segments joint together. Increasing the order of the b-spline arbitrarily may introduce unwanted oscillation into the curve.


User Function Specify up to 30 values to pass to the user-written subroutine.

Minimum Parameter Enter the minimum value of the curve parameter for a user-written curve.

Maximum Parameter Enter the maximum value of the curve parameter for a user-written curve.

Routine Enter the function to be called. The default is CURSUB.

201A - DData Element Modify Plant Input

Data Element Modify Plant Input

Build → Data Elements → Plant → Plant Input → Modify...

Modifies a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams/Solver recognizes as system input during an Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant input acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.

Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:

• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not the ID of the variable.

• User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help).

Learn more:



Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more sets of state matrices at the same time.


Plant Input Name Select an exisitng plant input.

New Plant Input Name Enter the new name that you want assigned to the plant input.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant input. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the plant input to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.



Adams/ViewData Element Modify Plant Output

202

Data Element Modify Plant Output

Build → Data Elements → Plant → Plant Output → Modify ...

Modifies a set of output (state variables) that Adams/Solver recognizes as system output during an Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.

Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:

• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2), where i1 specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list. Note that i2 is not the ID of the variable.

• User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help).

Learn more:



Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more sets of state matrices at the same time.


Plant Output Name Select an exisitng plant output.

New Plant Output Name Enter the new name that you want assigned to the plant output.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant output. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the plant output to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.



203A - DData Element Modify Plant State

Data Element Modify Plant State

Build → Controls Toolkit → Plant State

Build → Data Elements → Plant → Plant State → Modify ...

Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant State text box

Adams/Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.

Adams/Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used to linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of states are provided, then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the ones that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams/Solver identifies and discards the redundant states.

Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can instruct Adams/Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.

• For more information, see the Adams/Solver (C++) LINEAR command.

• For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016460.

• For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.


Plant State Name Enter the name of existing plant state.

New Plant State Name Enter a new name of plant state.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant state. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the plant state to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


Create State Variable for Plant State Displays the Create State Variable for Plant State dialog box, which allows you to create state variables for use in a plant state object.




Adams/ViewData Element Modify Spline

204

Data Element Modify Spline

Build → Data Elements → Spline → Modify

Modifies a spline created using the general method and a file as input.

Learn more about creating and modifying data element Splines.



Spline Name Enter the name of the spline to modify.

New Spline Name Enter a new name for the spline, if desired.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the spline. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the spline to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Linear Extrapolate Set to yes to extrapolate a spline by applying a linear function over the first or last two data points. By default, for user-defined files, Adams/Solver extrapolates a spline that exceeds a defined range by applying a parabolic function over the first or last three data points. For RPC III or DAC files, the default method of extrapolation is zero-order (constant).

Learn about Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View.

Units Enter the units that you want assigned for values in your spline.

File/Result Set Component/Numerical

Set to:

• File

• Result Set Component

• Numerical

If you selected File, the following three options appear:

File Name Enter the name of the file.

Block Name If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want Adams/View to take the data. The block must be specifically named in the file.

Channel Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with time response data in RPC III files only. For more information, see Adams/Durability online help.

If you selected Numerical, the following options appear:


205A - DData Element Modify Spline

X, Y, Z Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes.

• Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x values, n , depends on whether you specify a single curve or a family of curves.

• Values must be constants; Adams/Solver does not allow expressions.

• Values must be in increasing order:

x1 < x2 < x3 , and so on.

If you selected Result Set Components, the following options appear:

X, Y, Z Result Set Component

Enter the Result set components to be used for the x, y, and z values in the text boxes.


Adams/ViewDatabase Navigator

206

Database Navigator

Tools → Database Navigator Shared Dialog Box

Displays the types of objects appropriate for the command you are executing and shows objects in their database hierarchy. You can browse for objects or set it to rename objects, view information about the objects and view dependencies. You can also set a filter for the types of objects displayed in the Database Navigator.

Learn more about Database Navigator.


Pull-Down Menu Use the pull-down menu to choose a mode option. Select one:

• Browse (the default; the options on this page describe Browse)

• Display Attribute

• Rename

• Comments

• Information

• Topology By Parts

• Topology By Connections

• Graphical Topology

• Associativity

• Select List

Filter Select if you want to filter the types and names that you want displayed in the Database Navigator. Then, enter the name of the objects you want to display in the text box and use the pull-down menu to the right to select the type of object(s) you want to display. You can also use the pull-down menu below the Filter text box to only display those objects that are active or inactive.

Sort by Use the pull-down menu to choose how you want the objects sorted. You can also select to not sort the objects so they appear in the order they are stored in the modeling database.

Highlight Off by default. Select if you want an object to appear selected in the main window and the reverse.

Use the plus sign (+) or the minus (-) (--) signs to display or hide all of the children hidden/shown in the tree view.

207A - DDatabase Storage

Database Storage

Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Database Storage

Selecting Database Storage as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set how Adams/View handles the results for:

• Single Simulations - As you perform a single Simulation, ADAM/View stores the results of the simulation under the current model in your Modeling database. By default, when you perform another simulation, Adams/View overwrites the results of the previous simulation. You can store simulations results in your database after a simulation has finished so that Adams/View does not overwrite them. For information on saving the results of individual simulation, see Saving Simulation Results.

• Multi-run Simulations - For a parametric analysis, Adams/View stores the parametric analysis (multi-run) results in an analysis object called Last_Multi. This analysis is not a full analysis—it simply contains a summary of the design variable variations and Objective values for each model that was analyzed in the parametric study. Unless you rename or copy Last_Multi before running another parametric analysis, subsequent parametric study summaries will overwrite Last_Multi.

Saving Multi-Run simulations does not save each individual trial resulit simply saves a summary of the parametric study. To save each individual trial result, use Save Analysis for Individual Simulations.

Parametric analyses can run many simulations. Use care in saving individual analyses and/or mult-run analyses. It is possible to exhaust the memory or file space available on your computer. Running out of memory or file space can lead to unpredictable system problems, and cause the parametric analysis to fail.

You can use measures to compare specific data between runs without saving all the results. Create and display a measure for the data of interest, then select Save Curves under the Display settings of the Solver Settings dialog box. Adams/View charts the measure for each simulation and saves all the curves. At the end, you have a strip chart showing the measure for all simulations.

Stored simulation results remain in your modeling database when you save your modeling database. Be careful not to save more simulation results than you need since they require quite a bit of storage space. To delete simulation results from your modeling database, see Deleting Simulation Results.


Single Simulations

Save Analysis Set to Yes to automatically store simulation results in the modeling database.

Prefix After selecting Save Analysis, enter the prefix you want Adams/View to use as the name of each simulation. Adams/View appends a unique number to the prefix to form the complete name of the new analysis object.

Multi-Run Simulations

Adams/ViewDatabase Storage

208

Save Analysis Set to Yes to automatically a copies the parametric analysis results to a permanent location when the analysis is complete.

Prefix After selecting Save Analysis, enter the name you want to use for each analysis object. Adams/View appends a unique number to the prefix to form the complete name of the new analysis object. Adams/View creates the new analysis under the model you analyzed.

Stop on error Set to Yes a to stop the parametric analysis if Adams/Solver encounters an error during a simulation. If you set it to No, Adams/Solver continues running simulations even if a simulation fails or another error occurs. Use care if you turn this option off. Optimizations probably do not recover well from an error. In some cases, you may want to continue a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE) even if a few of the simulations fail.


209A - DDefaults Names

Defaults Names

Settings → Names

Allows you to determine whether Adams/View uses full object names, short object names, or Adams/Solver IDs when displaying run-time functions or object names in the Information Window and dialog boxes. This also determines the naming the Function Builder Assist box uses for object names or Adams/Solver IDs to generate run-time functions.


Display database references using

Choose from the following:

• Full Names - The object's full name. For example: DX(Model_1.Part_2.Mar_15).

• Short Names - Only the specific portion of the object's name required to uniquely identify it. Example: DX(Mar_15).

• Adams IDs - An integer used to identify the object in Adams/Solver dataset (.adm) file. Example: DX(15). If you select Adams IDs, then Adams/View displays short names for cases that do not involve functions (object names in dialog box text boxes).

Note: Regardless of the option you choose, you can enter the object's full or short name or its Adams/Solver ID while writing functions.

Adams/ViewDelete Group

210

Delete Group

Build → Ungroup

Ungroups a Group of objects.

Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.


Group Name Enter the name of the group of objects you want to ungroup.


211A - DDesign Evaluation Results Table

Design Evaluation Results Table

Simulate → Design Evaluation →

Allows you to create a report of the results of the Parametric analyses in a table. Learn more about Generating a Table.


Result Set Enter the parametric analysis result set you want to display.

Column Width Enter values for the column.

Precision Enter values for the precision.

Format Select either Automatic, Exponential, or Fixed.

File Name Enter the file name if you want to write the table to a file.

Display in Information Window

Select if you want to display the table in the Information window. Adams/View displays the Information window showing a tabular summary.

Adams/ViewDesign Evaluation Tools

212

Design Evaluation Tools

Simulate → Design Evaluation

Allows you to begin a parametric analysis.

Note that some of the options change depending on what you are creating.

Learn more about parametric analyses with Parameterization Basics.


Model Enter the name of the model to simulate.

Simulation Script Enter the name of the simulation Script to use.

Study a Select either Measure or Objective to define the type of objective you are using.

• If you selected Measure, select Last, Minimum, Maximum, or Average from the pull-down menu, and then enter the name of the measure in the text box.

• If you selected Objective, enter the name of the objective in the Objective text box. Optimizations are limited to one objective. You can monitor more than one objective in a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE), however, by entering more than one name separated by a comma.

Select Design Study, Design of Experiments, or Optimization.

Note that each type displays some different dialog box options. Learn about options available for all types.

Design Study

Design Variable Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.

Default Levels Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a range for the design variable.

• If you specified a range for the design variable, Adams/View uses equally spaced levels across the range. You specify the number of levels in the Default Levels text box.

• If you specified a list of values for the design variable, Adams/View runs a simulation using each value, ignoring the Default Levels text box.

213A - DDesign Evaluation Tools

Start Begins the simulation.

After you select Start, Adams/View runs a simulation for each level of the design variable. When the simulations are done, Adams/View returns the variable to its original value.

Design of Experiments

Design Variables Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.

Default Levels Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a range for the design variable.

Trials defined by Select either Built-In DOE Technique, Direct Input, or File Input from the pull-down menu.

• If you selected built-in techniques, use the DOE Technique pull-down menu (see below) to select the technique. If you want to check that the variables have the same number of levels and display the required number of runs, select Check Variables, Guess # of Runs.

• If you selected direct input, enter the number of trials (simulations) and the trial matrix.

• If you selected file input, enter the name of the file containing the trial matrix.

DOE Technique (Appears only if you selected Built-in DOE Technique above)

Select a DOE technique. The DOE technique or trial matrix controls the number of simulations and the combination of variable values to use for each simulation. For example, the Full Factorial technique simulates every possible combination of levels. If you use two variables with three levels each, Adams/View runs nine simulations.

The DOE technique or trial matrix selects values for a variable based on the range or list of values you defined for the variable.

• If you specified only a range for a design variable, Adams/View selects from equally spaced values across the range. You enter the number of values in the Default Levels text box.

• If you specified a list of values for a design variable, Adams/View selects directly from those values, ignoring the value in the Default Levels text box.

Check Variables Guess # of Runs.

(Appears only if you selected Full Factiorial as the DOE Technique above)

Select if you want to check that the variables have the same number of levels and display the required number of runs.


Adams/ViewDesign Evaluation Tools

214

Number of Trials (Appears only if you selected Direct Input for Trials Defined by)

Enter the number of trials (simulations) and the trial matrix.

Trial Matrix File (Appears only if you selected File Input for Trials Defined by)

Enter the name of the file containing the trial matrix.

Edit Trial Matrix File (Appears only if you selected File Input for Trials Defined by)

Select to edit the trial matrix file.

Preview Shows you each configuration of your model for every design variable. Displays an alert box asking you if you want to pause after each configuration. Select YES to pause.

Start Begins the simulation. Adams/View runs a simulation for each trial that the DOE technique or trial matrix defines. When the simulations are done, Adams/View returns the variables to their original values.

Optimization

Design Variables Enter the name of the design variables to vary.

• If you specified value ranges on any of the design variables, Adams/View increases or decreases the objective as much as possible without exceeding the value limits.

• If you specified constraints, Adams/View increases or decreases the objective as much as possible without violating the constraints.

As Adams/View runs the optimization, it iteratively adjusts the design variable values, attempting to improve the model performance with each iteration. Adams/View may need to backtrack to avoid violating a constraint or limit on a variable value. Therefore, the model performance does not necessarily improve with each iteration. At each iteration, Adams/View runs several simulations to approximate derivatives and converge on the next iteration.

Auto. Save Select if you want to automatically save the original values of the design variables before starting the optimization analysis.

Goal Select either Maximize or Minimize. If you select Maximize as the goal, Adams/View adjusts the design variable values to increase the measure or objective as much as possible. If you select Minimize, Adams/View reduces the objective as much as possible.

Contraints Select if you want to add contraints and then enter the names of the constraints in the text box that appears.


215A - DDesign Evaluation Tools

Start Begins the simulation.

The last iteration will be the best values that the optimization could find without violating constraints or limits. Adams/View normally leaves the design variables set to the optimized values. If you interrupt the analysis or Adams/View encounters an error during the analysis, Adams/View resets the variables to their original values.

If you do not want to keep the optimized values, and you selected the Auto. Save check box or used the Save button to save the original values, you can select the Restore button to return the variables to their original values.

The following buttons are available for all three types:

Display, Ouput, and Optimizer

Displays the Solver Settings dialog box for either display, output, or optimizer options.

Note that each button brings up a different option in the Solver Settings Dialog Box.

You can:

• Select to display the Save Design Evaluation Results dialog box to save the simulation results. (Be sure to save your modeling database after you save the parametric analysis results.)

• Right-click to delete the simulation results.

Learn about parametric simulation results for:

• Design studies

• DOE

• Optimizations

Displays the Plot Design Evaluation Results dialog box to display the results as a plot.

Displays the Design Evaluation Results Table dialog box to display the results as a table.

Displays the Update Design Variables dialog box to let you update the design variables.


Adams/ViewDialog-Box Builder

216

Dialog-Box Builder

Tools → Dialog Box → Create

Allows you to create and modify Dialog boxes to better suit your needs and preferences.

For more information, see Customizing Adams/View.

217A - DDiscrete Flexible Link

Discrete Flexible Link

Build → Flexible Bodies → Discrete Flexible Link

Creates a discrete flexible link consisting of two or more rigid bodies connected by beam force elements.

You indicate the following and Adams/View creates the appropriate parts, Geometry, Forces, and Constraints at the endpoints:

• Endpoints of the link

• Number of parts and the material type

• Properties of the beam

• Types of endpoint attachments (flexible, rigid, or free)

Learn about working with Discrete Flexible Links.

Note: For more information on beam force elements, see Beam. Also note the caution about the asymmetry of beams.

Adams/ViewDiscrete Flexible Link

218



Name Enter a text string of alphanumeric characters. Adams/View prepends the text string you specify to the name of each object it creates. For example, if you specify the string LINK, the first rigid body is LINK_1, the first marker is LINK_MARKER_1, and so on.

Material Enter the type of material to be used for the rigid bodies and beam properties. Learn about Standard Material Properties.

Segments Enter the number of rigid bodies that you want in the link.

Damping Ratio Enter the ratio of viscous damping to stiffness for the beam forces.

Color Enter the color to be used for the geometry in the flexible link.

Marker 1 Enter the marker that defines the start of the link. Learn about Positioning Flexible Links.

Note: Marker 1 and Marker 2 are also used to calculate the orientation of the link.

Attachment Select how to define the start of the link:

• free - The end is unconnected.

• rigid - A fixed joint is created between the parent of Marker 1 and the first part of the discrete flexible link.

• flexible - The link has discrete flexibility all the way to the endpoint. To create this flexibility, Adams/View creates an additional beam force between the first segment of the link and the parent part of Marker 1. The length of the beam is one half of the segment length.

Marker 2 Enter the marker that defines the end of the link.

Cross Section Select one of the following to define the geometry of the link or specify the area and area moments of inertia of the flexible link.

• Solid Rectangle

• Solid Circle

• Hollow Rectangle

• Hollow Circle

• I-Beam

• Properties

219A - DDisplay Attribute

Display Attribute

Database Navigator → Display Attribute

Allows you to set how individual, types of objects, and children of objects appear in Adams/View.

Learn about Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database Navigator.


Visibility Select the visibility of the object

Name Vis Select the visibility of the name of the object.

Color Select a color in which to display the object.

Transparency The higher the value, the more transparent the object is, allowing other objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object is, covering other objects.

Tip: Setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact on graphical performance if you are using a graphics card without hardware acceleration for OpenGL. Instead of setting an object’s transparency, consider Setting Rendering Mode to wireframe.

Line Style Select the type of line style for the object border.

Line Width Select the weight for the line style. The weight values range from 1 to 5 screen pixels

Icon Size Enter the size you want for the icons. Note that these changes take precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database as explained Setting Screen Icon Display.

Active Set the state of the object during a simulation: active or inactive

Apply Select to apply the attributes to the objects

Object/Siblings/All • Object - Only apply to the selected object.

• Siblings - Apply changes to all objects of the same type that are children of the parent of the selected object.

• All - Apply changes to objects matching the filter you set in the Filter text box.

Filter Use to set the types and names to which you want the display attributes applied. In the text box, enter the name of the objects you want to display in the text box, and then use the pull-down menu to the right to select the type of object(s) you want to display.

Adams/ViewDisplay Log File

220

Display Log FileTools → Log File Shared Dialog Box

Shows you a log of the commands you executed and messages that you receive. The Log file marks messages as comments so Adams/View does not try to execute them. It indicates a comment by placing an exclamation mark (!) in front of the message.

Adams/View also displays as comments any commands that it executes when it starts up. To help you distinguish the startup commands from messages, Adams/View follows the exclamation mark (!) with the command prompt (>>).

Adams/View does not update the Display Log File dialog box each time you enter a command. You must select Update to see the new command/message.

By default, Adams/View only shows warning, errors, and fatal messages that you have received. To change the type of messages displayed and to display commands that Adams/View executed, use the options below.

Learn about Using the Adams/View Log File.


Show only lines of type Select if you want to change the type of messages displayed.

You must have Show only lines of type selected to select one of the following:

Info Select if you want to show information messages.

Warning Select if you want to show warning messages.

Error Select if you want to show error messages.

Fatal Select if you want to show fatal error messages.

Show only lines containing Optional. Select if you want to apply a string filter so the log file only displays lines that contain certain information, such as display only commands that create links.

Enter the text that the line must contain in the text box. You can also enter wildcards.

Suppress duplicate lines Select if you want to remove any duplicate lines that occur if you encounter the same error again.

Update Select to redisplay the log file and apply filters.

221A - DDynamic Rotation Tool Stack

Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack

Main Toolbox → Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack

Contains tools for dynamically rotating the View in the View window.

Learn about Dynamically Rotating a View.

Adams/ViewDynamic Rotation Tool Stack

222

E - I

223E - IEdit Appearance Dialog Box

Edit Appearance Dialog Box

Edit → Appearance

Sets how individual objects or types of objects appear in Adams/View. You can set the appearance of any modeling object in your Modeling database or for a group of objects.

Learn about:

• Setting object appearance

• Using Wildcards

• Icon Settings Dialog Box


Entity To explicitly specify an object, enter the name of the object whose appearance you want to set.


Once the name of the object is in the text box, press Enter to update the dialog box.

Types To specify a group of similar objects, enter a filter or wildcard. For example, enter Parts to set the appearance of all rigid bodies or Markers to set the appearance of all markers.

Visibility Select how you want to set the visibility of the selected object or objects. You can select:

• On - Turns on the display of the objects.

• Off - Turns off the display of the objects.

• Inherit - Lets the objects simply inherit the display settings from its parent. For example, a coordinate system marker inherits settings from its parent part.

Name Visibility Select whether or not you want the name of the objects displayed in the View window. Refer to the options above for Visibility for an explanation of the choices.

Adams/ViewEdit Appearance Dialog Box

224

Color and Color Scope Enter the color you want used for the objects and set which elements of the objects should be affected by the selected color. You can select:

• Polygon Fill - Sets the color of those areas of a graphic that can be shaded (they include sides of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, and so on).

• Edge - Sets the color of the lines making up the edges of the facets of a graphic that can be shaded.

• Outline - Sets the color of the lines that make up those graphics that cannot be shaded or filled like the coil of a spring damper.

• Text - Sets the color of the text.

• All - Sets the selected color for all elements of an object.

To browse for a color in the Database Navigator or create a new color, right-click the Color text box, and then select Browse or Create.

Render Set the rendering for the geometry:

• Filled - Adds shading to a solid fill to give a more realistic appearance. It does not show edges. The light source is from the upper left.

• Wireframe - Shows only the edges of objects so that you can see through the objects. Helps you select points and edges.

Transparency Set how transparent the object or objects are. The higher the value, the more transparent the object is, allowing other objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object is, covering other objects.

Tip: Setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact on graphical performance if you are using a graphics card without hardware acceleration for OpenGL. Instead of setting an object’s transparency, consider setting the object’s render mode to wireframe.

Icon Size/Icon Scale Enter the size you want for the icons or the amount by which you want to scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1 reduces the size of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1 increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes take precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database.


225E - IEdit Background Color

Edit Background Color

Settings → View Background Color

Lets you create a background color for the View window by setting its red, green, and blue light percentages and change the background of all view windows to this new color. You cannot add the color to the preset palette of colors or change the colors in the preset palette but you can set the gradient effect.

Learn about Setting View Background Colors.

Adams/ViewEdit Background Color

226

Note: You can also change the background color using the Edit Color dialog box. Learn about changing object colors, including the background.


Displays current color and color as you edit.

R Resets the color to the original color of the background.

Palette of preset colors

Shows the preset colors that appear in the Main toolbox when you select a background color from the Background color tool stack. You cannot change these colors.

Red Use the slider to change the red values, as desired. As you change the color values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.

Green Use the slider to change the green values, as desired. As you change the color values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.

Blue Use the slider to change the blue values, as desired. As you change the color values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.

Gradient If Gradient is checked, then radio buttons became active and you have options to select Gradient top-light or Gradient top-dark. If Gradient is unchecked, then both are disabled and unselected.

227E - IEdit Color

Edit Color

Settings → Colors

Allows you to modify the colors used for displaying objects or create a new color.


Color Select a predefined color.

New Color Displays the Create New Color dialog box so you can define a new color name in the Modeling database.

Displays the old or default color on the left side. Displays the new color on the right side and changes shades as you move the sliders below.

Red Use the slider to determine the amount of red to be used in the new color.

Green Use the slider to determine the amount of green to be used in the new color.

Blue Use the slider to determine the amount of blue to be used in the new color.

Adams/ViewEnable or Disable a Range of Modes

228

Enable or Disable a Range of Modes

Flexible Body Modify dialog box → range

Lets you disable or enable a group of modes based on either their mode number or frequency by entering a range of values. Learn more about Enabling and Disabling Modes.


Flexible Body Name Enter the name of the flexible body to modify.

Disable/Enable Select whether or not to disable or enable modes.

frequency/mode number Select whether or not to disable or enable by frequency or mode number.

between/above/below and text boxes

Select whether the range of modes to enable or disable is between, above, or below the specified values. Then, specify the values between, above, or below which you want to disable or enable modes.

229E - IEntering File Names in Text Boxes

Entering File Names in Text Boxes

To enter file names in text boxes, you can do either of the following:

• Enter the file name directly in the text box.

• Clear the text box and then double-click to open a selection window.

• Right-click to either:

• Search a database

• Browse a database

Adams/ViewEntering Object Names in Text Boxes

230

Entering Object Names in Text BoxesTo enter object names in text boxes, you can do either of the following:

• Enter the object name directly in the text box.

• Clear the text box and then double-click to open the Database Navigator.

• Right-click to either:

• Pick an object shown on the screen.

• Browse a complete list of available objects.

• Choose from a product-generated list of guesses.

231E - IExample of Information Window

Example of Information Window

Adams/ViewExecute System Command

232

Execute System Command

Tools → System Command Shared Dialog Box

You can execute an operating system command from within Adams/View so that you do not have to leave the Adams/View window.

You can select to display the results of the command in the Information Window or the Log file. If you select to display the results of the command in the Information window, you can:

• Clear the window and only view the results of the command.

• Save the results of the command to a file.

If you select to display the results in the log file, you can keep the command results with the other commands that you execute so that you can cut and paste the information together into a new file.


Command Enter the operating system command that you want to execute.

Write Output to Command Window and Logfile

Select if you want the output of the command to be displayed in both the Information window and log file.

Write Output to Info Window Select if you want the output of the command to be displayed in the Information window.

233E - IExit and Save?

Exit and Save?

File → Exit

If you did not save your work, asks you if you want to save your work:

• To save your work and exit Adams/View, select OK. If you want to save the model with a new name in the current directory, enter the new name in the Filename text box.

• To exit without saving your work, select Exit, Don’t Save.

• To continue using Adams/View, select Cancel.

Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams/View Log file (aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about Using the Adams/View Log File.

Adams/ViewExport Dialog Box

234

Export Dialog Box

File → Export

Exports data from Adams/PostProcessor. You can export the following formats:

• Numeric Data

• Spreadsheet Data

• Table

• DAC/RPC (For Adams/Durability only; see the Adams/Durability online help.)

• HTML Report


235E - IExport - Adams/PostProcessor Files

Export - Adams/PostProcessor Files

File → Export → Adams/PostProcessor Files Shared Dialog Box

Exports data from Adams/View for use with a stand-alone version of Adams/PostProcessor. When you export Adams/PostProcessor files, Adams/View generates a command file (.cmd) and all required supporting files, including:

• Dataset (.adm) file

• Shell (.shl) files needed for geometry representation

• Matrix (.mtx) files for use with the .adm file, if needed

The command file also contains commands to read in the other files when you import the command file into Adams/PostProcessor.

Adams/View names the command file ModelName_to_ppt.cmd, where ModelName is the name of the model. For example, if the model from which you are exporting data is suspension14, then the command file is suspension14_to_ppt.cmd.

Note: The simulation results are not referenced in the command file. You must import the analysis files (graphics, request, and results files) separately into Adams/PostProcessor. For more information, see Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files.


File Type Set to Adams/PostProcessor Files.

Model Name Enter the name of the model from which you want the data exported.

Adams/ViewExport - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

236

Export - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

File → Export → Adams/Solver Analysis, Graphics, Request, or Results Shared Dialog Box

Exports Adams/Solver analysis files, which are a set of output files that Adams/Solver generates during a single Simulation. You can export them as a set or individually. The files include:

• Graphics

• Request

• Results

Adams/View exports only a set of output files generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation.


File Name Enter the name you want to assign to the analysis file or files. You do not need to enter the file extension, because Adams/View adds the extensions for you.

If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.

Analysis Name Enter the name of the simulation whose data you want to export.


237E - IExport - Adams/Solver Dataset

Export - Adams/Solver DatasetFile → Export → Adams/Solver Dataset Shared Dialog Box

Exporting a model as an Adams/Solver dataset is a convenient method for transferring a model from one computer platform to another. When you export a model as an Adams/Solver dataset, Adams/View preserves the database names in your model by writing them as comments in the Adams/Solver dataset. This allows you to import the dataset at a later date and still have the original database names.

Your model does not have to be complete to be exported as an Adams/Solver dataset. If you want to check your model for completeness and consistency, verify your model before exporting the dataset.


File Name Enter the name you want to assign to the dataset file. You do not need to enter the file extension .adm, because Adams/View assumes that is the file extension.


Model Name Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.


Use Parasolid Select either:

• As is - Adams/View exports any geometry that was imported from a Parasolid file out to a Parasolid file when it writes the command file. The command file references the newly created Parasolid file. All other geometry (for example, cylinder, shell, and spring-dampers) are defined using Adams/View command language and included in the command file.

• Full - Adams/View exports all static geometry to Parasolid files instead of using Adams/View command language. This includes cylinders, shells, Parasolid, solids, and so on. It does not include dynamic outlines, spring-damper graphics, and graphic force vectors. These graphics continue to be defined in the Adams/View command language.

Write to Window/Write to File Only

To specify where the text of the dataset is to be written and displayed, select one of the following:

• Write to Window - To display the dataset in an information window, as well as save it in a file.

• Write to File Only - To only write the dataset to a file and not display it in an information window.

Adams/ViewExport - Adams/Solver Dataset

238

Indent Spaces Enter the number of spaces used to indent the continuation line of a statement. The allowed values are between 0 and 4 spaces. (Five or more spaces make the subsequent text on the line a comment.) The default is 1 space.

Adams/View does not indent the text for continuation lines of function expressions. It assumes that you will add any leading spaces that you want for indentation of functions. Any indentation Adams/View would enter would interfere with the indention used to show nesting of IFfunctions. Adams/View does, however, indent the argument list of a user function if it requires more than one line.

Adams/View precedes the values of an argument that has multiple string values separated by colons with a comma and indents the values if you place them on a continuation line. This applies to the PART/EXACT and COUPLER/TYPE arguments. It does not apply to the REQUEST/TITLE argument, which doesn't allow embedded spaces. Instead, Adams/View precedes a REQUEST/TITLE argument with a comma.

Decimal Places Enter the number of decimal places written after the decimal point for real numbers

Zero Threshold Enter the threshold value for numbers being written to an Adams/Solver dataset. When Adams/View writes a number that has an absolute value smaller than the zero threshold value, it writes it as zero. The zero threshold value is independent of units.

Significant Digits Control how many significant digits of a real number Adams/View retains during round off. The default is 10. The number you enter is distinct from the number of places actually printed for real numbers, which the Decimal Places value controls. Be sure to select Round Off Values so rounding off occurs.

Scientific Notation Specify where the format for real numbers switches from a fixed point format to scientific notation. Enter the lower and upper power of 10. Separate the values with commas (,). The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that Adams/View writes any number less than or equal to 1.0E-04 or greater than or equal to 1.0E+05 in scientific notation.



As Found In Original File/Put Markers Where Used/Keep Markers with Parts

Control the organization of the statements within the dataset by specifying one of the following:

• As Found In Original File - Maintains the order of the statements in the original dataset when Adams/View writes the model back to an existing dataset. To indicate which statements came from the original dataset and which statements are new, Adams/View writes any new statements that you have added to the original model after all the original statements, and also labels both sections.

• Put Markers Where Used - Writes the marker statements immediately after statements that depend on the markers. These include the statements: BEAM, BUSHING, FIELD, SFORCE, SPRINGDAMPER, VFORCE, VTORQUE, GFORCE, NFORCE, JOINT, JPRIM, REQUEST, MREQUEST, CVCV, and PTCV.

If none of these types of statements use a marker, Adams/View writes the marker statement after the part statement to which it belongs.

Adams/View writes graphic statements that belong to a single part after the markers for that part, and writes graphic statements that connect one or more parts after all the part statements are written.

It writes statements of the same type, such as JOINTs, JPRIMs, BUSHINGs, as a group, in order of ascending Adams IDs.

• Keep Markers with Parts - Writes the markers that belong to a part as a group after the part to which they belong. In addition, Adams/View writes the graphic statements that belong to a single part after the marker statements for that part, and writes graphic statements that connect one or more parts after all the part statements. Adams/View also writes statements of the same type, such as JOINTs, JPRIMs, and BUSHINGs, as a group, in order of ascending Adams IDs.

In general, Adams/View writes any statements that depend on other statements before the statements that depend on them. For example, it writes marker statements before the joint statements that use them, and writes joint statements before any coupler statements that connect them.

Roundoff Values To control the numerical rounding of real numbers, select Roundoff Values to enable the rounding of real numbers. When you enable the rounding of numbers, Adams/View retains the numbers of places you enter in the Significant Digits text box.

Write Default Values Select to set whether or not arguments that have default values are written explicitly into the dataset. The default is to not write default values into the dataset.


Adams/ViewExport - Adams/Solver Dataset

240

Arguments Not Affected by Case Control

The text case control selection in the Export Adams/Solver Dataset dialog box does not affect certain types of string-valued arguments. Adams/View writes the following arguments into the dataset the way they were stored in your modeling database:

TIRE:TPF and RDF RESULTS:COMMENT MATRIX:FILE and NAME MADATA:

Multiple parameters/Line

Select to write as many parameters and their values that fit within 80 columns for each line of the statement. For example:

PART/1, QG = 0.5, 0, 0, REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D, MASS = 1.2

If you do not select Multiple Parameters/Line, Adams/View writes only one parameter and its values on each line of the statement. For example:

PART/1 ,QG = 0.5, 0, 0 ,REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D ,MASS = 1.2

Upper Case Text/Lower Case Text, Mixed Case Text

To control the case of the text of statement keywords and parameters, select one of the following:

• Upper Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are written in uppercase letters (BEAM). Uppercase is the default.

• Lower Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are written in lowercase (beam).

• Mixed Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are written in initial case (Beam). The first character of each word is in uppercase, and the rest are in lowercase.

Note that the text case control does not affect certain types of string-valued arguments. For a listing of the arguments to which the text case does not apply, see Arguments Not Affected by Case Control.

Include Trailing Zeros

Select Include Trailing Zeros to print all the digits after the decimal point whether they are zero or not. If you do not select Include Trailing Zeros, Adams/View drops any zeros at the end of the fractional part of the number leaving the last digit as a non-zero digit.

Export All Graphics Select Export All Graphics to write all the graphics into the dataset. If this option is not checked, only the dataset graphics that are supported by the solver (such as BOX) and those that are referenced by contacts, are included in the dataset.

Verify Model Select to verify the model before exporting



COMMENT STRING:STRING REQUEST:TITLE, COMMENT, FUNCTION, and F1 to F8 MREQUEST:COMMENT UCON:FUNCTION MOTION:FUNCTION FIELD:FUNCTION SFORCE:FUNCTION GFORCE:FUNCTION VFORCE:FUNCTION VTORQUE:FUNCTION VARIABLE:FUNCTION CURVE:FUNCTION DIFF:FUNCTION GSE:FUNCTION SENSOR:FUNCTION:

Adams/ViewExport - Adams/Solver Script Files

242

Export - Adams/Solver Script Files

File → Export → Adams/Solver Script Shared Dialog Box

Exports an existing Simulation Script to an Adams/Solver script file (*.acf)


File Type Set it to Adams/Solver Script

File Name File Name is optional. If not specified, a file with the same name as that of the script, will be exported to Adams/View working directory. You do not need to enter the file extension, because Adams/View adds the extension (.acf) for you.

If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are running Adams/View, enter the path name and the file name in the File Name text box. To browse for the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.

Sim Script Name An existing Simulation Script to export.

243E - IExport - Adams/View Command File

Export - Adams/View Command File

File → Export → Adams/View Command File Shared Dialog Box

When you export a model as a command file, Adams/View creates a file containing all the commands necessary to create the selected model. Exporting a model as an Adams/View command file is helpful when you want to move a model from one type of computer platform to another. Note that the order of commands in the command file may not be in the same order as you entered them in Adams/View.

Saving a model as a command file does not save your simulation results or analysis files. To save your analysis files, set up Adams/View so that it saves the analysis files.


File Name Enter the name you want to assign to the command file. You do not need to enter the file extension .cmd, because Adams/View assumes that is the file extension.


Model Name Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.


Use Parasolid Select either:

• As is - Adams/View exports any geometry that was imported from a Parasolid file out to a Parasolid file when it writes the command file. The command file references the newly created Parasolid file. All other geometry (for example, cylinder, shell, and spring-dampers) are defined using Adams/View command language and included in the command file.

• Full - Adams/View exports all static geometry to Parasolid files instead of using Adams/View command language. This includes cylinders, shells, Parasolid, solids, and so on. It does not include dynamic outlines, spring-damper graphics, and graphic force vectors. These graphics continue to be defined in the Adams/View command language.

Adams/ViewExport - CAD (IGES, STEP, DXG, DWG, and Parasolid)

244

Export - CAD (IGES, STEP, DXG, DWG, and Parasolid)

File → Export → IGES, STEP, DXG/DWG, or Parasolid Shared Dialog Box

Exports CAD geometry using Adams/Exchange. It writes the geometric definition of an Adams model or part from to the specified CAD file format. You can then read the CAD file into a CAD program.

You can export an entire model, an individual part of a model, or a model as it exists at a particular simulation time, which is helpful for transferring position data of an Adams model to a drafting program to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation.


File Type Set to type of geometry that you want to export (IGES, STEP, DXF, DWG, or Parasolid).

File Name Enter the name of the file that you want to create. The file will contain the exported CAD geometry. You do not need to enter a file extension. Adams/Exchange automatically generates the appropriate extension for the type of geometry you are exporting. For example, if you are exporting IGES geometry, Adams/Exchange adds an .igs extension.

File Type For Parasolid geometry only, set to the type of Parasolid geometry file to create.

Part/Model/Analysis Name

• Select the geometry that you want to export, and then enter the name of the geometry in the text box next to the pull-down menu. You can select:

• Model Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View model to be written to the CAD file. Adams/Exchange places each rigid body in the model on a separate level. All geometry written to the IGES file is defined with respect to the global coordinate system of the Adams/View model.

• Part Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View part to be written to the CAD file. Adams/Exchange writes all the geometry owned by the part to the CAD file. It defines all geometry in the CAD file with respect to the part coordinate system.

• Analysis Name - Lets you export a model at a particular simulation frame (time) of a particular analysis. This is helpful for transferring position data of an Adams/View model to a drafting program to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation. Adams/Exchange writes all parts and geometry to the CAD file in the same relative position as they appear in a single frame display.

245E - IExport - DAC or RPC III

Export - DAC or RPC III

File → Export → DAC/RPC III Shared Dialog Box

You can export either DAC Format or RPC III Format request files from Adams/View after a simulation completes. This technique does not require you to set up requests before running the simulation.

By definition, results output to an RPC III or DAC file must have constant time steps. If the results data being output includes non-constant time steps, Adams/View issues a warning, and the time axis of the data will be warped so that the time interval is constant.


File Type Set it to DAC or RPC3.

File to Read Enter the name of the DAC or RPC III file that you want to export.

Results Data Select the result set components you want to export. The result set components can come from results sets, measures, or requests. You can only have one result set per DAC file. To select the data, right-click the Result Data text box, point to Result_Set_Component, and then select Browse to display the Database Navigator.

Adams/ViewExport - FEA Loads

246

Export - FEA Loads

File → Export → FEA Loads Shared Dialog Box

Export FEA load information.

Before exporting FEA load information, you must run a Simulation of your model.

Learn about:

• About Exporting FEA Loads

• Process for Exporting FEA Loads

247E - IExport - FEA Loads

• Limitations for Exporting FEA Loads


File Type Set to FEA Loads.

File Format Select the file format for the loads file that you want Adams/View to create.

Inertia Clear the selection of this option if you would like to output external loads only.

• When selected, Adams/View outputs inertia loads in addition to external loads. Inertia loads include linear acceleration, angular acceleration, and angular velocity of the part or flexible body. Reaction loads include applied and reaction forces acting on the body.

• When cleared, Adams/View specifies a load imbalance for the body, and you must employ a technique, such as inertia relief in the finite element program, to recover the inertia loads based on external loads.

File Name Enter the name of the file to be created. If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box.


Analysis Enter the simulation containing the information you want to export.

Loads on Rigid Body/Loads on Flexible Body

Select whether the body whose load information you want to export is a rigid or flexible body.

Rigid Body FEA origin marker

For a rigid body only, enter the marker to which all load information will be relative. The marker location and orientation must correspond to the origin of the part in the FEA program.

Flexible Body Name For a flexible body only, enter the name of the flexible body. Adams/View assumes that its FEA origin is the same as it was when the flexible body was defined.

You can skip the next two options in the following cases:

• For flexible bodies because the node IDs at each load location are known.

• For rigid bodies if the node IDs are not available. Then, the FEA input file will contain the locations (with respect to the FEA coordinate reference) and Adams ID label of the marker at each load location. You will need to edit the file, however, replacing these labels with the actual node IDs, once they are known.

Adams/ViewExport - FEA Loads

248

Add Load Points to Nodes Table

Select to have Adams/View calculate the points on the part where forces are applied.

Adams/View calculates the load points and places the points and their locations in the Nodes table of the File Export dialog box. The node coordinates are displayed relative to the FEA origin of the rigid or flexible body. You might need to resize the File Export dialog box to see all the point locations. See Example of Nodes Table.

Node_id/Scan file for IDs For rigid bodies only, assign node IDs to the load points Adams/View found, if desired. You can do one of the following:

• Type in the node IDs in the Node Id column fields.

• Select Scan file for IDs to have Adams/View read in a text file containing the node IDs. For more information using a text file, see Process for Exporting FEA Loads.

Because the loads file is a text file, you can always add the node IDs to the file as you add the load case to your FEA dataset.

Note: For flexible bodies, Adams/View automatically assigns node IDs to the load points based on the actual node IDs of the flexible body at these load locations.

Output at times Do one of the following depending on the load information you want Adams/View to export:

• To generate a complete loads history, leave the Output at times text box blank. Adams/View exports load information at every output step in the simulation. This is the default setting.

• To generate only load information for certain output times, enter the desired output times, separated by commas (,) in the Output at times text box. Adams/View exports a single load case at the time closest to the requested time.

For ABAQUS, ANSYS, and NASTRAN, you can also enter a tolerance (+ or - a value) for the output times. For example, if you requested output at time steps 2 and 5 with a tolerance of 0.1, Adams/View generates a load case for all output steps between 1.9 and 2.1 and 4.9 and 5.1.

For DAC and RPC III, you can enter a start output time and an end output time.


249E - IExport - FEA Loads

Caution: Note that loads are output in the Adams/View modeling units. These units must be consistent with those specified in the finite element model or the results of the FE analysis that includes the Adams loads will be incorrect. After completing the Export FEA Loads dialog box, Adams/View displays the current modeling units and gives you a chance to modify them before continuing with the FEA loads export.

Adams/ViewExport - HTML Report

250

Export - HTML Report

File → Export → HTML Report

Exports data in the current session of Adams/PostProcessor as HTML pages for viewing by others in your organization. It also creates

• Plots and animations as png or jpg images

• Movies of animations

• Information on the parts, constraints, forces, and more in the selected models. This is the same information that appears when you select Info.

When you export an HTML report, Adams/PostProcessor creates main homepage with a left frame containing a tree of information in your model. Learn about the resulting HTML pages.

Tab Link

Files Export - HTML Report - FIles

Title Page Export - HTML Report - Title Page

Pages Export - HTML Report - Pages

Models Export - HTML Report - Models

251E - IExport - HTML Report - FIles

Export - HTML Report - FIles

File → Export → HTML Report → Files

Defines the name of the files in which to export Adams/PostProcessor data and where to place the files.


File Name Enter the name you want applied to each of the resulting HTML files and style sheets.

Output Directory Enter where you want the resulting HTML files and folders to be stored.

Adams/ViewExport - HTML Report - Models

252

Export - HTML Report - Models

File → Export → HTML Report → Models

Selects the models for which you want to export information. When you export model information, you output information about the model objects: parts, constraints, forces, measures, requests, and assembly objects. Adams/PostProcessor creates a folder for each model and objects in the model, grouped by type.


Models Enter the name of the models.


253E - IExport - HTML Report - Pages

Export - HTML Report - Pages

File → Export → HTML Report → Pages

Defines the pages of data you want to export and in which formats to publish them.


Pages Select the pages of plots and animations you want exported. If you select Range, enter the pages you want included.

Image Format For the pages of plots, enter the image format in which to store the pages of plots. You can select png or jpg.

Image Width and Height

Enter the pixel size of the exported pages. By default, Adams/PostProcessor maintains the aspect ratio of the images so if you enter a value for width, Adams/PostProcessor automatically calculates the height based on the current aspect ratio, and the reverse. See Maintain Aspect Ratio below. If you leave both text boxes blank, Adams/PostProcessor uses their default size in Adams/PostProcessor.

Maintain Aspect Ratio

Clear to change the proportions of the page sizes, and then enter new values for Image Width and Height (see above).

Export Animations

Select to export the animations as a movie. Clear to just save an image of the first frame of the animation in the same format selected in Image Format.

Movie Format Select the type of movie to export the animation as. You can select: Compressed .avi, Uncompressed .avi, .jpg, .mpg, or .png (AVI format is only available on Windows).

• If you select .jpg or .png, Adams/Processor, exports each frame as an png or jpg file, and then plays them as a movie.

• If you select compressed AVI format, set the frame rate, interval between key frames, and quality (percentage of compression). The default is 75% compression with each key frame 500 frames apart, and a frame rate of 10 seconds per frame.

• If you select .mpg, set either of the following:

• Compress the file using P frames - Turning off the compression using P frames ensures your movie plays in many playback programs, including as xanim. It results, however, in a much larger file (up to 4 times as large).

• Round size to multiples of 16 - Some playback programs require the pixel height and width to be multiplies of 16. Turning this option on ensures that you movie plays in many playback programs.

Adams/ViewExport - HTML Report - Title Page

254

Export - HTML Report - Title Page

File → Export → HTML Report → Title Page

Defines what you want displayed on the title page to provide basic information about the exported data. The title page appears when you first display the homepage. You can also enter an image to appear in the upper right corner of the title page. The image must be a format supported in Web browsers (.gif, .jpg, .png).


Title Enter a title for the published data.

Author Enter the author of the data.

Date Enter the date the data was published. Adams/PostProcessor enters the current date by default.

Comment Enter any comments about the data.

Image File Enter the path and file of an image to appear in the upper right corner.

255E - IExport - Numeric Test Data

Export - Numeric Test DataFile → Export → Numeric Test Data Shared Dialog Box

You can export the data that Adams generates during Simulations for use in other applications.


File Type Set to Numeric Data.

Result Set Comp. Name Enter the name of the results set component or components that you want to export.


Sort By Set to either:

• Value to sort the values in the result set by the magnitude.

• Time (the default) to sort the values in the result set by the simulation time associated with the value.

Order Specify the order in which you want the values listed in the file. Select either ascending or descending.

File Name Specify the name of the file in which you want to save the data. If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are running Adams, enter the path name.


Above Value/Below Value

Enter limits of values to be exported:

• Above Value to specify the highest value to be exported.

• Below Value to specify the lowest value to be exported.

Write to Terminal Select to display the data in an Adams Information window as well as save it in a file. If you do not select Write to Terminal, Adams only writes the data to a file.

Adams/ViewExport - Shell

256

Export - Shell

File → Export → Shell Shared Dialog Box

You can export Adams geometry for use as shell geometry in other applications.


Shell Name Enter the name of the shell object that you want to export.


File Name Enter the name of the file to which you want to export the geometry.


257E - IExport - Spreadsheet Data

Export - Spreadsheet Data

File → Export - Spread Sheet Shared Dialog Box

You can export an Adams/View result set to a file in spreadsheet format. By exporting the result set to a spreadsheet, you can view and manipulate the information in spreadsheet software packages including formatting it or performing additional calculations on it. Tabs separate the data in the exported file.


File Type Set to Spread Sheet.

File Name Enter the name you want to assign to the spreadsheet file. By default, Adams creates the spreadsheet with a .tab extension.


Result Set Name Enter the name of the results set that you want to export.


Adams/ViewExport - Table

258

Export - Table

File → Export → Table

Exports plotting data as tables (HTML or spreadsheet format).


File name Enter the name of the file in which to store the table data.

Plot Enter the name of the plot containing the data. Tips on entering object names in text boxes.


Format Select either html or spreadsheet.

259E - IExport - Wavefront

Export - Wavefront

File → Export → Wavefront Shared Dialog Box

You can export Adams/View graphics and motion data to Wavefront to help you create animations in Wavefront Technologies advanced photorealistic rendering product, the Advanced Visualizer. You can also select to only export the model geometry, in which case Adams/View only creates object files.


File Type Set to Wavefront File.

Model Name/Analysis Name

Select either depending on what information you want to export, and then enter the name of the model or analysis you want exported in the text box next to the pull-down menu:

• If you select Model Name, you export only your model geometry.

• If you select Analysis, you export all motion and geometry data. You can enter multiple models or simulations by separating the names with commas.


Adams/ViewExtrusion Tool

260

Extrusion Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Extrusion Tool

Creates an Extrusion. To create an extrusion, you can specify points or select a curve that defines the extrusion’s profile:

The Extrusion tool extrudes the points or curve along the z-axis of the screen or Working grid, if it is turned on. When you specify points, you can also specify the direction along the z-axis that the Extrusion tool extrudes the profile. You can also select to extrude along a path.

You can select to create the extrusion using the Analytical Method or Non-analytical Method.

261E - IExtrusion Tool

Learn about Creating an Extrusion.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the extrusion to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the extrusion to ground.


Create profile by Select how you want to define the shape of the extrusion:

• Points: Lets you select points.

• Curve: Lets you select existing curve geometry.

Closed If creating the extrusion based on points, select to create a closed profile. If you close the profile, Adams/View creates a solid shape. If you leave the profile open, Adams/View creates a skin that has no mass properties.

Forward/About Center/Backward/Along Path

Select the direction you want the profile to be extruded relative to the global coordinate system or working grid. You can set the direction to one of the following:

• Forward - Extrude the profile along the +z-axis.

• About Center - Extrude the profile half the depth in both the +z and -z directions.

• Backward - Extrude the profile along the -z-axis.

• Along Path - Select the path along which to extrude the wire geometry.

Learn more about Extruding Construction Geometry Along a Path. See an Example of Extrusion Directions.

Length Enter the depth of the extrusion. (Not available when you select Along Path, as explained above.)

Analytical Select to create an extrusion using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the Non-analytical Method.

Adams/ViewExtrusion Tool

262

Note: After you draw the extrusion, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to create the extrusion, hotpoints appear at every vertex in the profile and at the point directly opposite from where you began drawing the profile. If you used the analytical method, hotpoints appear along the curves that define the extrusion. Use the vertex hotpoints to modify the profile of the extrusion and the opposite hotpoint to control the depth of the extrusion. See Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

You can also use the extrusion modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that make up the profile and read in location points from a file. See Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and using the Location Table.

263E - IFast Fourier Transform (FFT)

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)

Edit → Plot → FFT

Constructs a two-dimensional Fast fourier transform (FFT) plot.

You can either determine the magnitude (Mag), the phase (Phase), or determine the power spectral density (PSD) based on Welch's method.


Curve Name Displays the name of the curve you are plotting.

Y-Axis Select one of the following:

• Mag

• Phase

• PSD

Start Time Enter the start time on the curve for which you want the signal processing performed.

End Time Enter the end time on the curve for which you want the signal processing performed.

Window Type Select the type of window type you want to use. Learn more about the window functions.

Points/Points (Power of 2) Select the number of points to be used for the FFT.

Tips on Selecting Points.

The following option is only available if you selected Mag or Phase.

Detrend Input Data Select if you want to detrend the signal. This subtracts the linear least square fit from the data stream.

The following options are only available if you selected PSD.

Number of Segments/Segment Length

Enter the number of segments, which means that the signal will be split in that many segments of equal length (window length).

Or, you can enter the segment length directly. This is often referred to as the window length.

Overlap Points Enter the number of overlaps, which indicates how many signal samples are used.

Adams/ViewFast Fourier Transform (FFT) 3D

264

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 3D

Edit → Plot → FFT 3D

Constructs a three-dimensional (3D) Fast fourier transform (FFT) plot by performing signal processing on individual slices of a curve. You define a slice size, and Adams/PostProcessor slides this over a range of a curve, overlapping the slices as specified. Each slice of the curve becomes a row in the 3D plot surface.


Curve Name Displays the name of the curve you are plotting.

Y-Axis Select one of the following:

• Mag

• Phase

• PSD

Start Time/End Time Enter the start and end time to define the entire range of the curve on which you want signal processing performed.

Time Slice Size Enter the width of a slice of the curve on which to perform signal processing

Percentage Overlap Enter the percentage amount the slices can overlap.

Window Type Select the type of window you want to use.

Points/Points (Power of 2) Select the number of points to be used for the FFT.

Tips on Selecting Points

The following option is only available if you selected Mag or Phase.

Detrend Input Data Select if you want to detrend the signal. This subtracts the linear least square fit from the data stream.

The following options are only available if you selected PSD.

Number of Segments/Segment Length

Enter the number of equal segments into which the signal will be split.

Or, you can enter the segment length directly. This is often referred to as the window length.

Overlap Points Enter the number of overlaps, which indicates how many signal samples are used.

265E - IFEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table

FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table

If you selected: Set the following options:

Loads on Rigid Body 1. In the R Marker text box, enter the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system to output loads. Because Adams/Solver resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the coordinate system of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA basic coordinate system of the part's finite element (FE) model.

2. In the Peak Slice text box, select that FE model load data are to be output only at those time steps where the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time options in Step 5 of the procedure, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, or GMAG.

Loads on Flex Body • Select Peak Slice to output FE model data only at those time steps where the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time options in Step 5, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, or GMAG.

Modal Deformation • In the Flex Body text box, enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs the data in the FE modal basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.

Adams/ViewFEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table

266

Nodal Deformation • In the Flex Body text box, enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.

• In the Nodes text box, enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is specified that does not belong to the flexible body.

• In the Datum text box, enter a node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal displacements. Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you do not specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of nodal displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified node does not belong to the flexible body.


267E - IFEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table

Stress and Strain You can select to either output the stress/strain on nodes or hotspots:

To output them on nodes:

1. In the Nodes text box, enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is specified that does not belong to the flexible body.

2. In the R Marker text box, enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform the stress or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, you can reference a marker whose orientation does match.

To define hotspots:

1. In the Hotspots text box, enter the number of hotspots to locate and output. With this option, a text file containing a tab-delimited table of hotspot information, such as node ID, maximum value, time when the maximum value occurred, and location, is generated.

2. From the option menu, specify the value of stress/strain in determining hotspots from one of Von Mises, Max Prin., Min Prin., Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY, Shear-YZ, or Shear-ZX. For more information, see the FEMDATA statement.

3. In the Radius text box, enter a radius that defines the spherical extent of each hotspot. A default value of 0.0 (zero) means that all nodes in the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.

4. In the R Marker text box, enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform the stress or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, you can reference a marker whose orientation does match.


Adams/ViewField Element Tool

268

Field Element Tool

Build → Forces → Field Element Tool

Creates a Field element.

Learn more about:

• Field Elements



• 1 Location








269E - IFile Export

File Export

File → Export Shared Dialog Box

Exports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.

Learn about exporting:

• Adams/Solver Dataset

• Adams/Solver Analysis Files (Graphics, Requests, and Results)

• Adams/Solver Script files (*.acf)

• Adams/View Command Files

• Numeric Data

• CAD (STEP, IGES, DXG/DWG, Parasolid) (Adams/Exchange only)

• CatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP, IGES, Acis, VDA (Adams CAD Translators only)

• Wavefront

• Shell Geometry

• FEA Loads

• Spreadsheet Data

• Adams/PostProcessor

• DAC/RPC III

Adams/ViewFile Import

270

File Import

File → Import Shared Dialog Box

Imports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.

Learn about importing:

• Adams/View command files

• Adams/Solver datasets

• Adams/Solver analysis files

• Adams/Solver Script files (*.acf)

• Test data

• STEP, IGES, DXF, DWG (Adams/Exchange only)

• CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA (Adams CAD Translators only)

• Parasolid (Adams/Exchange only)

• Wavefront files

• Stereolithography and Render

• Shell

• DAC and RPC III files

271E - IFile Import - Adams/PPT

File Import - Adams/PPT

File → Import

Imports data into Adams/PostProcessor. In addition to importing the same data you can import into Adams/View, Adams/PostProcessor also imports Reports and plot configuration files for template-based products.

To import standard data:

• See the Adams/View File Import dialog box.

To import a report:

1. From the File menu, point to Import, and then select Report.

2. Enter the name of the file to import.

3. Select OK.

To load a report in a viewport:

• Right-click the background of a viewport, and then select Load Report.

To import a plot configuration file for template-based products:

• See Creating Plots Using a Plot Configuration File.

Adams/ViewFiles

272

Files

Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Files

Selecting Files as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set advanced options for Adams/Solver analysis files.


Request Tables Specify whether or not Adams/View prints time-response-request tables in the Tabular output file.

• If you set to On, Adams/View writes tables for each request in your model.

• If you set to Off, Adams/View does not write the tables. If your simulation has many output steps or you have many requests, specifying Off results in a much smaller tabular output file and conserves disk space.

Separator Specify whether or not Adams writes separators to the request, graphics, results, and tabular output files when you modify the model topology in the middle of a Simulation. When running a Scripted simulation, you can change the model topology by adding Adams commands to your script file to activate an element, deactivate an element, change a marker position, or change the type or point of application of a force or constraint.

• If you set to On (which is the default), Adams/Solver reads the analysis information into Adams/View, one analysis for each block of output between the separators.

• If you set to Off, Adams/Solver reads the analysis information into Adams/View as a single simulation. This allow you to plot or animate the simulation from beginning to end.

Yaw Pitch Roll Set to Yes to specify that rotational values are to be output in yaw, pitch, and roll coordinates, rather than in psi, theta, and phi coordinates. First Adams rotates about the z-axis, then about the new negative y-axis (y'), and then about the second new x-axis (x"). Note that Yaw Pitch Roll only affects rotational displacement output. Adams/View always outputs angular velocities and accelerations as vectors, with orthogonal x, y, and z components.

273E - IFillet Tool

Fillet Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Fillet Tool

Creates rounded (filleted) edges and corners

You can think of creating filleted edges as rolling a ball over the edges or corners of the geometry to round them.

Adams/ViewFillet Tool

274

When filleting an edge or corner, you can specify a start and an end radius for the fillet to create a variable fillet:

Adams/View begins creating the variable fillet using the start radius and then slowly increases or decreases the size of the fillet until it reaches the end radius. Using the ball analogy again, Adams/View starts rounding edges and corners using one size ball and finishes using a different size.

Learn about:

Note: You will get different results when you fillet one edge at a time than when you fillet all edges at once. Also, you may not be able to fillet an edge if an adjoining edge has already been filleted. It depends on the complexity of the filleting.

275E - IFillet Tool

• Chamfering and Filleting Objects

• Chamfer Tool


Radius Enter the radius for the fillet.

End Radius To create a variable fillet, enter the end radius. The Fillet tool uses the value you enter for radius as the starting radius of the variable fillet.

Adams/ViewFixed Joint Tool

276

Fixed Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Fixed Joint Tool

Creates a fixed joint that locks two parts together so they cannot move with respect to each other. The effect is similar to defining two parts as a single part. If you want to have the two parts move relative to each other in a future Simulation, simply delete the fixed joint and use another type of joint.

For a fixed joint, the location and orientation of the joint often do not affect the outcome of the simulation. In these cases, you can place the joint at a location where the graphic icon is easily visible. However, occasionally the placement of the fixed joint can allow force moments to become quite large depending on where you place the joint, as shown in this example. In this case, be sure to place it where you get the results you want.

277E - IFixed Joint Tool




Set how you want to connect the joint to parts:



• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded view, see Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.



Set how you want to orient the joint:







Adams/ViewFlexible Body Mode Filter

278

Flexible Body Mode Filter

Right-click flexible body → Modify (shortcut: Double-click) → Mode Filter

Lets you select a filter type to remove modes from the animation display. By default, all enabled modes are used to generate nodal displacements for each flexible body during animations. To increase animation performance, Adams/Flex has three filters that let you remove graphically insignificant modes for animations. A mode that is filtered out is excluded from the modal superposition and any contribution to the deformation of the body is ignored. Note that these modes are not filtered out for numeric operations, such as signal processing or xy plotting.


Flex Body Enter the name of the flexible body.

Filter Modes By Select one of the following:

• None - Includes all modes for computing the graphics display.

• Frequency - Excludes any mode that is activated above the specified frequency.

• Min Displacement - Excludes any mode that does not contribute the minimum displacement specified for at least one vertex of the flexible body. For example, if you are viewing the animation of a vehicle driving down the road, it is unlikely that you would be able to see deformations of 0.5 mm or less. Therefore, if you set a mode filter value of 0.5, any mode that contributes less then 0.5 is considered insignificant and is ignored for animations. This calculation is performed at each frame of the animation, allowing the set of significant modes to change throughout the simulation.

• Percentage - Determines the maximum displacement contributed by all modes, and excludes any mode that doesn't contribute displacement of one vertex at least as significant as a percentage of the maximum. For example, setting the percentage filter at 15% excludes any mode not contributing at least 15% of the most dominant mode. This calculation is performed for each frame of the animation, therefore, allowing the set of significant modes to change throughout the simulation.

Filter Value Enter the frequency, minimum displacement, or percentage for the specified filter.

279E - IFlexible Body Modify

Flexible Body Modify

Right-click flexible body → Modify (shortcut: Double-click)

Lets you modify a flexible body. For example, you can change its modal content to improve the efficiency or accuracy of a Simulation.


Flexible Body Enter the name of the flexible body to modify.

Damping Ratio Do one of the following:

• Accept the default. If you accept the default, Adams/Flex applies non-zero damping as follows:

• 1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.

• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.

• 100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.

• Clear the selection of default, and then either:

• Enter the scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.

• Enter a function. To get help building the function, next to the

Damping Ratio text box, select the More button .

Learn more about Specifying Damping.

Datum Node Set the datum node for which you want deformation color changes to be relative to using Adams/Flex. Adams/Flex considers the deformation to be relative to the origin of the flexible body (its local body reference frame (LBRF) or coordinate system) by default. For example, if you were modeling a cantilever beam in Adams/Flex, you could specify that deformations should be relative to the clamped end as is illustrated in the first tutorial, Building and Simulating a Flexible Model, in Getting Started Using Adams/Flex.

To set the datum node:

1. Clear the selection of LBRF.

2. In the Datum Node text box, enter the number of the desired node.

Tip: To select a node from the screen, right-click the Datum Node text box, and then select Pick Flexbody Node. Select the node from the screen. The node number appears in the Datum Node text box.

../../getting_started_flex/master.htm

Adams/ViewFlexible Body Modify

280

Generalized damping Select one:

• Off - Disables the generalized damping.

• Full - Enables the complete generalized damping matrix, including the effects of a resultant damping force.

• Internal Only - Only enables the portion of the generalized damping matrix corresponding to the modal coordinates (that is, ignore the resultant damping force).

Location Click to display the Modify Body - Name and Position dialog box and set the name, Adams/Solver ID, and location of the flexible body.

Position ICs Click to display the Modify Body - Position Initial Conditions dialog box and set the initial position for a flexible body before the simulation starts, just as you can for any part in Adams/View. You can set how you want Adams/View to calculate these properties as well as define these properties yourself.

Velocity ICs Click to display the Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions dialog box and set the initial velocity for a flexible body before the simulation starts just as you can for any part in Adams/View. You can set how you want Adams/View to calculate these properties as well as define these properties yourself.

Modal ICs Click to display the Modify Modal ICs dialog box to disable or enable range of modes using a table. Learn About Flexible Body Modal Content.

Mode Viewing and Animation

Mode Number Enter the number of the mode in the flexible body to view, and then press Enter. The total number of modes in the flexible body appear to the right of the Mode Number text box.

When you display a mode, Adams/Flex displays its frequency in the Frequency text box. Also, when you display a mode, the mode deformations appear along with the undeformed flexible body. You can turn this off to display only the deformed mode.

Learn more about Viewing Modes.

Select to display the next mode.

Select to animate the specified mode to see how it deforms. By default, the animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles. (Use the Cycles text box (described below) to change the number of cycles.)

Tip: You can also use the Animation tool on the Main toolbox to animate the entire model containing the flexible body after you've run a simulation.


281E - IFlexible Body Modify

Select to display the previous mode.

Frequency Enter the frequency of the mode you'd like to view, and then press Enter.

The mode closest to the specified frequency appears.

Cycles Enter the number of times Adams/Flex should run the animation. By default, the animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles.

Superimpose Clear to display only the mode deformations. Select to display both the mode deformations and the undeformed flexible body.

Disabling/Enabling Modes (Learn more about Enabling and Disabling Modes.)

Enable/Disable Enable or disable the mode number in the Mode Number text box. If you disable a mode, its mode number and natural frequency appear in parentheses.

range Click to display the Enable or Disable a Range of Modes dialog box to disable or enable a group of modes based on either their mode number or frequency.

auto Click to display the Auto Disable Modes by Strain Energy dialog box to disable or enable modes based on their contribution of strain energy.

Substituting Graphics with an Outline (Learn more about Substituting Outline Graphics for the Finite Element Mesh.)

full MNF graphics Select to turn on the viewing of the full MNF graphics; clear to turn off the viewing.

Outline Select to turn on the viewing of the Outline.

Select to sketch an outline.

To sketch the outline:

• Select nodes on the flexible body using the left mouse button.

• When the outline is complete, right-click.

Modifying Modal Formulation

Inertia Modeling Select a formulation option or select Custom. Learn more about the options.

When you select Custom, Adams/Flex displays a Custom Inertial Modeling dialog box that lets you set up the invariants that you want selected.

Setting Plot Type


Adams/ViewFlexible Body Modify

282

Plot Type Select a plot type to view in Adams/Flex:

• Contour - Sets Adams/Flex so that it displays Contour plots. In addition, you can view contour plots in Adams/PostProcessor.

• Vector - Sets Adams/Flex so that it displays Vector plots.

• None - Sets to display no plots.

• Both - Sets the display of both contour and vector plots.

Learn to set plot types in Adams/PostProcessor.

Mode Filter Select to display the Flexible Body Mode Filter dialog box to exclude nodal deformations from animations to increase animation performance.

Setting Deformation Scale

Deformation Scale Move the Deformation Scale Factor slider to change the amount by which Adams/Flex deforms a mode. For greater exaggeration, type a value in the text box next to the slider. Changing the deformation scale lets you exaggerate deformations that might otherwise be too subtle to see, or lets you limit the deformations. The default scale factor is 1.

Note that setting the scale factor to a value other than 1 can make the joints at the flexible body appear to separate. This is because the motion of a point on a flexible body is the sum of the deformation that has been scaled and a rigid body motion that is not scaled.

In addition, if you set the scale to 0, Adams/Flex treats the flexible body as a rigid body during animations.

Select to add any comments to help you manage and identify the flexible body. See Comments.

Select to create a flexible body measure. Learn about creating Object Measures


283E - IForce Create Element Like Friction

Force Create Element Like FrictionModels both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical, hooke/universal, and spherical joints.

For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, follow the information for the Adams/Solver FRICTION statement in the Adams/Solver online help.


Adams/ViewForce Graphics Settings

284

Force Graphics Settings

Settings → Force Graphics

Allows you to specify settings for force graphics.

Learn about Setting Up Force Graphics.


Force Scale Enter the amount by which you want to scale force (straight arrows) graphics. The default scale is 1.0.

Torque Scale Enter the amount by which you want to scale torque (semi-circular arrows) graphics. The default scale is 1.0.

Display Numeric Values Select if you want Adams/View to continuously display the magnitudes for all force and torque graphics during the animation.

Decimal Places Enter the number of decimal places to be written for force graphics numeric values. The default value is 4.

Always in Foreground Select if you want Adams/View to show force graphics in the foreground of the model so model geometry does not obscure them.

Always Wireframe Vectors Select if you want Adams/View to show the force graphics in wireframe render mode even when you are rendering the view in shaded mode.

Note: • If you defined force graphics for any force elements in your model, but do not see the associated arrows during animation, you should probably increase the appropriate scale and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until the arrows of interest are visible.

• Conversely, if you see force graphic arrows on the screen, but they are too large or not completely visible, you should either zoom out, fit your view, or decrease the scale factor and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until at least the arrows of interest are completely visible.

285E - IForce Modify Element Like Beam

Force Modify Element Like Beam

Right-click beam → Modify

After you’ve created a beam, you can modify the following:

• Markers between which the beam acts.

• Stiffness and damping values.

• Material properties of the beam, such as its length and area.

Learn more about Beams.



Beam Name Enter the name of the beam to modify.

New Beam Name Enter a new name for the beam, if desired.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the beam. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Enter any comments about the beam that might help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Ixx Enter the torsional constant. The torsional constant is sometimes referred to as the torsional shape factor or torsional stiffness coefficient. It is expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Ixx is identical to the polar moment of inertia J= . For thin-walled sections, open sections, and non-circular sections, you should consult a handbook.

Iyy/Izz Enter the area moments of inertia about the neutral axes of the beam cross sectional areas (y-y and z-z). These are sometimes referred to as the second moment of area about a given axis. They are expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Iyy=Izz= . For thin-walled sections, open sections, and non-circular sections, you should consult a handbook.

Area of Cross Section Enter the uniform area of the beam cross-section geometry. The centroidal axis must be orthogonal to this cross section.

Adams/ViewForce Modify Element Like Beam

286

Y Shear Area Ratio/ Z Shear Area Ratio

Specify the correction factor (the shear area ratio) for shear deflection in the y and z direction for Timoshenko beams. If you want to neglect the deflection due to shear, enter zero in the text boxes.

For the y direction:

where:

• Qy is the first moment of cross-sectional area to be sheared by a

force in the z direction.

• lz is the cross section dimension in the z direction.

For the z direction:

where:

• Qz is the first moment of cross-sectional area to be sheared by a

force in the y direction.

• Iy is the cross section dimension in the y direction.

• Common values for shear area ratio based on the type of cross section are:

• Solid rectangular - 6/5

• Solid circular - 10/9

• Thin wall hollow circular - 2

Note: The K1 and K2 terms that are used by MSC.Nastran for defining the beam properties using PBEAM are the inverse of the y shear and z shear values that Adams/View uses.

Young's Modulus Enter Young’s modulus of elasticity for the beam material.

Shear Modulus Enter the shear modulus of elasticity for the beam material.

Beam Length Enter the undeformed length of the beam along the x-axis of the J marker on the reaction body.


287E - IForce Modify Element Like Beam

Damping Ratio/Matrix of Damping Terms

Select either:

• Damping Ratio and enter a damping value to establish a ratio for calculating the structural damping matrix for the beam. To obtain the damping matrix, Adams/Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix by the value you enter for the damping ratio.

• Matrix of Damping Terms and enter a six-by-six structural damping matrix for the beam. Because this matrix is symmetric, you only need to specify one-half of the matrix. The following matrix shows the values to input:

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero entries; that is, r1 through r21 each default to zero.

The damping matrix should be positive semidefinite. This ensures that damping does not feed energy into the model. Adams/Solver does not warn you if the matrix is not positive semidefinite.


Adams/ViewForce Modify Element Like Beam

288

I Marker/ J marker Specify the two markers between which to define a beam. The I marker is on the action body and the J marker is on the reaction body. The J marker establishes the direction of the force components.

By definition, the beam lies along the positive x-axis of the J marker. Therefore, the I marker must have a positive x displacement with respect to the J marker when viewed from the J marker. In its undeformed configuration, the orientation of the I and the J markers must be the same.

When the x-axes of the markers defining a beam are not collinear, the beam deflection and, consequently, the force corresponding to this deflection are calculated. To minimize the effect of such misalignments, perform a static equilibrium at the start of the simulation.

When the beam element angular deflections are small, the stiffness matrix provides a meaningful description of the beam behavior. When the angular deflections are large, they are not commutative; so the stiffness matrix that produces the translational and rotational force components may not correctly describe the beam behavior. Adams/Solver issues a warning message if the beam translational displacements exceed 10 percent of the undeformed length.

Specifies the theory to be used to define the force this element will apply. By default the LINEAR theory is used. If the NONLINEAR option is used, the full non linear Euler-Bernoulli theory is used. If the STRING option is used, a simplified non linear theory is used. The simplified non linear theory may speed up your simulations with little performance penalties.


289E - IForce Modify Element Like Field

Force Modify Element Like Field

Right-click field element → Modify

Modifies a field element to define a linear or nonlinear force.



Field Name Enter the name of the field element to modify.

New Field Name Enter a new name for the field element, if desired.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the field element. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Enter any comments about the field element that might help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

I marker Name/ J marker Name

Specify the two markers between which the force and torque are to be exerted. Adams/View applies the component translational and rotational forces for a field to the I marker and imposes reaction forces on the J marker.

Translation at Preload/ Rotation at Preload

Enter the preload translational and rotational force for the field element.

• Translation at Preload to define three reference lengths. This is the nominal (x0, y0, z0) position of the I marker with respect to the J marker, resolved in the J marker coordinate system.

• Rotation at Preload to define the reference rotational displacement of the axes of the I marker with respect to the J marker, resolved in the J marker axes (a0, b0, and c0) (specified in radians).

If the reference force is zero, then the preload is the same as the free length. Entering preload values is optional and defaults to a six zero entry.

Define Using Standard Values/Define Using Subroutine

Select one of the following:

• Define Using Standard Values and enter values for the text boxes that appear in the dialog box as explained in the next rows of this table.

• Define Using Subroutine and enter parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine FIESUB to define a nonlinear field. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View is to pass to FIESUB. For more on the FIESUB subroutine and nonlinear fields, see the Adams/Solver online help.

If you selected Define Using Standard Values, the following options appear:


Adams/ViewForce Modify Element Like Field

290

Force Preload/Torque Preload

Define three preload force components and three preload torque components transferred by the field element when the I and J markers are separated/misaligned by the values specified in the Translation at Preload and Rotation at Preload text boxes.The terms are the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axis of the J marker and the torque components about the x, y-, and z-axis of the J marker, respectively. Entering values for Force Preload and Torque Preload is optional and defaults to six zero entries.

Stiffness Matrix Define a six-by-six matrix of stiffness coefficients. The following matrix shows the values to input.

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right. Learn about units.

Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the stiffness matrix.


291E - IForce Modify Element Like Field

Matrix of Damping Terms/Damping Ratio

Enter either a matrix of damping terms or a damping ratio if you want to include damping coefficients in the calculation of the field forces as explained below. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero entries.

• To define a six-by-six matrix of viscous damping coefficients, select Matrix of Damping Terms and enter the elements. The following matrix shows the values to input.

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.

• To enter a damping ratio that defines the ratio of the damping matrix to the stiffness matrix, select Damping Ratio and enter the value. If you enter a damping ratio, Adams/Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix by the ratio to obtain the damping matrix. Do not enter a ratio without also entering a stiffness matrix.

Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the damping matrix.


User Function Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/Solver is to pass to Learn about units. For more on FIESUB and nonlinear fields, see the Adams/Solver online help.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.

Specifies the theory to be used to define the force this element will apply. By default the LINEAR theory is used. If the NONLINEAR option is used, the full non linear Euler-Bernoulli theory is used. If the STRING option is used, a simplified non linear theory is used. The simplified non linear theory may speed up your simulations with little performance penalties.




Adams/ViewForce Modify Element Like Friction

292

Force Modify Element Like FrictionModels both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical, hooke/universal, and spherical joints.

For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, follow the information for the Adams/Solver FRICTION statement in the Adams/Solver online help.


293E - IForces

ForcesDisplays tools for creating forces. Learn more about Forces.

Icon Link Icon Link

Applied Forces Special Forces

Single-Component Force tool Create/Modify Contact

Three-Component Force tool Create/Modify Modal Force

Six-Component General Force tool Create/Modify Wheel and Tire

Single-Component Torque tool Gravity


Flexible Connections

Bushing Tool

Torsion SpringTool

Field Element Tool


Beam

Adams/ViewFrustum Tool

294

Frustum Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Frustrum Tool

Creates a frustum, which is a cone, the top of which has been cut off. You create a frustum by drawing its length. The Frustum tool makes the bottom radius 12.5% of the length and makes the top radius of the frustum 50% of the radius of the base radius. Before drawing, you can also specify the frustum's length and the radii of its bottom and top

Learn about Creating a Frustum.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the frustum to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the frustum to ground.


Length If desired, select and enter the length for the frustum.

Bottom Radius If desired, select and enter the bottom radius for the frustum.

Top Radius If desired, select and enter the top radius for the frustum.

295E - IFrustum Tool

Note: Three hotpoints appear on a frustrum after you draw it. One controls the length of the frustum, one controls its top radius, and the other controls the bottom radius. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

Adams/ViewFunction Builder

296

Function Builder

Tools → Function Builder

Helps you create and modify functions and parameterize values for various entities. You can either work in the Expression mode or the Run-time mode.

Expression Mode

297E - IFunction Builder

Run-time Mode

Adams/ViewFunction Builder

298

For more information on Function Builder, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.


Create/modify a function object You can type in a function or choose from the list of system supplied functions.

Function Categories Use the pull-down menu to choose from:

• All Functions

• Math Functions

• Location/Orientation Functions

• Modeling Functions

• Matrix/Array Functions

• String Functions

• Database Functions

• File Functions

• Misc. Functions

Information on Types of Functions.

Assist Only available for certain functions. Displays a dialog box to help you with function parameters.

Click to add a plus (+) sign or right-click for more operators.

Name Enter a name of a new or existing function object.

Load Select to update with the properties of the current function object.

Type Select the type of value you want the function to return. Choose from:

• real

• integer

• array

• string

• object

• location_orientation

Arguments Enter the names of arguments for the function object.

Assumed Values Select to specify assumed values for arguments to be used during validation and/or plotting.


299E - IFunction Builder

Getting Object Data Select a type object allowed in the object field. Choose from:

• Markers

• Parts

• Design Points

• Design Variables

• Results Data

• Measures

• All Objects

Enter the name of an object to insert into your function definition in the field next to the pull-down menu.

Get Data Owned By Object Select if you want to get the name of a data field owned by the object and insert it into your function definition.

Insert Object Name Select if you want to insert the object name into your function definition.

Plot Select to plot your function.

Plot Limits Select to specify the horizontal limits for plotting your function.

Evaluate Select to evaluate your function.


Adams/ViewFunction Builder Plot Limits

300

Function Builder Plot Limits

Tools → Function Builder → Plot Limits

When working in the Function Builder in Run-time mode, you can set limits for the horizontal axis values. Adams/View plots the independent data on the horizontal axis.

For more information, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.


Begin Value Enter a value with which you want to start.

End Value Enter a value with which you want to end.

Number of Computed Points Enter the number of points to be computed.


301E - IGain Block

Gain Block

Build → Controls Toolkit → Standard Control Blocks → New/Modify →

Gain blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. You specify the gain as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.

Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.


Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.

Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.

Gain Specify the assembly name of any controls block.

Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

Adams/ViewGear Joint Tool

302

Gear Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Gear Joint Tool

Creates a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact.

Learn about:

• Creating and Modifying Gears

• About Gears

• Equations for Gears

303E - IGeneral Point Motion Tool

General Point Motion Tool

Build → Joints → General Point Motion Tool

Creates a general Point Motion.

Learn about:

• Motion

• Creating Point Motions Using the Motion Tools


1 location (Bodies Implicit)/2 Bodies -1 Location/2 Bodies -2 Locations

Set how you want the motion connected to parts:

• 1 location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to that part and ground.


• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of these options, see About Connecting Constraints to Parts.


Set how you want the motion oriented:

• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the motion along the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.

• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the motion along a direction vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.

Adams/ViewGeometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack

304

Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack

Build → Bodies/Geometry

Main toolbox → Right-click Geometry tool stack

Displays tools for creating rigid body geometry.

Geometric Tool StackGeometric Modeling Palette (from Build

Menu)

305E - IGeometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack

Icon Link Icon Link

Link Tool Arc Tool

Box Tool Spline Tool

Cylinder Tool Unite Tool

Sphere Tool Intersect Tool

Frustum Tool Cut Tool

Torus Tool Split Tool

Extrusion Tool Merge Tool

Revolution Tool Chain Tool

Plate Tool Fillet Tool

Point Tool Chamfer Tool

Marker Tool Hole Tool

Plane Tool Boss Tool

Polyline Tool Hollow Tool



Adams/ViewGeometry Modify Curve Arc

306

Geometry Modify Curve Arc

Right-click an arc → Modify

Allows you to control the size and location of an arc. You can modify a circle by following the same steps. Learn about the Arc Tool.


Arc Name Enter the name of the arc you want to modify.

New Arc Name If you want, enter a new name for the arc.


Comments Enter any comments about the geometry to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Center Marker Enter values for the marker at the center of the arc or circle. The plane of the arc is normal to the z-axis of the center marker.

Angle Extent (arcs only) Enter values for the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center marker of an arc. The angle starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker and extends the arc.

Radius/Ref Radius By Marker

Choose either Radius or Ref Radius By Marker.

Enter either the radius of the arc or circle or enter a radius marker. If you specify a radius marker, Adams/View calculates the radius of the arc or circle as the distance from the center marker origin to the radius marker origin. Adams/View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you later move the marker, the radius does not change.

307E - IGeometry Modify Curve Arc

Segment Count Displays the number of straight line segments Adams/View uses to draw the circle or arc.

Close For an arc, select one of the following:

• Chord or Yes - Closes the arc from the starting point to the ending point.

• Sector - Closes the arc so that it creates a pie-shaped arc.

• No - Creates an open arc.


Adams/ViewGeometry Modify Curve Polyline

308

Geometry Modify Curve Polyline

Right-click a polyline → Modify

Allows you to control the size and location of the polyline. Learn about the Polyline Tool.


Polyline Name Enter the name of the polyline to modify.

New Name If you want, enter a new name for the polyline.

Relative To Specify the location and orientation coordinates in the coordinate system.

Location/Path Curve Select either Location or Path Curve and then specify:

• Locations to be used to define the polyline. By default, you supply Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates. Adams/View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify using the Relative To parameter.

To easily edit the locations, select the More button to display the Location table.

• A geometry object whose path defines the polyline. You can select arcs, circles, spline curves, polylines, and outlines. Adams/View extracts the values of the vertices of the path curve and uses them to create the polyline.

Close Select if you want to create a closed polyline. If closed, the polyline can be filled (shaded). The endpoints of the polyline do not need to be coincident for you to close it; the two endpoints will be connected with a line segment.

If you do not select Close, you create a polyline that appears as a segmented curve. Adams/View creates the polyline by connecting the locations you specified in the Location text box together with straight line segments in the order in which you specified them.

Select to add any comments about the polyline that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.

309E - IGeometry Modify Feature Blend - Chamfer or Fillet

Geometry Modify Feature Blend - Chamfer or Fillet

Right-click a chamfer or fillet → BlendFeature → Modify

Allows you to control the radius of the chamfer or fillet. Learn more about:

• Chamfer Tool

• Fillet Tool


Blend Name Enter the name of the chamfer or fillet to modify.

New Blend Name If you want, enter a new name for the chamfer or fillet.

Radius 1 Enter the width of the chamfer bevel or radius of the fillet.

Radius 2 Enter the ending radius of the fillet. You specify the end radius if you are creating a variable blend fillet.

Adams/ViewGeometry Modify Feature Hole

310

Geometry Modify Feature Hole

Right-click a hole or boss → Modify

Allows you to control the location and dimensions of a hole or boss.

Learn more:

• Hole Tool

• Boss Tool


Hole Name Enter the name of the hole to modify.

New Hole Name If you want, enter a new name for the hole.

Center Specify the location of the center of the hole or boss.

Radius Specify the radius of the hole or boss.

Depth Specify the depth of the hole or boss.

311E - IGeometry Modify Feature Thinshell

Geometry Modify Feature Thinshell

Right-click a hollow → Modify

Allows you to control the thickness of a hollowed shell. Learn about the Hollow Tool.


Name Enter the name of the thinshell to modify.

New Name If you want, enter a new name for the thinshell.

Thickness Specify the depth of the remaining shell after you hollow the object.

Adams/ViewGeometry Modify Shape Block

312

Geometry Modify Shape Block

Right-click a block → Modify

Allows you to control the corner marker used as the anchor point of a block (box). By controlling the corner marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the block's location and orientation.

Learn about the Box Tool.


Block Name Displays the name of the block you are modifying.

New Block Name If you want, enter a unique name for the block.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the block. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the block that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Corner Marker Specify a marker used to define the anchor point for the block.

Diag Corner Coords Specify the location of the diagonal corner from the marker measured in the coordinate system of the corner marker.

• Block Modify Options

313E - IGeometry Modify Shape Cylinder

Geometry Modify Shape Cylinder

Right-click a cylinder → Modify

Allows you to control the center marker used as the anchor point of a cylinder. By controlling the center marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the cylinder's location and orientation.

Learn about the Cylinder Tool.


Cylinder Name Displays the name of the cylinder you are modifying.

New Cylinder Name If you want, enter a unique name for the cylinder.


Comments Add any comments about the cylinder that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Cylinder Options

Center Marker Specify the center marker that defines the center of base of the cylinder. The length of the cylinder is oriented along the z-axis of the center marker.

Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center marker. The angle starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker and extends the arc of the cylinder.

Length Enter the length of the cylinder. Adams/View uses the value of length to specify the z distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a cylinder along the positive z-axis of the center marker.

Radius/Ref Radius By Marker

Specify the radius of circles at the top and bottom of the cylinder or a radius marker. If you enter a radius marker, Adams/View calculates the radius of the cylinder as the distance from the center marker z-axis to the radius marker. Adams/View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you later move this marker, the radius does not change.

Adams/ViewGeometry Modify Shape Cylinder

314

Side Count for Body Enter the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on the side of the cylinder. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations Adams/View uses to determine a part’s mass and inertia.

Segment Count for Ends Displays the number of straight line segments Adams/View uses to draw the circles at the ends of the cylinder.


315E - IGeometry Modify Shape Ellipsoid (Spheres)

Geometry Modify Shape Ellipsoid (Spheres)

Right-click a sphere → Ellipsoid → Modify

Allows you to control the center marker used as the anchor point of a ellipsoid (sphere). By controlling the center marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the ellipsoid's location and orientation.

Learn about the Sphere Tool.


Ellipsoid Name Displays the name of the ellipsoid you are modifying.

New Ellipsoid Name If you want, enter a unique name for the ellipsoid.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the ellipsoid. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the ellipsoid that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Center Marker Specify the center marker that defines the center of the ellipsoid.

X Scale Specify the diameter dimension along the center marker's x-axis.

Y Scale Specify the diameter dimension along the center marker's y-axis.

Z Scale Specify the diameter dimension along the center marker's z-axis.

Adams/ViewGeometry Modify Shape Frustum

316

Geometry Modify Shape Frustum

Right-click a frustum → Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of a frustum.

Learn about the Frustum Tool.


Frustum Name Enter the name of the frustum to modify.

Center Marker Specify the marker at the center of the bottom of a frustum. Orient the center marker so that its z-axis is normal to the bottom of the frustum and points towards the top of the frustum.

Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center marker. The angle starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker and extends the arc of the frustum.

Length Specify the height of the frustum. Adams/View uses the length value to specify the z distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a frustum along the positive z-axis of the center marker.

Side Count for Body Specify the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on the side of the frustum. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations Adams/View uses to determine a part’s mass and inertia.

Top Radius Specify the radius at the top of a frustum. The top is perpendicular to the center marker z-axis.

Bottom Radius Specify the radius at the bottom of the frustum. The bottom is perpendicular to the center marker z-axis, and the center of the bottom is at the center marker origin.

Segment Count for Ends Displays the number of segments Adams/View uses to draw the circles at the ends of the frustum.

Select to add any comments about the frustum that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


317E - IGeometry Modify Shape Link

Geometry Modify Shape Link

Right-click a link → Modify

Allows you to precisely control the size, location, and shape of a Link. Learn about the Link Tool.


Link Name Enter the name of the link to modify.

New Link Name If you want, enter a new name for the link.

Comments Add any comments about the link that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

I marker Specify the marker at one end of the link. Adams/View calculates the length of the link as the distance between the I marker and J maker.

J marker The J marker must lie along the I marker's x-axis.

Width Specify the width of the link. The width of the link also controls the radius of the semicircular ends (the radius is equal to one half of the link’s width).

Depth Specify the depth of the link.

Adams/ViewGeometry Modify Shape Plane

318

Geometry Modify Shape Plane

Right-click a plane → Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of planes and change the name of the planes.

Learn about the Plane Tool.


Plane Name Enter the name of the plane to modify.

New Plane Name If you want, enter a new name for the plane.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plane. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the plane that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Ref Marker Name Specify the reference marker used to locate and orient the plane.

X Minimum Specify the location of one corner of the plane in coordinates relative to the reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the lower left corner of the plane. For example, the values of X Minimum = 10 and Y Minimum = 20, place the lower left corner at 10,20 in the reference marker's coordinate system.

X Maximum Specify the location of the opposite corner of the plane in coordinates relative to the reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the upper right corner of the plane.

Y Minimum Specify the location of one corner of the plane in coordinates relative to the reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the lower left corner of the plane. For example, the values of X Minimum = 10 and Y Minimum = 20, place the lower left corner at 10,20 in the reference marker's coordinate system.

Y Maximum Specify the location of the opposite corner of the plane in coordinates relative to the reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the upper right corner of the plane.

319E - IGeometry Modify Shape Plate

Geometry Modify Shape Plate

Right-click a plate → Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of a plate and allows you to rename the plate.

Learn about the Plate Tool.

See an example of Plate.


Plate Name Displays the name of the plate you are modifying.

New Plate Name If you want, enter a unique name for the plate.

Comments Add any comments about the plate that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Marker Name Specify the markers used to define the vertices of the plate. The first marker listed is the anchor point for the plate. It is the first point that you specified when you created the plate.

Width Enter the thickness of the plate measured along the z-axis of the corner marker.

Radius Specify the radius of the corners of the plate.

Note: To change the corner locations of a plate, modify the markers that define the corner locations.

Adams/ViewGeometry Modify Shape Torus

320

Geometry Modify Shape Torus

Right-click a torus → Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of a torus.

Learn about Torus Tool.


Torus Name Displays the name of the torus you are modifying.

New Torus Name If you want, enter a unique name for the torus.

Adams Id Specify an integer to be used to identify this element in the Adams data file.

Comments Add any comments about the torus that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Center Marker Specify the marker at the center of the torus.

Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center marker. The angle starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker and subtends the arc of the torus.

Major Radius Specify the radius of the circular spine of the torus.

Minor Radius Specify the radius of the circular-cross sections of the torus.

Side Count for Perimeter Enter the number of circular cross-sections to create along the spine of the torus. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations Adams/View uses to determine a part’s mass and inertia.

Segment Count Enter the number of sides for each of the circular cross-sections of the torus.

321E - IGraphical Topology

Graphical Topology

Database Navigator → Graphical Topology

Allows you to display a representation of the selected part and shows its connections to other parts. The connections represent the joints or forces between the parts. Each time you select a different part in the tree list of the Database Navigator, the graphical display changes to show the selected part at the center of the display. If the object is inactive, the part appears dimmed.

Below is an example of graphical view topology.

Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.

Adams/ViewGravity

322

Gravity

Settings → Gravity

Build → Forces → Gravity Tool

You can specify the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of gravity. For each part with mass, the gravitational force produces a point force at its center of mass.

When you turn on gravity, an icon appears in the middle of the Adams/View Main window. To turn off the display of the gravity icon, see Displaying View Accessories.

Learn about setting gravity.


Gravity Select to turn on gravity. Clear to turn off gravity.

X Enter the acceleration value in the x direction or select + or - to enter a standard positive or negative value.

Y Enter the acceleration value in the y direction or select + or - to enter a standard positive or negative value.

Z Enter the acceleration value in the z direction or select + or - to enter a standard positive or negative value.

323E - IGroup Attributes

Group Attributes

Build → Group → Attributes

Allows the specification of attributes to be set on a group.

Learn more about group attributes.


Group Name Enter a name of existing group.

Scale of Icons Specifies a unit-less scale factor to apply to the current icon size.

Size of Icons Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View icons will appear in.

Visibility Specifies the visibility of graphic entities.

Name Visibility This parameter provides control over the visibility of the view name displayed at the top center position of a given view.

Transparency Specifies the transparency level for graphic entities.

Lod Specifies the level of details for shells.

Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn in.

Entity Scope This parameter is used to control how a color modification is to affect a particular graphic entity.

Active When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is written to the data set as a comment.

Dependents Active Specifies whether children of the objects are to be acted upon in the same way as the active parameter does.

Line Thickness Specifies the thickness of the line for a curve.

Line Type This parameter allows the selection of the line type for a curve.

Adams/ViewGroup Create

324

Group Create

Build → Group → New ...

Lets you group several objects so that you can work on them as a single object. This is particularly helpful for objects that make up a unit or subsystem of your model, such as a suspension system or a handle of a latch. Once you’ve grouped the objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can perform editing operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their activation and deactivation status during simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)

When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive during a simulation.



Group Name Enter a name for the group of objects or accept the default name.

Comments Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you manage and identify the group. See Comments.

Objects in Group To explicitly specify the objects to be grouped:

• In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects. Separate each name with a comma (,).

You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut menu, Adams/View enters commas between the objects.

To set filters for specifying objects to be grouped:

• In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify the type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only coordinate system markers.

Type Filter If you set a filter in Objects in Group, specify the type of objects to be included in the group. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only coordinate system markers.

Expand Group Do not use. It is only present to provide backward compatibility. We recommend that you not use it.

Expr Active Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter 1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams/View uses the activation status you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands.

325E - IGroup Modify

Group Modify

Build → Group → Modify ...

Lets you modify an exisitng group. A group is particularly helpful for objects that make up a unit or subsystem of your model, such as a suspension system or a handle of a latch. Once you’ve grouped the objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can perform editing operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their activation and deactivation status during simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)

When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive during a simulation.



Group Name Enter a name of existing group.

New Group Name Enter a new name for the group.

Comments Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you manage and identify the group. See Comments.

Objects in Group To explicitly specify the objects to be grouped:

• In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects. Separate each name with a comma (,).

You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut menu, Adams/View enters commas between the objects.

To set filters for specifying objects to be grouped:

• In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify the type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only coordinate system markers.

Type Filter If you set a filter in Objects in Group, specify the type of objects to be included in the group. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only coordinate system markers.

Expand Group Do not use. It is only present to provide backward compatibility. We recommend that you not use it.

Expr Active Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter 1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams/View uses the activation status you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands.

Adams/ViewHole Tool

326

Hole Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Hole Tool

Creates circular holes in solid objects.

As you create a hole, you can specify its radius and depth.

Learn about Creating a Hole or Boss.

Note: You cannot specify the radius and depth of a hole so that it splits the current geometry into two separate geometries.


Radius Enter the radius of the hole.

Depth Enter the depth of the hole.

327E - IHollow Tool

Hollow Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Hollow Tool

Hollows out one or more faces of a solid object to create a shell. As you hollow an object, you can specify the thickness of the remaining shell and the faces to be hollowed. You can also specify that Adams/View add material to the outside of the object. In this case, Adams/View uses the original object as a mold. Adams/View adds material of the specified thickness to the original object and then takes the original object away, leaving a shell.

Example of Hollowed Boxes.

Learn about Hollowing Out a Solid.

Note: You can hollow any object that has a face. You cannot hollow spheres, revolutions, or Construction geometry


Thickness Specify the thickness of the remaining shell after you hollow the object.

Inside Clear if you want to add the shell to the outside of the object.

Adams/ViewHooke/Universal Joint Tool

328

Hooke/Universal Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Hooke/Universal Joint Tool

Creates a hooke/universal joint that allows the rotation of one rigid body to be transferred to the rotation of another rigid body.

This joint is particularly useful when transferring rotational motion around corners, when you need to simulate the non-constant velocity of a physical universal joint, or when transferring rotational motion between two connected shafts that are permitted to bend at the connection point (such as the drive shaft on an automobile).

The location point of the universal joint represents the connection point of the two parts. For a hooke joint, two shaft axes leading to the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted to rotate with respect to each other. Note that Adams/View uses rotational axes that are parallel to the rotational axes you identify but that pass through the location point for the hooke joint. For a universal joint, the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted to rotate with respect to each other.

Learn about:


329E - IHooke/Universal Joint Tool








For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints to Parts.









Adams/ViewHot Point Snapping Increments

330

Hot Point Snapping IncrementsThere is currently no help available for this dialog box. To return to the previous online help, select the browser Back button, or select Show to see the table of contents for the entire help system.

331E - IIcon Settings Dialog Box

Icon Settings Dialog Box

Settings → Icons

Sets up how you want Screen icons displayed for the entire Modeling database or a particular type of object, such as all parts or joints. By default, all objects inherit the screen icon display options that you specify for the modeling database. You can set screen icon options for the following types of objects:

• Curve-curves

• Couplers

• Data elements

• Equations (System elements)

• Forces

• Gears

• Joints

• Markers (Note that markers belong to parts and, therefore, by default, inherit screen icon display options for parts.)Motion

• Parts

• Points

• Point-curves

Learn more about Setting Screen Icon Display.


The next two options apply to the entire modeling database:

New Value Choose one of the following to select whether or not you want to turn on screen icons:

• No Change - Select No Change to not change the current settings.

• On - Turns on all icons regardless of how you set the icon display for individual objects or types of objects.

• Off - Turns off all icons regardless of how you set the icon display for individual objects or types of objects.

New Size Enter the size you want for the screen icons. Note that any changes you make to the size of icons for individual objects or types of objects take precedence over this size setting.

The remaining options apply to a particular type of modeling object:

Specify Attributes for

Select the type of object for which you want to set the screen icon options

Adams/ViewIcon Settings Dialog Box

332

Visibility Select whether or not you want to turn on screen icons for the selected object type. You can select:

• On - Turns on the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.

• Off - Turns off the display of screen icons for the selected type of object. Remember, however, that turning on the display of screen icons for the entire database overrides this setting.

• Inherit - Lets the object type simply inherit the display settings from its parent. For example, a coordinate system marker inherits settings from its parent part.

• No Change - Does not change the current settings. Lets you make changes to other display options without affecting the visibility of the icons.

Size of Icons/Scale of Icons

Enter the size you want for the icons or select the amount by which you want to scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes take precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database.

Color Enter the color you want to use for the icons.

To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select Browse or Create.

Name Visibility Select whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type displayed in the view. Refer to Visibility option above for choices.

Reset Select to reset the screen icon display to the previous values.


333E - IImport - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

File → Import → Adams/Solver Analysis, Adams Graphics, Adams Request, or Adams Results Shared Dialog Box

Imports Adams/Solver analysis files, which are a set of output files that Adams/Solver generates during a single Simulation. The files include:

• Graphics

• Request

• Results

You can import multiple files if you associate and store the files with a model. Adams/View reads and creates all analyses under the specified model. If you do not provide a model name, Adams/View reads each analysis into its own model. For request files, when you specify multiple files, the Request IDs button only displays the requests from the first file listed. The list of IDs will, however, be applied to all files.

If you select to associate the files with a particular simulation, you can only import one set of output files generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation. Adams/View uses the time-date stamp placed at the beginning of each output file to determine if the files were generated by the same simulation run.

If you have very large request files that you want to import, Adams/View lets you read in only a subset of the request file to conserve memory use. You can specify to read in only the request IDs in which you are interested and skip time steps. Note that this is only available when reading in a single request file, not when reading in an entire set of analysis files.

Note: Importing an entire set of analysis files works even if you have only one of the three files included in the analysis set as explained below.

If Adams/View cannot find any of the three files, it issues a message. The most common reasons that Adams/View cannot find one or more of the files are that the path to the files is incorrect or you do not have permission to read the file. You can either:

• Import the files again using the correct path name.

• Move the files into the directory from which you are running Adams/View and check the file permission. Then, import the files again. You do not need to specify the file locations.

Adams/ViewImport - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

334


File Type • To import sets of analysis files, select Adams/Solver Analysis Files.

• To import individual analysis files one at a time, select Graphics, Request, or Results.

Note: When you import only a graphics file, you can select to display the graphics and choose to store the data on your disk drive and not in the Adams Modeling database. Then when Adams/View or Adams/PostProcessor animates the model, it references the data on disk. By saving the data on disk and not in the Adams database you can save substantial amounts of memory, especially if the files are large (containing 20,000 output steps or more). Note that storing the data on disk results in slightly longer animation time.

File(s) to Read Enter the base name of the file or set of files. You do not need to enter their extension.


Model/Analysis Enter either the model or analysis name under which you want to store the analysis files in the modeling database. You can enter multiple files if you select to store them under a model.

View (Adams/PostProcessor only)Enter the viewport in which to display the data.


Display Model After Completion

(Graphics file only)

Select if you want to display the final results of the import.

Keep Results Data On Disk

Select if you want to avoid reading the entire contents of the graphics, request, or results data (XML only) into the database. Adams/View references the data only when needed for animations or xy plotting. Storing the data on disk reduces the memory footprint and improves performance for very large simulations, for example, those containing durability results. Learn more about storing results files in XML format with Results (.res) Options dialog box help.

If you selected to import a request file, the following two options appear:

Request IDs Enter the IDs of the requests in which you are interested and want read into the Adams/View database. Select the More tool to select from a list of all the requests and their IDs in the specified request file.

Time Step Skip Enter whether or not to skip time steps by specifying a pattern of time steps to skip. If you have a large request file with unnecessarily fine time resolution, this can significantly reduce the amount of memory used to store the data. For example, enter 1 to have Adams/View store only the following time steps in the database: 1st, 3rd, 5th, and so on. Enter 2 to store only the 1st, 4th, 7th, and so on.

335E - IImport - Adams/Solver Dataset

Import - Adams/Solver Dataset

File → Import → Adams/Solver Dataset Shared Dialog Box

Imports datasets that you created for Adams/Solver into Adams/View.

When you import an Adams/Solver dataset, Adams/View creates a new Model using the model description defined in the dataset. It makes the model part of the current Modeling database. To display the model, see Displaying Models in the Database.

Note: If Adams/View encounters special characters in the file, such as <CTRL m>, it cancels the operation. Special characters can appear in files that have been transferred between different computer systems (for example, from Windows NT to Linux). If Adams/View cancels the operation, edit the file to remove the special characters and import the file into Adams/View again.


File Type Set it to Adams/Solver Dataset.

File to Read Enter the name of the dataset that you want to import. You do not need to enter the file extension .adm, since Adams/View assumes that this is the file extension.


Model to Create Enter the name of the model you want to create from the dataset.

Set Default Units Set the default units for the model. For more information, see Units Dialog Box.

Display Model Upon Completion Display the final results of the import.

Adams/ViewImport - Adams/Solver Script

336

Import - Adams/Solver Script

File → Import → Adams/Solver Script (*.acf) Shared Dialog Box

Imports an Adams/Solver script file (*.acf) into Adams/View. After importing Adams/View creates a Simulation Script in the database.


File Type Set it to Adams/Solver Script.

File to Read Enter the name of the solver script file that you want to import. You do not need to enter the file extension .acf, since Adams/View assumes that this is the file extension.


Simulation Script Name A new or an existing Simulation Script. If an existing script is specified, then the import operation will modify the script with the commands from the specified file.

337E - IImport - Adams/View Command Files

Import - Adams/View Command Files

File → Import → Command Files Shared Dialog Box

Imports a command file into Adams/View so that Adams/View executes the commands stored in the command file.

Learn about:

• Sources of Command Files

• Command File Format

• Ensuring Upward Compatibility of Command Files

• Reading Command Files

Tip: You can also use Tools → Read Command File to import a command file, and set the options using Settings → Command File.


File Type Set it to Adams/View Command File.

File to Read Enter the name of the command file that you want to import. You do not need to enter the file extension .cmd since Adams/View assumes that it is the file extension.


Echo Commands Select to display the commands that Adams/View executes as it imports the file.

Update Screen Display the results of the commands in the main window. If you do not select Update Screen, Adams/View displays the results when it finishes reading the command file.

Display Model Upon Completion Display the final results of the import.

On Error Set what Adams/View does when it encounters an error.

Adams/ViewImport - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA

338

Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA

File → Import → STEP, IGES, or DXF or DWG

When you import CAD geometry, Adams reads the CAD file and converts the geometry into a set of Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.

Be sure that the model into which you want to import the geometry is currently open and displayed in Adams. You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with which to associate it.

339E - IImport - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA


File Type Set it to the type of geometry that you want to import.

File to Read Enter the name of the file that you want to import.


Part Name Enter the name of the part with which you want to associate the imported geometry.


Model Name Enter the name of the model with which you want to import the geometry. If the input data is an assembly, then individual parts in the assembly will be translated as separate parts under the Adams model.

Level Enter the level or levels to be translated in the CAD file for IGES, DXF, and DWG files. Levels let you associate geometry into a group. These groups can be manipulated as a single entity for purposes of visibility and color. The CAD program that generated the CAD file defines the levels and are labeled with integers greater than or equal to 0. Levels are typically used to organize data for viewing and are similar to layers. If you do not specify the levels you want translated, Adams/Exchange reads all levels.

You can specify a single level or a range of levels. Separate the range with a comma (,). For example, enter 10, 15 to translate levels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.

Scale Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in Adams/Exchange. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in Adams/Exchange will be the same size as the geometry in the CAD file. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the geometry.

For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of length 2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25 meters. Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not effected by scale value.

Adams/ViewImport - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA

340

Blanked Entities Select to translate entities that are blanked (made not visible). Adams/Exchange translates the blanked entities and makes them invisible. If you do not select Blanked Entities, Adams does not translate the blanked entities.

Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation of another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line rotated about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities used in the construction of the cylinder.

Once you translate blanked entities to Adams, there is no distinction between construction entities and other geometry. You can change the visibility of the entities.

Location Specify the translational position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be located, relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.

By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate System.

Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the parameter will simply be ignored.

Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.

Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn about Setting Default Coordinate System.


Relative To Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be defined. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate system, part, or model.



341E - IImport - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA

Consolidate To Shells

Set to import all the geometry as one shell. If you do not select Consolidate To Shells, Adams imports the geometry as individual entities. We recommend that you select Consolidate To Shells to receive the best animation results.


Display Summary

Select to write a verbose log file to the disk. A message will be displayed indicating the log file to which the translation operation details have been written.

Translation Options

Click on this button to invoke the Manage Geometry Translation Options dialog box for the relevant geometry and translation operation (read or write). The dialog box would be pre-filled with the option name, short description of what the option is for and the default value.

Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The translation options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.


Note: The translation via 'Adams CAD Translators' is applicable for STEP and IGES only if MSC_GEOM_TRANSLATE_INTEROP is set to an integral value of 1.

Adams/ViewImport - DAC or RPC III

342

Import - DAC or RPC III

File → Import → DAC/RPC III Shared Dialog Box

You can import test data in DAC or RPC III format. The steps involved in importing the data are essentially the same for both formats; however, it is important to remember that RPC III format supports multiple channels per file while DAC format only has one channel per file.

Adams/View creates a DAC_FILE or RPC_FILE object below Root in the database after you successfully import these files. It only stores information about the imported file from the file header. It does not store time history data in the database. Adams/View also creates Result_Set_Component placeholders below the file object for each RPC III data channel or DAC file.


File Type Set it to DAC or RPC3.

File to Read Enter the name of the file or files that you want to import. With DAC files, you may want to select multiple files because each file has only one result set. You can use Shift+click or Ctrl+click multiple selection techniques.


RPC Object Name/DAC Object Name

Enter the RPC or DAC objects that you want to import.

343E - IImport - Parasolid

Import - Parasolid

File → Import → Parasolid Shared Dialog Box

Imports Parasolid geometry. Requires Adams/Exchange.

When you import Parasolid geometry, Adams/Exchange reads the file and converts the geometry into a set of Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.



File Type Set to Parasolid.



File Type Select the type of Parasolid file that you are importing.

Model Name/Part Name Select whether or not you want to store the geometry under a model or part name in the Modeling database and enter the name of the object in the text box.


Adams/ViewImport - Shell

344

Import - Shell

File → Import →Shell Shared Dialog Box

Imports shell geometry to enhance animations.

Note: In Adams/PostProcessor, you can specify whether or not you want Adams/PostProcessor to import triangular geometry into trimesh strips when you import CAD geometry. Trimesh strips display significantly faster than individual polygons, resulting in faster animations. Adams/PostProcessor automatically imports shell files (.shl , .slp, and .stl) as trimesh strips. For more information, see PPT Preferences - Geometry.


File Name Enter the name of the file that you want to import.


Shell Name Enter the name with which you want to associate the imported shell geometry.

Reference Marker Enter the name of the marker to which the shell is paired. During animations, the shell geometry moves with the marker.


Wireframe Only Set to import the shell geometry as wireframe.

345E - IImport - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG

Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG

File → Import → STEP, IGES, or DXF or DWG Shared Dialog Box

When you import CAD geometry, Adams/Exchange reads the CAD file and converts the geometry into a set of Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.



File Type Set it to the type of geometry that you want to import.



Part Name Enter the name of the part with which you want to associate the imported geometry. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tolerance Enter the tolerance for the geometry. The tolerance value is the measure of the midpoint chordal distance from the approximated curve/surface to the true curve/surface:

Schematic of the Tolerance Value

Be careful when specifying the tolerance. You should have advanced knowledge of the units and size of the geometry in the CAD file before setting the tolerance. If you do not know the size of the geometry in the file, Adams/Exchange may translate the geometry so it is too coarse, or too fine. A tolerance that is too fine can potentially cause Adams/Exchange to use excessive computing power and memory.

The tolerance reported in the log file is the tolerance of the data defined in the CAD file. This is the maximum tolerance available in the CAD file and is usually too fine for efficient translation to Adams/View. We recommend, therefore, that you try a tolerance several orders of magnitude greater then the tolerance specified in the CAD file.

Adams/ViewImport - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG

346

Level Enter the level or levels to be translated in the CAD file for IGES, DXF, and DWG files. Levels let you associate geometry into a group. These groups can be manipulated as a single entity for purposes of visibility and color. The CAD program that generated the CAD file defines the levels and are labeled with integers greater than or equal to 0. Levels are typically used to organize data for viewing and are similar to layers. If you do not specify the levels you want translated, Adams/Exchange reads all levels.

You can specify a single level or a range of levels. Separate the range with a comma (,). For example, enter 10, 15 to translate levels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.

Scale Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in Adams/Exchange. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in Adams/Exchange will be the same size as the geometry in the CAD file. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the geometry.

For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams/Exchange translates a cylinder of length 2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25 meters. Adams/Exchange also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not effected by scale value.

Create Select either:

• Polygons to represent surfaces as polygons. Selecting Polygons allows for the quickest animations and rendering.

• Solids to represent surfaces as solid representations. Selecting Solids allows for the greatest precision and mass property calculations.

Blanked Entities Select to translate entities that are blanked (made not visible). Adams/Exchange translates the blanked entities and makes them invisible. If you do not select Blanked Entities, Adams/Exchange does not translate the blanked entities.

Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation of another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line rotated about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities used in the construction of the cylinder.

Once you translate blanked entities to Adams, there is no distinction between construction entities and other geometry. You can change the visibility of the entities.


347E - IImport - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG

Location Specify the translational position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be located, relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.


Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.

Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate System.

Relative To Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be defined. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate system, part, or model.

Mesh Density Enter the density of the mesh in uv coordinates.

Consolidate To Shells

Set to import all the geometry as one shell. If you do not select Consolidate To Shells, Adams/Exchange imports the geometry as individual entities. We recommend that you select Consolidate To Shells to receive the best animation results.

Display Summary

Select to display a summary of the exporting in a message window.


Adams/ViewImport - Stereolithography and Render Files

348

Import - Stereolithography and Render Files

File → Import → Stereolithography, Render Shared Dialog Box

You can import both Stereolithography (SLA) and render geometry into Adams. As you import the SLA and render geometry, you associate the geometry with an existing part or you create a new part with which to associate it.

Importing your geometry as SLA or render geometry is more reliable than using other CAD formats, such as IGES or STEP, and the file formats are very simple. There are, however, the following disadvantages:

• The files are much larger than IGES and DXF files.

• Because the surfaces have been represented as polygons, you cannot change the accuracy of the surface representations in Adams/View. You must specify the accuracy when you create the files in your CAD program.

Note: Only ASCII .stl files (Stereolithography) are supported. Binary .stl files are not currently supported.


File Type Set it to Stereolithography or Render.



Part Name Enter the name of the part with which you want to associate the imported geometry. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Scale Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in Adams. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in Adams will be the same size as the geometry in the SLA or render file. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of the geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the geometry.

For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of length 2 meters and diameter .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25 meters. Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the imported file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not affected by scale value.

349E - IImport - Stereolithography and Render Files

Location Specify the translational position where the geometry in the file is to be located relative to the Adams/View part coordinate system. These coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.


Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the file is to be oriented relative to the Adams/View part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.

Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn about Setting Default Coordinate System.

Relative To Enter the coordinate system to which the translated geometry will be defined relative to. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate system, part, or model.


Adams/ViewImport - Test Data

350

Import - Test Data

File → Import → Test Data Shared Dialog Box

You can import test data, such as the results of hardware prototype testing, calculations, or Simulations performed by other software or earlier sessions. When you import test data, you can compare it with Adams simulation results or use the data in the definition of your model. For example, you might want to import the results from physical tests of a mechanical system and compare them to the results of simulations in Adams of the same mechanical system to evaluate the accuracy of a model or to help you improve your model.

Learn about Test Data Format.


File Type Set it to Test Data.

File to Read Enter the name of the file that you want to import. Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Create Splines/Create Measures

Select whether you want to import the data as splines or as measures.

Time Column Index For measures only, specify which column in the data file contains the x-axis data. Enter the column number. Adams uses all other columns as the y-axis data.

Independent Column Index For splines only, enter the column number to specify which column in the file to use for the independent data (X parameter) in the Adams spline. The columns are numbered sequentially from left to right starting with 1, 2, 3, and so on.

If you specify an independent data index for splines, Adams does not create a spline for the column of the file with that index. Instead, that column of data is used as the x data for all splines. If you do not include an independent column index, then the series of numbers 1, 2, 3, and so on is used for the x data of all splines.

351E - IImport - Test Data

Units Specify the unit category to be applied to the dependent data for the spline. You can provide a unit category for each dependent column in the file.

Once Adams assigns the units to the spline, it performs automatic unit conversions based on the current default units specified (Settings → Units). For example, if you import test data and assign the unit category of length, and then you change the length unit from millimeter to meter, Adams/View automatically converts the test data by 0.001.

Note that you should take care to ensure the current units in Adams are set to the appropriate units for the data in the file before importing the file. If the Adams default units are millimeter, and you are importing data in inches, the data in the file will be interpreted as millimeters.

The units field is optional. If you omit it, Adams assigns no_units to the imported data, and performs no automatic unit conversion.

Model Name/Analysis Name

Specify the name of the model or, for measures, the name of the analysis in which you want to store the data. Select:

• Model Name and then enter the name of the model in the text box next next to the pull-down menu.

• Analysis Name and then enter the name of the simulation in the text box next to the pull-down menu. You can only store measures under simulation results. (Not available if you are importing the data as a spline.)


Names in File Specify how to define the names of the splines or measures

• If there are textual column headers in the file, select Names in File. Adams uses the column header text as the names of each spline.

• If there are no textual column headers, do not select Names in File. Adams automatically generates names for the splines (for example, SPLINE_1, SPLINE_2, and so on).


Adams/ViewImport - Wavefront Files

352

Import - Wavefront Files

File → Import → Wavefront Shared Dialog Box

Lets you import Wavefront geometry (.obj) files to define polygon vertices and connectivity for all Adams graphics, except deformable geometry (springdampers, force/torque vectors, and multi-part outlines). When you import a Wavefront .obj file, Adams only interprets vertex, face, and group information. It ignores smoothing groups, textures, and material properties.

You can associate the imported geometry with an entire model, single part, or marker. Each option is explained below:

• Entire model - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with an entire model, Adams creates a new part for each unique group name in the .obj file.

• Single part - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with a single Adams part, Adams creates a separate shell graphic object for each occurrence of a group in the .obj file.

• Marker - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with a marker, Adams creates a separate shell graphic object for each occurrence of a group in the .obj file. These shells become the children of the part to which the marker belongs. The selected marker is the reference marker for the shells.

Learn about Export - Wavefront.


File Type Set to Wavefront.

File to Read Enter the name of the Wavefront .obj file that you want to import.


353E - IImport - Wavefront Files

Part Name/Model Name

Set to whether you want to associate the geometry with a part or a model, and then enter the name of the part or model in the text box located next to the pull-down menu:

• Model Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a model, Adams/View creates a new part for each unique group name that appears in the file. If the same group name appears more than once, Adams/View adds a separate shell geometric entity to the part with the same name as the group. It assigns names to the shell using the convention SHLx, where x is a unique integer.

• Part Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a single part, Adams/View creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It assigns names to the shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a unique integer.

• Marker Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a marker, Adams/View creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It assigns names to the shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a unique integer.

The parts Adams/View creates are massless and editing their properties and then attaching them to your model could be cumbersome. Therefore, we suggest you use the Part Name option. See also Tips on Importing Wavefront Files.


Scale Factor Enter the amount you want to scale the geometry in the Wavefront .obj file. Adams/View scales the geometry uniformly in the x, y, and z directions.

Geometry Placed Set to define whether the coordinates in the Wavefront file are to be interpreted as relative to the part (relative_to_part) or relative to ground (relative_to_ground). By default, Adams/View writes Wavefront files with the coordinates relative to the part.

Set Read Only Set if you want all shells that are created as a result of importing a WaveFront file to be tagged as read only. If you select read-only, Adams/View does not export the read-only shells, which protects your shell files from being overwritten. You cannot remove the read-only setting once Adams/View creates the shells.


Adams/ViewImpose Motion(s)

354

Impose Motion(s)

Right-click general motion → Modify

Lets you modify a general Point Motion. It displays a set of options for each of the motion's six Degrees of freedom (DOF). It displays a pull-down menu next to a DOF if it is free and can have motion applied to it, and displays the label fixed if the DOF is constrained and cannot move.

Learn more:

• About Motion

• Modifying General Point Motion


Name Enter the name of the point motion to modify.

Moving Point Change the marker that defines the location of the motion on the parts. Learn About Point Motion. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Reference Point Change the marker that defines the orientation of the motion on the parts.

Type Enter how you want to define the motion.

F(time) Enter the following in the F(time) text boxes. The text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.

• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in radians.)

• Function expression

• Parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine

To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the More tool to display the Function Builder.

Disp. IC and Velo. IC Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.

355E - IInformation

Information

Database Navigator → Information

Allows you to view information about the selected object. This lists the database fields for the selected object.

Learn Viewing Object Information Through Database Navigator.

The option: Does the following:

Select to go back to the previous object.

Save to File Select to save the information to a file.

Adams/ViewInformation Window

356

Information Window

Tools → Model Topology Map/Model Verify or Right-click on a part → Info

Adams/View uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your model, simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can perform a variety of operations in the Information window.

The information includes:

• Topology on the different objects in your model

• Object information, such as information about a part or a view

• Model verification results

• Measurements from one coordinate system marker to another

• Result set component information

• View attributes

• Results from a system command you run using the Tools → System Command

Learn more about:

• Information Window

• Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window

• Verifying Your Model


Apply Executes the command but leaves the dialog box open so you can execute the command again.

Parent Displays an object's parent.

Children Displays an object's children.

Modify Select to display the modify dialog box for the object displayed in the text box at the top of the Information window.

Verbose Select if you want to display more information about the object such as children of the object, its geometry, whether or not commands are associated with it, and its attributes like color and visibility.

Clear Removes all current information in the window.

Read from File Allows you to read information from a saved file.

Save to File Allows you to save the information.

357E - IInitial Conditions Tool

Initial Conditions Tool

Interactive Simulation dialog box → Initial Conditions tool

Performs an initial conditions simulation to check for any inconsistencies in your model. An initial conditions simulation tries to reconcile any positioning inconsistencies that exist in your model at its design configuration and make it suitable for performing a nonlinear or linear simulation. Most importantly, the initial conditions simulation tries to ensure that all joint connections are defined properly.

For example, for a revolute joint to be defined properly, the origins of the Markers that define the joint must be coincident throughout a simulation. If the markers are not coincident, the joint is broken and needs to be repaired. In this example, the initial conditions simulation helps repair the broken revolute joint by moving the origins of the two markers until they are coincident

You can also use the initial conditions simulation if you are creating parts in exploded view. Exploded view is simply creating the individual parts separately and then assembling them together into a model. You might find this convenient if you have several complicated parts that you want to create individually without seeing how they work together until much later. Adams/View provides options for specifying that you are creating your model in exploded view as you create constraints.

After selecting the Initial Conditions tool, Adams/View tells you when it has assembled your model properly. You can revert back to your original design configuration or you can save your assembled model as the new design configuration for your model.

Learn about Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.

Adams/ViewInline Joint Tool

358

Inline Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Inline Joint Tool

Constrains one part so that it can only move along a straight line defined on a second part as shown below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.

The location of the inline joint on the first part must remain on the z-axis of the second part.

Learn about Creating Joint Primitives.










Normal to Grid/

Pick Geometry Feature




359E - IInplane Joint Tool

Inplane Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Inplane Joint Tool

Constrains one part so that it can only move in a plane of a second part as shown below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.

The origin of the inplane joint on the first part must remain in the xy plane of the second part.

Adams/ViewInplane Joint Tool

360

Learn about Creating Joint Primitives.










Normal to Grid/





361E - IInput-Signal Function Block

Input-Signal Function Block


Input function blocks are needed wherever a control or filter block does not receive its input from another control or filter block. This includes external time functions that need to be passed into a block, as well as measures of your model that represent error signals to pass into a block.

An input function block takes any valid Adams/Solver (run-time) expression as its input. The input function block is a valid controls block to reference as the input to any other controls block.



Function Enter the function expression that defines the function block. Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.





Adams/ViewIntegrator Block

362

Integrator Block


Integrator filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.





Initial Condition Specify the initial conditions.




363E - IInteractive Simulation Palette and Container

Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

Simulate → Interactive

Main toolbox → Click

Display tools for controlling Simulation. The dialog box contains a complete set of simulation controls, while the Simulation container contains only a subset of the most commonly used simulation controls.

Learn about:

• Simulation Basics

• Types of Simulations

Simulation ContainerSimulation Controls Palette

(from Simulate Menu)

Adams/ViewInteractive Simulation Palette and Container

364

• Performing an Interactive Simulation

• About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

• Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes

Icon Description

Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.

You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to continue simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation and continue.

Shortcut: Double-click the Select tool.

Stops any further processing, and the modeling objects appear in the positions that Adams/Solver last successfully calculated.

Starts the Simulation.

Replays an Animation of the last Simulation. Replaying an animation displays the results much faster than if you simulate the model again and watch the frames update as the solution calculates results. You can also replay an animation of a saved simulation; for more information, see Animation Controls.

How Adams/View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you have finished the simulation and reset the model back to its initial design configuration.

• If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the animation, Adams/View animates the model up to the last simulation step and leaves your model there.

• If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the animation, Adams/View automatically sets the model back to the initial design configuration when the animation is complete.

Model Verify Tool


Sim. Type Sets the type of Simulation:

• Default

• Dynamic simulation

• Kinematic simulation

• Static equilibrium

End Time/Duration/Forever

Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how you want it defined. You can select:



• Forever - Adams/View continues simulating until you stop the simulation or until it can no longer solve the equations of motion to within your specified tolerance. This option is only available on the Simulation Control dialog box.




Static Equilibrium Tool

No Debug/Eprint/Table Select either:

• No Debug - Display no debugging information.

• Eprint

• Table

More button Displays the full Interactive Simulation dialog box.

Render See Rendering mode.

Icon Description

Adams/ViewInteractive Simulation Palette and Container

366

Icons By default, Adams/View turns off all Screen icons during animations to speed up the animation.

To turn on and off icons:

• On the Main toolbox, select the Icons button.

• On the Animation Controls dialog box, select Icons.

Shortcut: Type a lowercase v.

Start at equilibrium Select to have Adams/View perform a static simulation before performing a dynamic simulation.

Reset before running Sets your model back to its initial design configuration before you run the Simulation.

Initial Conditions Tool

Allows the user to grab a part and drag it while the C++ Solver honors all of the model's constraints. Useful for quickly verifying a model's behavior.

Displays the Compute Linear Modes dialog box.

Displays the Perform Vibration Analysis dialog box. Only available when you have Adams/Vibration. For more information, see the Adams/Vibration help.

See Linear Modes.

Displays the Compute and Export Linear States dialog box letting you generate a state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system.

Displays the Adams2Nastran dialog box allowing the export of a linearized NASTRAN model from Adams.

Update Graphics Display Clear the selection to never have your model updated during the simulation. Select this when you are sure that your simulation will run to completion without difficulty, and you want to maximize the efficiency of the simulation.

Learn about setting more options for simulation display with Solver Settings - Display dialog box help.

Interactive/Scripted Displays tools for controlling either an interactive or Scripted simulation.

Icon Description

../../adams_vibration/master.htm

../../adams_vibration/master.htm


Save/Delete Simulation Results

• Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can save the simulation results.

• Right-click to select a set of simulation results to delete.

Save Simulated Position

Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name.

Displays the Animation Controls dialog box.

Displays the Linear Modes Controls dialog box.

Displays Adams/PostProcessor.

Simulation Settings... Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the Simulation performed.

Icon Description

Adams/ViewIntersect Tool

368

Intersect Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Intersect Tool

Creates a single part that is made up of only the intersecting geometries of two solids. It merges the second part that you select with the geometry of the first part that you select and forms one rigid body from the two geometries.

Learn about Creating One Part from the Intersection of Two Solids.

369J - OIntersect Tool

J - O

Adams/ViewJoint Initial Conditions

370

Joint Initial Conditions

Modify Joint dialog box → Initial Conditions

Sets initial conditions for revolute, translational, and cylindrical joints, including translational and rotational displacement and velocity. If you specify initial conditions, Adams/View uses them as the initial displacement velocity of the part during an Initial conditions simulation regardless of any other forces acting on the part.

Some options in the dialog box are not available (ghosted) depending on the type of joint for which you are setting initial conditions.

Learn more about initial conditions for joints.



Joint Name Enter the name of the joint to modify.

Trans. Displ. Set the translational displacement.

Trans. Velo. Set the translational velocity.

Rot. Displ. Set the rotational displacement.

Rot. Velo. Set the rotational velocity.

Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint varies by anywhere from 5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the joint, Adams/Solver issues a warning message and continues execution. If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams/View issues an error message and stops execution.

371J - OJoint Motion

Joint Motion

Right-click joint motion → Modify

Lets you modify a Joint motion.

Learn more:

• Modifying Joint Motion

• Tips on Creating Motions

• Defining the Motion Magnitude

• DOF Removed by Motion


Name Enter the name of the joint motion to modify.

Joint Change the joint to which the motion is applied. The Joint Type text box automatically updates to the selected type of joint.


Joint Type Displays the type of joint motion. For information only.

Direction Set to the desired motion direction (rotational or translational). You can select only translational motion for a translational or cylindrical joint. You can select only rotational motion for a revolute or cylindrical joint.

Define Using Enter how you want to define the motion. Select Function to define using a numerical value or Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.

Function If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the Function (time) text box that appears:



To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the More button

to display the Function Builder.

Tip: Use the DTOR or RTOD functions to specify rotation in degrees.

Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed to the MOTSUB user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is optional.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine MOTSUB. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.

Adams/ViewJoint Motion

372

Type Set to Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration to specify how motion magnitude is defined.

Displacement IC and Velocity IC

Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.


373J - OJoint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

Build → Joints

Main toolbox → Right-click Joints and Motion tool stacks

Displays tools for creating joints. The palette contains the entire library of joints while the tool stacks on the Main toolbox contain only subsets of the most commonly used joints.

Learn about Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes. Also learn about:

• Types of Motion

Adams/ViewJoint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

374

• Overview of Constraints

375J - OJoint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

Joint Toolstack Motion ToolstackCreate Joints Palette (from Build

Menu)

Adams/ViewJoint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

376

Icon Link Icon Link

Revolute Joint Tool Planar Joint Tool

Hooke/Universal Joint Tool Gear Joint Tool

Fixed Joint Tool Rotational Motion Tool

Translational Joint Tool Single Point Motion Tool

Constant-Velocity Joint Tool Translational Motion Tool

Point-Curve Constraint Tool General Point Motion Tool

Cylindrical Joint Tool Parallel Axes Joint Tool

Coupler Joint Tool Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool Orientation Joint Tool

Spherical Joint Tool Inplane Joint Tool

Screw Joint Tool Inline Joint Tool




377J - OLead-Lag Filter Block

Lead-Lag Filter Block


Lead-lag filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.

Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.




Low Pass Constant

Specify the low pass constant.

The lead-lag filter is represented as: T(s) = s+ b/s+a

Lead constant Specify the value of b above.

Lag constant Specify the value of a above.




Adams/ViewLighting Settings

378

Lighting Settings

Settings → Lighting Settings

Helps you enhance the quality and realism of your animations.

Click a tool below for more information.

Learn more about Setting Up Lighting.

Icon Description

Intensity Slide to set how bright the overall light is.

Ambient Slide to set the ambient light.

Angle Slide to set how far from the center line the light source is. May not be appropriate for all light sources, such as front.

Reflections Toggle to set up reflections off of parts. See Reflections Example.

Two-Sided Turn on to have lighting come from two sides.

Turns on and off the light

379J - OLighting Settings

Set from upper left corner.

Set from top

Icon Description


380

Set from upper right corner

Set from left side

Icon Description

381J - OLighting Settings

Set from right side

Set from lower right corner

Icon Description


382

Set from bottom

Set from lower left corner

Icon Description

383J - OLinear Modes Controls

Linear Modes Controls

Review → Linear Modes Controls

Allows you to view your model oscillating at one of its natural frequencies. It cycles through the model deformation starting from the operating point of the requested natural frequency of the eigensolution. You can also see the effect of the damping on the model and display a table and plot of modes and frequencies.

Learn about Animating Natural Frequencies.


Eigen Enter the name of an eigensolution in an existing analysis. The eigensolution must be in an existing analysis that is associated with the current model.

View Enter the name(s) of view(s) in which to display.

Mode Number/Frequency Select the mode to be used to calculate the deformation of the model. Set to either:

• Mode - Enter the number of the mode to be used

• Frequency - Enter the frequency of the mode

Displays the next mode.

Select to animate the model.

Displays the previous mode.

Frames Per Cycle Enter the number of frames to be displayed for each cycle.

Adams/View performs the interpolation between the frames using trigonometric functions; therefore, the frames tend to be segregated at the maximum deformation in the positive and negative directions.

Number of Cycles Enter the parameter used to specify the number of complete cycles to animate.

Show time decay Select if you want the amplitudes of the deformations to remain constant or decay due to the damping factor calculated in the eigensolution.

Adams/ViewLinear Modes Controls

384

Show trail Select if you want to show the path, or trail, of parts from one frame to another.

Showing the trail is useful in showing the relationship of the model parts between frames but often obscures the view of the motion.

Show undeformed Select if you want the undeformed model to be displayed with the deformed shape superimposed on top of it.

If you select Show undeformed, select a color for the underformed model. If you do not specify a color, Adams/View displays the undeformed model using the same color as the deformed mode.

Show icons Select to turn on the display icons during an animation.

Undef. Color Specify the color for undeformed shape or use original colors.

Max. Translation Enter a value to scale mode shape so that translations are smaller than it.

Max. Rotation Enter a value to scale mode shape so that rotations are smaller than it.

Table Select to display eigenvalues in a tabular form.

Plot Select to plot complex eigenvalue scatter.

Select to switch to Simulation Controls.


385J - OLinear Modes Eigenvalue Plot

Linear Modes Eigenvalue Plot

Review → Linear Modes Controls → Plot

Displays the plot of eigenvalues and allows you to save or delete the plot.

Learn about Animating Natural Frequencies.


Delete Plot Select if you want to delete the plot.

Save Plot Select if you want to save the plot.

Name Only available if you selected Save Plot. Enter a name for the plot you want to save.

Adams/ViewLink Tool

386

Link Tool

Buid → Bodies/Geometry → Link Tool

Creates a link by drawing a line indicating the link’s length. By default, the Link tool creates the link with a width that is 10% of the indicated length and a depth that is 5% of the length. The radius of the ends of the link is equal to half the width. Before drawing, you can also define the length, width, and depth of the link.

Learn about Creating a Link.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the link to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the link to ground.


Length If desired, select and enter the length for the link.

Width If desired, select and enter the width for the link.

Depth If desired, select and enter the depth for the link.

Note: Two hotpoints appear after you draw the link: one hotpoint lets you modify the length of the link and the other hotpoint lets you modify the depth, width, and height. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

387J - OLocation Table

Location Table

Polyline, Spline, Extrusion, Revolution Modify dialog box → More button

Lets you view the points in polylines, splines, extrusions, and revolutions and edit them. You can also save the location information to a file or read in location information from a file.

Learn more:

• Displaying the Location Table

• Working in the Location Table

• Reading and Writing Location Information

For general information on using tables in Adams/View, see Using Tables to Enter Values.

Adams/ViewLocationEvent

388

LocationEventWhen Adams/View asks you for a location, right-click

Lets you enter location coordinates to precisely set the location of an object, such as a design point or a force. You can enter the location relative to the origin of the Working grid, the global coordinate system, or any other object on the screen.

Learn about:

• Entering Precise Location Coordinates

• Selecting Objects from a Crowd


Upper box (no title) Enter the coordinates at which to place the object. By default, displays the current coordinates of the cursor.

Pull-down menu Select the element (working grid, global coordinate system, or modeling object) to which the coordinates are relative. By default, the coordinates are relative to the working grid.

Lower box (no title) In the lower box, enter the object to which the coordinates are relative. You only need to enter an object if you selected that the coordinates are relative to an object.


389J - OLow-Pass Filter Block

Low-Pass Filter Block


Low-pass filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parametrize this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.





Low Pass Constant

Specify the low pass constant.




Adams/ViewMDI Insight Build

390

MDI Insight Build

Command Navigator → MDI → Insight → Build

This command enables you to write all the investigation .adm and .acf files out to disk. This can be helpful if you do not want to run all the simulations in one Adams/View session or if you want to distribute the jobs to multiple CPUs. This command temporarily sets solver preferences to write_files_only and creates the simulation and command files. You can subsequently use the primary driver .acf file (<prefix>_bat.acf) to run all the simulations. When all the jobs have completed successfully, you use the commands MDI INSIGHT LOAD to load the results back into the Adams/Insight experiment file with the use of <prefix>_bat.cmd.

If you use the <prefix>_bat.acf file to launch all the simulations, note the following:

• Be sure your SENSOR statements do not have the HALT qualifier.

• If one job fails, the process will need to be restarted manually.

• Instead of the <prefix>_bat.acf you can create a script to run the jobs.

• Set nosep.

Once the analysis files have been written, it is important to check a few of the files to verify that the factors are actually being altered the way you expect them to. Using a text file differencing tool is a convenient way to accomplish this task.

To run the simulations external to Adams/View, make sure you select the appropriate simulation script type and that you're saving the appropriate OUTPUT files. It is recommended that you perform a Perimeter Study exercising each aspect of this process before running the longer set of simulations.

Once the simulations have completed, be sure to review the simulations results by checking .req and .msg file sizes. Also, perform a grep for ERROR in the .msg files.

After the simulation results have been completed and read back into Adams/Insight, make sure you review the contents of the response columns in the WorkSpace matrix.



Experiment Enter the name of a previously-defined experiment. This experiment will be referenced to build all the .adm and .acf files required to complete the investigation defined in the experiment.

Ain Prefix Enter the prefix that will be added to the beginning of all the files generated during the build process, and then subsequently during the simulations.

391J - OMacro Editor

Macro Editor

Tools → Macro → Edit → New

Edits Macros that you recorded or that you created by reading in a macro file. You can also use the Macro Editor to create a macro.

Learn about Automating Your Work Using Macros.

Note: If you select Modify from this menu, the Database Navigator appears. From the Database Navigator, select a macro to modify.


Macro Name Enter the name of the macro.

User-Entered Command Enter the command string that executes the macro. To use the name of the macro, select Use Macro Name.

Wrap in Undo Specify if the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note that a single undo command can consume a great deal of memory for very large macros, or slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not actually use the Undo.

Commands Enter the commands the macro is to execute.

Adams/ViewMacro Read

392

Macro Read

Tools → Macro → Read

Allows you to read in an existing command file containing the commands to be executed as a macro. You can also assign a help file or text string to the macro that explains the macro's use.



Macro Name Enter the name of the macro that Adams/View uses to save the macro in the Modeling database.

File Name Enter the name of the file containing the commands to be executed.

User Entered Command Specify the command string that executes the macro. The command string defaults to the name of the macro if you do not enter a command sting.

Note: The command string you enter must be unique. You cannot redefine an existing command, although you can add a new keyword at any level to an existing command.

Wrap in Undo Specify if the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note that a single Undo, while convenient, can consume a great deal of memory for very large macros or slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not actually use the Undo.

Create Panel Select Yes if you want to create a dialog box, or select no if you do not want to create a dialog box.

393J - OMacro Write

Macro Write

Tools → Macro → Write

Saves the macro to a command file. Saving the macro to a command file lets you give the macro to another user, and also helps you modify long macros when you do not have the original file.

If you used non-default values for the other macro data, such as the help string, the command file includes comments with those values.


Note: Adams/View saves all macros in the current Modeling database when you save the database.


Macro Name Enter the name of the macro to save to a file.

File Name Enter the file name in which to save the macro, and then select OK.

Adams/ViewMain Toolbox

394

Main ToolboxDisplays commonly used tools for creating, editing, and selecting modeling elements, as well as simulating the model and undoing operations. The tools are shortcuts to using the menus in the menu bar. In addition, many of the tools are Tool stacks. Right-click a tool to display its tool stack.

395J - OMain Toolbox

Icon Description

Select Tool

Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack

Measure Toolstack

Undoing and Redoing Operations

Joint Toolstack

Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

Object Color Tool Stack

Motion Toolstack

Animation Controls

Move Toolstack

Forces Tool Stack

Displays Adams/PostProcessor

See Fitting a Model in a Window

See Defining a Zoom Area

See Setting the Center of a View Window

Adams/ViewMain Toolbox

396

Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack

Translate Tool Stack

See Dynamically Zooming the Display

Increment Entering a value lets you more precisely control the view display changes, such as zooming and rotations.

View Orientation Tools

See Orienting the View Using an Object XY

See Orienting the View Using Three Points

Background Color Tool Stack

Toggle Tool Stack

Window Layout

Grid See Working grid

Depth See Setting the View Perspective

Render See Rendering mode

Icons Toggles the display of icons.

Icon Description

397J - OMarker Modify

Marker Modify

Right-click a marker → Modify

Allows you to precisely control the location and orientation of your marker. The options available depend on whether or not the marker is attached to a part, ground, or curve or a node on a flexible body. Select a topic below:

• Marker on Part, Ground, or Curve

• Marker Attached to Node on Flexible Body or an external system (when an MNF/MD DB is specified)

Marker on Part, Ground, or Curve

When you modify a marker on a part or ground, you can define its location and orientation more precisely than when you created it.

If you are using Adams/Solver (C++), you can define a curve along which the marker will move (splines and data-element curves are all considered curves) and be oriented. You can then use the marker to define constraints. For example, you could use it to define the position and orientation of a joint or joint primitive. This requires two markers, one in each part that the joint or joint primitive connects. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.


Name Enter the name of the marker you are modifying.

Location Enter x, y, z coordinate defining the marker's location in a given reference frame.

Location Relative To You can:

• Enter the marker in which you specify the location coordinates.


Curve Enter the curve along which the marker will move. The curve (its direction and curvature) define the position and orientation of the marker.


Curve Reference Marker Enter the marker that defines the location and orientation of the spline. The marker acts as a reference coordinate system for the coordinate values used to define the reference curve points.

Adams/ViewMarker Modify

398

Marker Attached to Node on Flexible Body or an external system

When you modify a marker attached to a node on a flexible body, you can define its location and orientation more precisely than when you created it. If you are using Adams/Solver (C++), you can define

Tangent Velocity/Vector Velocity

Define the velocity of the marker origin along the curve. Select either:

• Tangent Velocity - Defines the initial velocity of the marker origin along the curve. It is negative if the marker is initially moving toward the start of the curve, and it is positive if the marker is moving toward the end of the curve.

• Vector Velocity - Specifies the initial translational velocity of the maker along the x-, y-, and z-axes of the Curve Reference Marker coordinate system. Adams/View projects the initial velocity onto the curve. Therefore, any contribution of the specified initial velocity vector that is not along the curve is discarded.

Orientation/

Along Axis Orientation/

In Plane Orientation

Specify either of these three Orientation Methods:

• Orientation



Orientation Relative To You can:



Solver ID Enter a unique ID number for the marker. See Adams/Solver ID.

Select to add any comments about the marker that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.



399J - OMarker Modify

the marker so it is offset from the node or you can attach it to several nodes. Learn about Adding Markers to Flexible Bodies.


Name Enter the name of the marker you are modifying.

Location Enter x, y, z coordinate defining the marker's location in a given reference frame. You can enter a location that is offset from the node ID to which the marker is attached.

Location Relative To You can:

• Enter the marker in which you specify the location coordinates.


Node ID Enter a node ID to which the marker is attached. If you are using Adams/Solver (C++), you can enter a comma-separated list of attachment nodes, or right-click the text box, select Pick FlexBody Node, and then click the desired attachment nodes with the mouse.

Snap Select to define the location of the marker so it is coincident with the node listed in the Node ID text box. Note that when the option is checked, the Node ID parameter is compulsory. If left unchecked, it is NOT mandatory to define the Node Id parameter.

Orientation/

Along Axis Orientation/

In Plane Orientation

Specify either of these three Orientation Methods:

• Orientation



Orientation Relative To You can:



Solver ID Enter a unique ID number for the marker. See Adams/Solver ID.

Select to add any comments about the marker that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


Adams/ViewMarker Tool

400

Marker Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Marker Tool

Creates a marker on:

• Ground

• A part (including a flexible body or an external system)

• A curve (available in Adams/Solver (C++) only) (Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.)

When you select to create a marker using the Marker tool, you specify the marker's location and orientation (when you define a marker on a curve, its orientation is prescribed implicitly). You can align the orientation of the marker with the global coordinate system, the current view coordinate system, or a coordinate system that you define. When you define a coordinate system, you specify one or two of its axes and Adams/View calculates the other axes accordingly.

After you create the marker, you can make changes to it, such as attach it to several nodes of a flexible body and align it so it stays along a specified curve. Learn about modifying marker with Marker Modify dialog box help.

Note: You can parameterize the locations and orientations of other objects to that of markers. For example, you can align the location of a part to be the same as a marker regardless of how the marker moves. Unlike points, whose parameterization is automatic, you must set up relationship of markers to other objects. For more information on establishing parameteric relationships, see, Improving Your Model Designs.

Tip: To reorient the marker, use the Align & Rotate tool from the Move tool stack, select Align One Axis, and then follow the prompts:

• Select the object to align (the first marker)

• Select the axis on object to align (z-axis on first marker)

• Select the direction for the axis:

• Select the center of the first marker

• Select the center of the second marker

401J - OMarker Tool

Learn about Creating Markers.


Add to Part/Add to Ground/

Select either:

• Add to Part - Adds the marker to another part in your model.

• Add to Ground - Adds the marker to ground.

• Add to Curve - Adds the marker to a spline curve.

Tip: Add the geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be added to ground.

For flex markers or markers on an external system (with a MNF/MD DB specified), you can turn the snapping behavior on and off using the Snap to Node checkbox. Note that the checkbox is seen, only while adding markers to a flexible body or an external system with an MNF/MD DB specified.

Orientation Select an orientation method for how you want the marker oriented. When you define a marker on a curve, its orientation is prescribed implicitly.

Adams/ViewMaximum Equation Error (Debug Table)

402

Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table)

Simulate → Interactive → Table

Displays the Debug table, which contains a running count of the iterations needed to solve the equations of motion for the current Simulation. You can use the information as a measure of how many computations Adams/Solver is performing.

Learn more about Debugging Your Model.

The option: Displays the following:

Time The value of time at the beginning of a step.

Type The type of simulation currently being run. It can be one of the following:

• DYN for a Dynamic simulation.

• KIN for a Kinematic simulation.

• STA for a Static equilibrium simulation.

• TRA for Transient simulation.

• QST for Quasi-static simulation.

• ICD for initial conditions displacements.

• ICV for initial conditions velocity.

• ICA for initial conditions acceleration.

• EIG for Eigen solution.

• STM for state matrix solution.

Steps The current Output step number. It is a running count of the number of integration steps taken, and you can use it as a measure of how hard Adams/Solver is working. Learn about displaying a strip chart of this information.

Step Size The current size of the integration time step.

Iterations The number of the current iteration. It is one at the beginning of each time step and increments by one until Adams/Solver converges to a solution or exceeds the maximum allowable number of iterations.

Order The order of the predictor. It corresponds to the order of the polynomial Adams/Solver uses to predict the solution at the end of an integration step.

Rank The current ranking of the modeling objects in order of their experiencing the most error or the greatest change, acceleration, or force, depending on the element that you are currently tracking.

Element The modeling objects experiencing the most error or the greatest change, acceleration, or force, depending on the element that you are currently tracking. The number of objects listed depends on the number you requested in the Show box.

403J - OMaximum Equation Error (Debug Table)

Hits The number of times the modeling object was placed in the top n of modeling objects where n is the number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You specify the number of objects in the maximum list in the Show box.

Percent The percentage of time the modeling object was placed in the top n of modeling objects where n is the number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You specify the number of objects in the maximum list in the Show box.

History Depth Number of iterations for which the listed modeling objects appeared. You can change this value.

Show The number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You can change this value. By default, Adams/View displays three objects in the list at any one time.

The option: Displays the following:

Adams/ViewMeasure Attributes

404

Measure Attributes

Build → Object Measure → Modify → Measure Attributes Tool

When you modify a measure, you can set the attributes for a Strip chart, including creating a legend, setting axis limits, and setting the color and line type for the curve.


Measure Name Enter the name of the measure whose attributes you want to set.

General Attributes

Legend Enter text that describes the data that the curve in the strip chart represents. The text appears in the title bar of the strip chart. Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.

Comments Enter text that describes the measure. The text appears in Adams/PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart to it for plotting. See Comments.

Learn how to transfer a strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor.

Axis Attributes

Lower/Lower/Label Currently not available.

Type Select the type of plot to be displayed in Adams/PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart to it for plotting:

• linear - Performs no transformation of data or axis values. This is the default.

• logar (Logarithmic) - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the same distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are equally spaced.

• db (Decibel) - Displays 20 * log 10 (value) for each value.

• default - Selecting this means no specific axis type is requested and it appears in the default axis type, which is usually linear. Learn how to transfer a strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor.

Axis Attributes

Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend using the options below. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.

Line Type Select a type of line style for the curve. For example, you can select a line that alternates between dots and dashes.

Symbol Set the type of symbol displayed at data points along the curve.

405J - OMeasure Attributes

Color Change the color of the curve.

Thickness Change the weight of the curve line. Weight values range from 1 to 5 screen pixels.


Adams/ViewMeasure Distance

406

Measure Distance

Tools → Measure Distance Shared Dialog Box

Calculates the relative distance and orientation between two positions in your model (Markers, Points, or a marker/point) and ground. Adams/View calculates the following distance information:

• Magnitude

• x, y, and z component

• Angular displacement

You can also select that Adams/View calculate the results relative to a reference marker. You can select to measure the distance at the model's initial configuration (how you built it) or at a particular simulation step. You can specify a time, frame number, or a configuration of the model. You can view the results in an Information window or have Adams/View store the results in a file.

Learn more about Measuring Distance Between Positions.


First Position Enter the marker from which you want to measure the distance.

Second Position Enter the marker to which you want to measure the distance.

Ref Position You can:

• Enter a marker or point that defines the coordinate system in which to represent distance information. Using a point as the reference position is the same as using a marker whose orientation is identical to the global orientation.

• Leave blank to define the distance information in the global coordinate system.

Write Result to File Name Enter the name of the file in which you want to save the distance information. If you want the information written to a directory other than the one from which you are running Adams/View, include the path.

Note: If you do not specify a file, your results will appear in an Information window.

Model Name/

Analysis Name

Choose either:

• Model Name - To calculate the distance based on the current configuration of a model.

• Analysis Name - To calculate the distance based on a configuration or simulation time in a particular Simulation.

If you selected Model Name, the following option appears:

407J - OMeasure Distance

Model Name Enter the name of the current model in the text box. If you want to measure distance in the current model, you do not need to enter a model name.

If you selected Analysis Name, the following options appear:

Analysis Name Enter the name of the simulation.

Configuration/Time/Frame Number

Select to use a particular time, frame, or configuration store in the selected simulation.


Adams/ViewMeasure Toolstack

408

Measure Toolstack

Main toolbox → Measure toolstack

Displays a shortcuts to creating measures.

See Creating a Point-to-Point Measure Using the Simple Method.

See Selecting Markers to Define Angle Measures - Select Method.

409J - OMerge Tool

Merge Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Merge Tool

Merges two non-intersecting rigid body geometries into one without performing any Boolean operations on the geometry. The geometry can contain any type of geometry: solid, wire, or complex. The geometry can also belong to the same part. If the geometry belongs to the different parts, The Merge tool merges the parts into one.

Because Adams/View does not perform any Boolean operations on the merged geometries, overlapping volumes produce double-density mass in the part and change the results of the mass property calculations. Therefore, you should use this operation only for non-intersecting rigid bodies that the Unite Tool cannot combine.

Adams/View merges the second geometry that you select into the first geometry you select.

Learn about Merging Geometry.

Adams/ViewMerge Two Models

410

Merge Two Models

Tools → Merge Two Models

Allows you to merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. Adams/View maintains the source model and does not change it after the merge operation.

This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you to work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them as a whole.

Learn about the procedure for Merging Models.


Base Model Name Enter the name of the destination model.

Model to be merged Enter the name of the source model that you want merged into the destination model.

You can browse for a model by right-clicking the text boxes and selecting the appropriate commands.

Translate Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it with the destination model.

By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for entering translational positions. Learn more about Coordinate Systems in Adams/View.

Rotation Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source model.

Add all elements to a Group named

Optional. Enter a new or existing group into which Adams/View adds all merged objects. Learn about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.

Merge/Rename Select either:

• Merge - Merge parts that have the same name.

• Rename - Rename the parts before merging the models.

Note: This option affects parts only. All other objects in the “model to be merged” which share the same name as those in the “base model” will automatiocally have an indexing suffix (for example, “_2”) added to their names in the merged model.

Merge ground parts When Rename parts is selected, this option will merge the ground parts rather than renaming them.

411J - OMessage (.msg) Content

Message (.msg) Content

Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Message (.msg) Content

Selecting Message (.msg) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the contents of the Message file. You only receive a message file when you are using External Adams/Solver. Learn about setting the type of Adams/Solver.


Topology Select to print model topological data in the message file.

Statistics Prints a block of information for each kinematic, static, or dynamic step. This information helps you monitor the simulation process and locate the source of the error if there is a problem. Each step consists of two phases:

• A forward step in time (the predictor for dynamics)

• The solution of the equations of motion (the corrector for dynamics)

For more information, see the argument EPRINT in the DEBUG command in the Adams/Solver online help.

Verbose Prints additional information, such as the name of the subroutine from which Adams/Solver sends each diagnostic, explanations, and possible remedies (when available). If you set Verbose to No, Adams/Solver outputs only basic error messages.


Adams/ViewMessage Settings

412

Message Settings

View → Message Window → Settings

Allows you to set the messages displayed in the Message Window and clear the messages from the window. By default, the message window only displays error and fatal messages and messages from commands that you execute from the user interface (for example, menus and dialog boxes). You can also display messages that you execute from the Command window, Command Navigator, and command files. In addition, you can set the severity level of the messages displayed, from informational to fatal messages. Learn about Managing Messages in Adams/View.


only Graphical User Interface (GUI) widgets

Select if you want to display messages that are generated from commands you execute from the user interface.

the GUI, the command line, and command files

Select if you want to display messages that you execute from the user interface, command window, Command Navigator, and command files.

Don't display messages Select if you want to turn off the display of all messages.

Information Select to display messages about what is occurring during a command. Setting the message window to display these types of messages helps you understand what is happening in Adams/View but requires no action from you.

Warning Select to display messages that warn you that something unusual occurred but the operation can continue. You may want to fix or change something to complete the operation without warnings.

Error Select to display messages that indicate that the operation cannot be executed. You need to fix or change something to complete the operation.

Fault Select to display messages that indicate that a programming error occurred. You should report the message to MSC’s Technical Support staff.

Clear Select to clear the messages displayed.

413J - OMessage Window

Message Window

View → Message Window

Provides you with messages on the status of Adams/View and displays helpful information while you are using Adams.

Adams/View displays messages about the execution of a command in the message window. By default, the message window only displays messages about commands you execute from the user interface. You can also set it to display messages about commands that you execute from the Command window, Command Navigator, and command files.

Learn about Managing Messages in Adams/View.

Adams/ViewMNF and MD DB Transformation

414

MNF and MD DB Transformation

Build → Flexible Bodies → MNF XForm...

It performs transformation on an already existing flexible body or Modal Neutral File (MNF) or MD DB File (.master). The types of transformation operations that can be performed are:

• Translation - Translate along a vector, by specified distance.

• Rotation - Rotate about an axis, by specified angle.

• Mirroring - Mirror about a plane.


Flexible Body Name/MNF File/MD DB

Select either:

• Flexible Body Name, and then select a flexible body that already exists.

• MNF File, and then select the name of the MNF to import.

• MD DB, and then select the name of the MD DB to import.


Index The parameter applies only, when you select MD DB file. The parameter specifies the index of the flexible body in the specified MD DB. The parameter is optional. Default value is 1.

Note: You can view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB, using the “…” button provided beside the Index. The desired flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the displayed list.

MNF/MD DB Select the appropriate option for Output File and enter the name of the MNF or the MD DB file.

Create Flexible Body...

Select to open Create a Flexible Body dialog box after the intended transformation is carried out, so that you can create the flexible body and see the transformation.

Mirror Select to perform mirroring operation. You need to specify mirroring plane to perform mirroring operation.

Translate Select to perform translation operation. You need to specify a direction for translation and a distance to translate.

Rotate Select to perform rotation operation. You need to specify the axis about which rotation can be done and an angle for rotation.

If Mirror option is selected, following options are available.

415J - OMNF and MD DB Transformation

Plane Normal to Vector/Plane From 3 Points/ Plane Normal to 2 Points

Specify either of these three methods to specify the mirroring plane:

• Plane Normal to Vector - This option allows you to specify a vector which is normal to the plane about which you want to mirror the flexible body.

• Plane From 3 Points - This option allows you to specify three points to define the mirroring plane.

• Plane Normal to 2 Points - This option allows you to specify 2 points which define a vector normal to the plane about which you want to mirror the flexible body.

If Plane Normal to Vector is selected, following options are available.

Direction Direction can be one of the following:

• Global X - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the global X axis.

• Global Y - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the global Y axis.

• Global Z - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the global Z axis.

• X axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the specified Marker's X axis.

• Y axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the specified Marker's Y axis.

• Z axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the specified Marker's Z axis.

• User Defined - This option specifies the mirror plane is normal to the user entered vector.

Marker Only available if Direction is either X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis of Marker.

Mirroring will be done with respect to marker's orientations (X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis) respectively.

Direction Vector Only available if Direction is User Defined.

Location Enter a location on the mirror plane.

If Plane From 3 Points is selected, the following options will be available.

Point 1, Point 2, Point3

Specify the coordinates of three points that define the mirroring plane.

If Plane Normal to 2 Points is selected, the following options will be available.



416

From Location, To Location

Enter the coordinates of two end points of a vector that is normal to the mirroring plane.

If Translate option is selected, the following options are available.

Direction From Vector/ Direction Normal to 3 Points/Direction From 2 Points

Specify either of these three methods to define the direction of translation:

• Direction From Vector - direction is specified as a vector.

• Direction Normal to 3 Points - direction is specified as normal to a plane.

• Direction From 2 Points - direction is specified by two end points of a vector.

If Direction From Vector option is selected, the following options will be available.

Direction Direction can be one of the following:

• Global X - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of global X axis.

• Global Y - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of global Y axis.

• Global Z - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of global Z axis.

• X axis of Marker - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of the specified Marker's X axis.

• Y axis of Marker - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of the specified Marker's Y axis.

• Z axis of Marker - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of the specified Marker's Z axis.

• User Defined - This option translates the flexible body in the specified direction.


Translation will be done with respect to marker's orientation (X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis) respectively.


If Direction Normal to 3 Points option is selected, the following options will be available.

Point 1, Point 2, Point3

Specify the coordinates of three points that define a plane. Translation will be performed in the direction which is normal to the plane.

If Direction From 2 Points option is selected, the following options will be available.


Enter the coordinates of two end points; translation will be done in the direction of the two end points.


417J - OMNF and MD DB Transformation

Distance Enter the distance for translation of the flexible body. Except for the Direction From 2 Points option you are required to specify a value for Distance. For Direction From 2 Points option, if Distance is not specified it is calculated to be the distance between the two points.

If Rotate option is selected, following options will be available.

Direction From Vector/Direction Normal to 3 Points/Direction From 2 Points

Specify either of these three methods to specify an axis of rotation:

• Direction From Vector - rotation axis is defined as a vector.

• Direction Normal to 3 Points - rotation axis is defined as a plane normal.

• Direction From 2 Points - rotation axis is defined by two end points.

If Direction From Vector option is selected, the following options are available.

Direction Direction either can be

• Global X - The rotation axis is parallel to the global X axis.

• Global Y - The rotation axis is parallel to the global Y axis.

• Global Z - The rotation axis is parallel to the global Z axis.

• X axis of Marker - The rotation axis is parallel to the specified Marker's X axis.

• Y axis of Marker - The rotation axis is parallel to the specified Marker's Y axis.

• Z axis of Marker - The rotation axis is parallel to the specified Marker's Z axis.

• User Defined - The rotation axis is parallel to the user specified vector..


Rotation will be done with respect to marker's orientation (X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis) respectively.


Center of rotation Enter the coordinates for the center of rotation.

If Direction Normal to 3 Points option is selected, the following options are available.

Point 1 (center of rotation), Point 2, Point3

Enter the coordinates of the three points that define a plane; rotation will be done about the axis which is normal to the plane, using Point 1 as the center of rotation.

If Direction From 2 Points option is selected, the following options are available.


Enter the coordinates of end points; the end points define the axis for rotation.



418

Angle Enter the angle for rotation of the flexible body.

Node Offset/ New Interface IDs

This option allows you to offset all the node IDs or to specify new interface IDs of the flexible body. This option is common for all the transformation options (that is, Mirroring, Translation and Rotation).

• Node Offset - Enter a value to offset all the node IDs.

• New Interface IDs - Enter new interface IDs for the current interface node IDs. Here the number of interface node ids entered have to be less than or equal to current interface node IDs of the flexible body.

If you check the More option following parameter will appear.

MNF Write Options This option optimizes the MNF through Adams/Flex toolkit. It corresponds to the parameters in the MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS environment variable.

For more information on the MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS, see Setting Up Translation Options through the MNF Toolkit.


419J - OModel Verify Tool

Model Verify Tool

Interactive/Scripted Simulation Dialog Box → Model Verify ToolTools → Model Verify

Checks for error conditions in your model, such as misaligned joints, unconstrained parts, or massless parts in dynamic models, and alerts you to other possible problems. It is a good tool to use periodically as you add detail to or refine your model.

The Model Verify tool calculates the number of Degrees of freedom (DOF) in your model. It gives you two separate calculations:

• The Gruebler count, which is a rough estimate of the number of DOF in your model using the Gruebler equation to add up the number of DOF introduced by parts and to subtract the number of DOF removed by constraints.

• The actual number and type of movable parts and constraints in the model that Adams/Solver determines after it formulates your model’s equations of motion.

It issues warning messages to alert you to any inconsistencies in your model. For example, inconsistencies can occur when you have not defined connections properly or parts are free to move but have no mass properties assigned to them.

The verification results appear in the Information Window.

Learn about Verifying Your Model.

Adams/ViewModify Body

420

Modify Body

Right-click part → Part name → Modify

Modifies the following for a part:

• Name, location, and orientation

• Mass and inertia

• Initial velocities

• Initial location and orientation

In addition, it also defines a new ground part.

To modify these properties:

• Set Category to:

• Name and Position

• Mass Properties

• Velocity Initial Conditions

• Position Initial Conditions

• Ground Part

421J - OModify Body - Ground Part

Modify Body - Ground PartDefines a new or existing part as the ground part.

Examples of where defining a new part may be helpful:

• If you merge two models, each of which has its own ground part, after the merge, the resulting ground part may not be what you want so you will need to define another part as the ground part.

• You build a model that represents a small subset of your actual system, and then want to expand the model and need to redefine what is ground. For example, if you were modeling a door handle on a car door, you might just have a simple model where the door is ground. Later, you may want to expand the model so that the door swings on the car frame. In that case, you would want to define a new part representing the car body as ground and attach the old ground to the car body with a revolute joint.


New Ground Enter a new or existing part to be used as the ground part. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it. Learn about Comments.

Adams/ViewModify Body - Mass Properties

422

Modify Body - Mass PropertiesBy default, Adams/View calculates the mass and inertia for a rigid body part based on the part’s geometry and material type. The geometry defines the volume and the material type defines the density. The default material type for rigid bodies is steel.

You can change the material type used to calculate mass and inertia or simply specify the density of the part. If you do not want Adams/View to calculate mass and inertia using a part’s geometry, material type, or density, you can enter your own mass and moments of inertia.

It is possible to assign zero mass to a part whose six Degrees of freedom you constrain with respect to parts that do have mass. You should not assign a part zero mass, however. Any part that has zero mass and translational degrees of freedom can causes simulation failure (since a = F/m). Therefore, we recommend that you assign finite masses and inertias to all parts. In addition, a part without mass cannot have mass moments of inertia.

Learn about Methods for Calculating Mass Properties.


Define Mass By Set to:

• Material Type

• Geometry and Density

• User Input

If you selected Material Type, the following options appears:

Material Type Enter the type of material for the rigid body. Adams/View displays the material’s composition below the text box. Adams/View uses the density associated with the material type and volume of the geometry of the part to calculate the part’s mass and inertia. Learn about Standard Material Properties. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Show calculated inertia Select to view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams/View calculates.

If you selected Geometry and Density, the following options appears:

Density Enter the density of the part. Adams/View uses the part’s density and the volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.

Show calculated inertia Select to view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams/View calculates.

If you selected User Input, the following options appear:

Mass Enter the mass of the part.

Moments of inertia Enter the mass moments of inertia. Learn About Entering Mass Moments of Inertia.

Center of Mass Marker Enter the marker that is to be used to define the center-of-mass (CM) for the part.

423J - OModify Body - Mass Properties

Off-Diagonal Terms Select to enter the cross-products of inertia (Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz). Clear to enter just the principal mass moments of inertia (Ixx, Iyy, Izz).

Inertia Reference Marker Specify the marker that defines the axes for the inertia properties. If you do not enter an inertia marker, Adams/View uses the part CM marker for inertia properties.

Add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it. You can enter any alphanumeric characters. The comments appear in the Information window when you select to display information about the request, in the Adams/View Log file, and in a command or dataset file when you export your model to these types of files.


Adams/ViewModify Body - Name and Position

424

Modify Body - Name and PositionChanges the name of a part and sets its position. Learn about Modifying Part Name and Location.


Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the rigid body.

Solver ID Assign a unique ID number to the rigid body. See Adams/Solver ID.

Location Enter the coordinates to which you want to move an object. If you enter a location in the Relative To text box, Adams/View applies the coordinates relative to that coordinate system.

Orientation/Along Axis/In Plane

Select one of the following to set different Orientation Methods:

• Orientation

• Along Axis

• In Plane

Relative To Enter a reference frame relative to which the location and orientation are defined.

Planar Available for rigid bodies only

Set to identify a three-dimensional rigid body as a planar part.

If the selected part is a flexible body following 3 options will appear

Char Length Specify the characteristic length of the flexible body for linear limit check. This should be in the model length unit.

Dynamic Limit Specify the threshold frequency for quasi-static modes.

Stability Factor Specify the amount of damping needed to add to the quasi-static modes.

Select to add any comments about the body to help you manage and identify it. Learn about Comments.

425J - OModify Body - Position Initial Conditions

Modify Body - Position Initial ConditionsIn addition to specifying initial velocities, you can also control the initial position for a part’s location and orientation. You should specify the initial position when you do not want Adams/View to reposition the part. Adams/Solver uses the initial position during an Initial conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a Simulation of your model.

You can control initial locations and orientations for rigid bodies and flexible bodies but only initial locations for Point masses.

• Location fixes any of the current translational coordinates (x, y, or z) of the part as the initial location.

• Orientation fixes any of the current body-fixed 313 rotational coordinates (psi, theta, or phi angles) as the initial orientation. These rotation angles are those associated with a body-fixed 313 rotation sequence regardless of which sequence you set as the default for the modeling database. (Learn about Rotation Sequences.)

If Adams/Solver has to alter part positions to obtain consistent initial conditions during an initial conditions simulation, it does not vary the coordinates you specify, unless it must vary them to satisfy the initial conditions you specify for a joint or a motion.

If you fix the initial positions of too many parts, the initial conditions simulation can fail. Use initial positions sparingly.


Positions held FIXED during assembly

Global X, Global Y,Global Z

Select the coordinates that you want fixed during initial conditions simulation.

Orientations held FIXED during assembly

PSI Orientation,THETA Orientation,PHI Orientation

Select the angles that you want fixed during initial conditions simulation.

Add any comments about the part to help you manage and identify it. Learn about Comments.

Adams/ViewModify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions

426

Modify Body - Velocity Initial ConditionsYou can specify initial velocities for parts. Adams/View uses the initial velocity during the Initial conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a Simulation of your model.

You can specify translational and angular velocities for rigid bodies and only translational velocity for point masses.

• Translational velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s center of mass with respect to ground or another marker in your model. You can specify translational velocity for each vector component of the marker.

• Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s rotational position with respect to the CM marker of the part or another marker in your model. You can specify angular velocity for each vector component of the marker.

If you specify initial velocities, Adams/View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during assemble model operations, regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave some or all of the velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part during an assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. Note that it is not the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an initial velocity to zero means that the part will not be moving in the specified direction when the simulation starts, regardless of any forces and constraints acting upon it.



Translational Velocity

Ground Select to specify the global reference coordinate system as the system in which the translational velocity vector components will be specified.

Marker Select and enter a marker along whose axes the translational velocity vector components will be specified.

X Axis/Y Axis/Z Axis Select the axes in which you want to define velocity and enter the velocity in the text box that appears next to the axes check boxes. Remember, leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part during an initial conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. It is not the same as setting the initial velocity to zero.

Angular Velocity (Not available if you are modifying a point mass.)

Part CM Select to specify the part’s center-of-mass (CM) marker as the coordinate system about whose axes the translational or angular velocity vector components will be specified.

Marker Select and enter a marker about whose axes the translational or angular velocity vector components will be specified.

427J - OModify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions

X Axis/Y Axis/Z Axis Select the axes in which you want to define velocity and enter the velocity in the text box that appears next to the axes check boxes. Remember, leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part during an initial conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. It is not the same as setting the initial velocity to zero.

Add any comments about the body to help you manage and identify it. Learn about Comments.


Adams/ViewModify Bushing

428

Modify Bushing

Right-click bushing → Modify

Modifes the following for a bushing:

• The two bodies to which the forces are applied.

• Translational and rotational properties for stiffness, damping, and preload.

• Force graphics.

Learn more about Modifying Bushings.



Name Enter the name of the bushing to modify.

Action Body Change the action body to which the force is applied.

Reaction Body Change the body that receives the reaction forces.

Translational Properties:

Stiffness Enter three stiffness coefficients.

Damping Enter three viscous-damping coefficients. The force due to damping is zero when there are no relative translational velocities between the markers on the action and reaction bodies.

Preload Enter three constant force (preload) values. Constant values indicate the magnitude of the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axeis of the coordinate system marker of the reaction body (J marker) when both the relative translational displacement and velocity of the markers on the action and reaction bodies are zero.

Rotational (Torque) Properties:

Stiffness Enter three stiffness coefficients.

Damping Enter three viscous-damping coefficients. The torque due to damping is zero when there are no relative rotational velocities between the markers on the action and reaction bodies.

Preload Enter three constant torque (preload) values. Constant values indicate the magnitude of the torque components about the x-, y-, and z-axes of the coordinate system marker on the reaction body (J marker) when both the relative rotational displacement and velocity of the markers on the action and reaction bodies are zero.

Force Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none.

429J - OModify Bushing


Select to change the position of the force using the Precision Move dialog box.

Select to create a force measure. Learn about creating Object Measures


Adams/ViewModify Comment

430

Modify Comment

Modify/Create Dialog Box → Shared Dialog Box

Adds notes about the objects in your Model, and for Template-Based products, about entities in your subsystem, to help you manage and identify them. The types of objects about which you can add comments in Adams/View are listed below. For parts, constraints, and forces, you add comments when you modify the object. For models, you can add the comments as you create the model, and you can also modify the comments.

• Models

• Parts

• Constraint

• Forces

• Materials

The comments that you create appear in the following:

• Information window

• Adams/View Log file

• Command or dataset files


Object Enter the name of the object or entity.

Type Enter the type of object for which you are creating comments.

Comment Text Enter your comments.

Date Select to add the date when you created the comments. In template-based products, it adds both date and time.

Time Select to enter the time when you created the comments.

Clear Clear the text, time, and date.

Reset Set the comments to the previous ones.

431J - OModify Coupler

Modify Coupler

Right-click coupler → Modify

Modifies a coupler allowing you to specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler.

Learn about:

• Modifying Couplers

• Creating Couplers


Name Enter the name of the coupler to modify.

Two Joint Coupler/ Three Joint Coupler

Select whether you want a two- or three-joint coupler.

By Scales/By Displacement/User Defined

Select the relationship between the joints (either linear or nonlinear).

Driver and Coupler Change the joints to be coupled, and then set Freedom Type to their type. If you have any cylindrical joints, you can specify either translational or rotational displacement. Translational joints always have translational displacements. Revolute joints always have rotational displacements.

Scale If the coupler is linear, enter a scale for the second and third coupled joints. The scales are r2 and r3 in the following equation:

delta1 + r2 * delta2 + r3 * delta3 =0

If the joint displacement is rotational, its corresponding delta in the equation above is in radians.

If you selected User Defined, the following options appear:

User-Written Subroutine Parameters

If the coupler is nonlinear, specify the user parameters to be passed to the User-written subroutine COUSUB, COUXX, COUXX2. For more on user-written subroutines, see the Adams/Solver online help.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine COUSUB, COUXX, COUXX2.


Adams/ViewModify Extrusion

432

Modify Extrusion

Right-click an extrusion → Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of an Extrusion and allows you to rename the extrusion.

Learn about Extrusion tool.


Extrusion Name Displays the name of the extrusion you are modifying.

New Name If you want, enter a unique name for the extrusion.

Reference Marker Specify the marker used to locate and orient the extrusion.

Relative To Specify the coordinate system in which the location and orientation coordinates are specified. If you do not specify this parameter, Adams/View uses the reference marker.

Profile Points/Profile Curve

Select either:

• Profile Points - Enter the locations of the points that define the profile. The points are relative to the reference marker.

To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the Location table.

• Profile Curve - Enter the object used to define the profile of the extrusion. You can specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline as the profile curve. The object should be in the xy plane of the reference marker.

Path Points/Path Curve/Length along Z

Select either:

• Path Points - Enter points used to define the path of the extrusion. The points are relative to the reference marker. The points define the path along which the profile curve will be extended.

To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the Location Table.

• Path Curve - Enter the object used to define the path of the extrusion. You can specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline. The object defines the path along which the profile curve is extended.

• Length along Z - Z-axis of the reference marker defining the straight line along which the profile curve will be extruded. Enter a positive length to extrude along the +z-axis.

433J - OModify Extrusion

Select to add any comments about the extrusion that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it.



Adams/ViewModify FEMDATA

434

Modify FEMDATA

Build → Data Elements → FEMDATA → Modify

Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite element or fatigue life analysis. You use the Solver → Settings → Output → More → Durability Files to specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver Settings - Output dialog box help and Adams/Durability online help). Adams/View will not output to any files unless you specify the format.



Name Enter the name of the FEMDATA element to modify.

Type Select the information that you want output:

• Loads on Rigid Body/Flexible Body - Outputs all external forces (reaction and applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and inertial forces of the specified body (angular velocities and accelerations including effects of gravity) as a function of time. Load data will be output in the simulation set of units.

• Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible body. Adams/View will only export coordinates of the active modes in the simulation.

• Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible body. Adams/View writes the deformations in the simulation set of units.

• Strain - Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the modal neutral file (MNF) of the specified flexible body. Adams/View outputs all six components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body.

• Stress - Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the Modal Neutral File (MNF) of the flexible body. Adams/View outputs all six components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs stresses in the simulation set of units in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body

If you selected Loads on Rigid Body, the following options appear:

R Marker Enter the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system to output loads. Because Adams/Solver resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the coordinate system of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA basic coordinate system of the part's finite element model (FEM).


435J - OModify FEMDATA

Peak Slice Select that FEM load data are to be output only at those time steps where the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. With the START and END, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, and GMAG.

If you selected Loads on Flexible Body, the following options appear:

Flex Body Enter the name of the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.

Peak Slice Select that FEM load data are to be output only at those time steps where the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. With the START and END, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG.

If you selected Modal Deformation, the following option appears:

Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.

If you selected Nodal Deformation, the following option appears:

Flex Body Enter the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.

Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not specify a node list, FEMDATA exports nodal data at each attachment point of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not belong to the flexible body.

Datum Enter a node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal displacements. Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you do not specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of nodal displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified node does not belong to the flexible body.

If you selected Stress or Strain, the following two options appear:

Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.

Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not specify a node list, FEMDATA exports nodal data at each attachment point of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not belong to the flexible body.

For all types, set the following options:


Adams/ViewModify FEMDATA

436

File Enter the output file name for the FEM data. You can specify an existing directory, root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be composed of the Adams run and body IDs according to the type of data and file format that you specified in the Solver → Settings → Output → More → Durability Files (for more information, see Adams/Durability online help).

Time Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:

• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the start of the simulation.

• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a peak load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.



437J - OModify Force

Modify Force

Right-click single-component force → Modify

Modifies the following for a Single-component force:

• Force direction, if only one part is affected.

• Action body to which the force is applied. If you created the force between two parts, you can also change the reaction body. You cannot change a force created on one part and ground to a force created between two parts because the direction methods are not compatible. You’ll have to delete the force and create it again.

• Force magnitude.

• Force graphics

The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.

Learn more about:

• How To create a single-component force:

• Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces

• Modifying Single-Component Forces


Name Displays the name of the force.

Direction Set the number of parts affected and the direction of the force:

• On One Body, Fixed in Space - Sets the force direction so it is applied to a part. The force direction is fixed on ground.

• On One Body, Moving with Body - Sets the force so it is applied to a part. The part defines the direction of the force.

• On One Body, Moving with Other Body - Sets the force so it is applied to a part. A second part (the direction part) defines the direction of the force.

• Between Two Bodies - Creates a force between two parts. One of the parts can be ground. You cannot change a force on one part to a force defined between two parts or the reverse. You can, however, change a torque on one part to a torque on two parts or the reverse.

The following text boxes are available depending on how you defined the direction of the force.

Body Change the action body to which the force is applied.

Action Body For a force defined between two parts, change the action body to which the force is applied.


Adams/ViewModify Force

438

Direction Body Change the body that defines the direction of the force if you selected the direction option, On One Body, Moving with Other Body.

Define Using Enter how you want to define the force. Select:

• Function to define using a numerical value or function expression.

• Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine SFOSUB.


• Constant force value


To enter a function expression, next to the

Function text box, select the More button to display the Function Builder.

Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is optional.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine SFOSUB. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.

Force Display Set whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body for single-component forces.


439J - OModify General Force

Modify General Force

Right-click six-component general force → Modify

Modifies the following for a Six-component general force:

• Action and reaction body to which the force is applied or the action and reaction markers

• Reference marker

• Force magnitude

• Force graphics

Learn about Multi-Component Forces.


Force Name Enter the name of the general force to modify.

Action Part/

Action Marker

Change the action body or marker to which the force is applied.

Reaction Part/

Reaction Marker

Change the reaction body or marker that receives the reaction forces.

Reference Marker Change the reference marker that indicates the direction of the force.



• Subroutine to define using a User-written subroutine.

X Force/

Y Force/

Z Force/

AX Torque/

AY Torque/

AZ Torque

If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following for each component of the force:





Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine and the ID of the force being modified.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine GFOSUB. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.

Adams/ViewModify General Force

440

Force Display Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body.


Select to create a force measure. Learn about creating Object Measures


441J - OModify Geometric Spline

Modify Geometric Spline

Right-click a spline → Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of your splines.

Learn about the Spline Tool.


Name Enter the name of the spline to modify.

Closed Select Yes if you want the spline to be closed or select no if you want the spline to be open.

Segment Count Displays the number of segments Adams/View uses to graphically display the fitting of the points in the curve. To have Adams/View automatically calculate the number of segments, select the Calculate tool .

For an open curve, Adams/View defaults to a segment count that is five times the number of curve points that you have provided. Specifying fewer segments results in a coarser curve. For a closed curve, Adams/View defaults to a segment count that is five times the number of points, plus one. In mathematical terms:

5 * ( #pts + 1 )

For both closed and open curves, there are no limits to how many or how few segments you use (other than hardware limitations), but for every curve there is a plateau, beyond which increasing the number of segments does not enhance the graphics of your spline.

Values Enter values for the locations of the points that define the spline. The points are relative to the reference marker.

You can edit the locations of the points by selecting the More button to display the Location table. The values cannot be modified if a reference_profile is specified.

Reference Marker Enter the marker that defines the location and orientation of the spline. The marker acts as a reference coordinate system for the coordinate values used to define the reference curve points.

Reference Curve Displays the existing data element curve that is used to mathematically define the spline. When you define the points that make up the spline, Adams/View creates a curve fit through the points. Learn about Data Element Modify Curve dialog box.

Reference Profile Enter an existing Wire Geometry from which the bspline is to be created. Note that the ref curve and matrix will be automatically generated and hence the corresponding fields are disabled if a profile is specified.

Adams/ViewModify Geometric Spline

442

Reference Matrix Displays a data element matrix that contains all the spline point coordinates. Learn about Create/Modify Matrix dialog box.

Spread Points Specify the value to ‘yes’ or ‘no’ (applicable only when a ref profile is specified). If specified to ‘yes’, then the generated bspline will have its points equally spaced.

Num new pts Specify the number of points on the bspline. This parameter is usable only if spread points is specified to ‘yes’.

Select to enter any comments about the geometry that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.



443J - OModify Joint

Modify Joint

Right-click idealized or primitive joint → Modify

Changes several basic properties about an idealized or primitive joint, including:

• Parts that the joint connects. You can also switch which part moves relative to another part.

• What type of joint it is. For example, you can change a revolute joint to a translational joint.

• For a screw joint, you can also set the pitch of the threads of the screw.

Adams/ViewModify Joint

444


Joint Name Enter the name of the joint to modify.


Type Select the type of joint to which you want to change the current joint.

The following are exceptions to changing a joint’s type:

• You can only change a simple idealized joint to another type of simple idealized joint or to a joint primitive.

• You cannot change a joint’s type if motion is applied to the joint. In addition, if a joint has friction and you change the joint type, Adams/View returns an error.

First Body Change the part that moves relative to the second body.

Second Body Change the part that the first body moves relative to.

Force Graphics Select to display force graphics.

Pitch Value For a screw joint, enter its pitch value (translational displacement for every full rotational cycle).

Impose Motion Select to impose motion on the joint. After selecting, set the translational or rotational displacement or velocity, and then select OK.

Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint varies by anywhere from 5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the joint, Adams/Solver issues a warning message and continues execution. If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams/View issues an error message and stops execution.

Initial Conditions Select to set initial conditions for a revolute, translational, or cylindrical joint using the Joint Initial Conditions dialog box. Learn About Initial Conditions for Joints.

Add any comments about the joint that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Select to change the position of the joint using the Precision Move dialog box.

Select to create a joint measure. Learn about creating Object Measures

Select to apply friction to the joint. See Create/Modify Friction dialog box help.

445J - OModify Modal ICs

Modify Modal ICs

Flexible Body Modify dialog box → Modal ICs

Displays all the modes in the flexible body and lets you enable and disable them, and set their initial conditions. An asterisk (*) appears next to all modes that are enabled.

To enable or disable modes:

• Highlight the modes that you want to enable or disable.

• Select Disable Highlighted Modes or Enable Highlighted Modes.

Learn more about:

• Enabling and Disabling Modes

• About Flexible Body Modal Content


Disabled Highlighted Modes Select to disable highlighted modes.

Enable Highlighted Modes Select to enable highlighted modes.

Set Exact Select to make Adams/Flex enforce the initial conditions for displacements exactly as specified.

Clear Exact Select to allow Adams/Flex to modify the initial conditions for displacements at the beginning of the simulation as necessary.

Text box and Apply Displacement IC

In the text box, enter the initial condition for modal displacement, and then select Apply Displacement IC to set the initial condition for the highlighted mode.

Text box and Apply Velocity IC

In the text box, enter the initial condition for modal velocity, and then select Apply Velocity IC to set the initial condition for the highlighted mode.

Adams/ViewModify Run-Time Clearance

446

Modify Run-Time Clearance

Simulate → Run-Time Clearance → Modify

Run-Time Clearances can be used to monitor the clearance distance between two selected geometries/flexible bodies. This clearance distance is based upon tesselation of geometry or analytical representation of known geometry. For flexible parts, clearance is based upon the external face geometry in the MNF.

The clearance tool only considers distance between polygons (whether from a mesh for flexible parts or from tesselation of geometry) so additional single point nodes are left out of the clearance analysis.

After a simulation is complete, the minimum clearance location between the two geometries/flexible bodies may be animated. This is represented as a line between the objects involved. You can also plot the clearance result sets and export the clearance data in the results file.

Multiple clearance analyses may be conducted between the same two bodies by selecting different regions of a flexible part for each analysis.


Clearance Name Enter the name of an existing Clearance object.

Clearance Type Set to the type according to the participating bodies in the clearance analysis. Clearances can be created between geometries, flexible parts or between flexible parts and geometries.The text boxes change depending on the clearance type you selected.

Threshold Optional field to allow the user to specify a maximum distance for which the clearance calculations will not be computed. Set to 0.0 by default.

If you selected Geometry to Geometry, Adams/View displays the following two options:



If you selected Geometry to Flexible Body, Adams/View displays the following four options:



447J - OModify Run-Time Clearance


Exclude J Regions Toggle Box that either excludes or includes all the nodes in the J Region selected in the clearance Computation. If this field is not entered, all the J Region nodes selected will be included in the Clearance computation.

If you selected Flexible Body to Geometry Adams/View displays the following four options:




Exclude I Regions Toggle Box that either excludes or includes all the nodes in the I Region selected in the clearance Computation. If this field is not entered, all the I Region nodes selected will be included in the Clearance computation.

If you selected Flexible Body to Geometry Adams/View displays the following five options:





Adams/ViewModify Run-Time Clearance

448

J Flex Body Select a Flexible Body.



Exclude I Regions Toggle Box that either excludes or includes all the nodes in the I Region selected in the clearance Computation. If this field is not entered, all the I Region nodes selected will be included in the Clearance computation.

Exclude J Regions Toggle Box that either excludes or includes all the nodes in the J Region selected in the clearance Computation. If this field is not entered, all the J Region nodes selected will be included in the Clearance computation.


449J - OModify Surface of Revolution

Modify Surface of Revolution

Right-click a revolution → Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of a revolution. Learn about the Revolution Tool.


Revolution Name Displays the name of the revolution you are modifying.

New Name If you want, enter a unique name for the revolution.

Reference Marker Specify the marker used to locate and orient a revolution.

Relative To Specify the coordinate system in which the location and orientation coordinates are specified. If you do not specify this parameter, Adams/View uses the reference marker.

Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the reference marker. The angle starts at the x-axis of the reference marker and extends the arc of the revolution.

Number of Sides Enter the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on a revolution. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations Adams/View uses to determine a part’s mass and inertia.

Profile Points/Profile Curve

Select either:

• Profile Points - Enter points used to define the profile of the revolution. The points are relative to the revolution’s reference marker. The profile defined by the points is swept around the reference marker’s z-axis.

To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the Location table.

• Profile Curve - Enter an object used to define the profile of the revolution. You can specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline.

Select to add any comments about the revolution that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.


Adams/ViewModify Torque

450

Modify Torque

Right-click single-component torque → Modify

Modifies the following for a single-component torque:

• Force direction, if only one part is affected.

• Action body to which the force is applied.

• Force magnitude.

• Force graphics.

The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.

Learn about:

• Single-Component Torque tool

• Modifying Single-Component Forces

• Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces


Name Enter the name of the torque to modify.

Direction Set the number of parts affected and the direction of the torque:

• On One Body, Fixed in Space - Sets the force direction so it is applied to a part. The force direction is fixed on ground.

• On One Body, Moving with Body - Sets the force so it is applied to a part. The part defines the direction of the force.

• On One Body, Moving with Other Body - Sets the force so it is applied to a part. A second part (the direction part) defines the direction of the force.

• Between Two Bodies - Creates a force between two parts. One of the parts can be ground. You cannot change a force on one part to a force defined between two parts or the reverse. You can, however, change a torque on one part to a torque on two parts or the reverse.

Note: You cannot change a force created on one part and ground to a force created between two parts because the direction methods are not compatible. You’ll have to delete the force and create it again.

The following text boxes are available depending on how you defined the direction of the force:


Body Change the action body to which the force is applied.

Action Body For a force defined between two parts, change the action body to which the force is applied.

451J - OModify Torque


Direction Body Change the body that defines the direction of the force if you selected the direction option, On One Body, Moving with Other Body.



• Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.




To enter a function expression, next to the Function text box, select the More button to display the Function Builder.

Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine and its ID.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.

Torque Display Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body for single-component torques.


Adams/ViewModify Torque Vector

452

Modify Torque Vector

Right-click multi-component torque → Modify

Modifies the following for a Three-component torque:

• Action and reaction body to which the force is applied or the action and reaction markers

• Reference marker

• Force magnitude

• Force graphics

Learn about Multi-Component Forces.


Force Name Enter the name of the force to modify.

Action Part/Action Marker

Change the action body or marker to which the force is applied.

Reaction Part/Reaction Marker

Change the reaction body or marker that receives the reaction forces.

Reference Marker Change the reference marker that indicates the direction of the force.



• Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.

AX Torque/

AY Torque/

AZ Torque

If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following for each component of the force:





Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine and the ID of the torque being modified.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the standard user subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.

Force Display Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body.

453J - OModify Torque Vector/Modify General Force

Modify Torque Vector/Modify General Force

Right-click multi-component torque → Modify

Right-click six-component force → Modify

Modifies either a Three-component torque or a Six-component general force. Its title and options change depending on the type of force. Select a title below for more information on the options available:

• Modify Torque Vector (three-component torque)

• Modify General Force

Adams/ViewModify a Request

454

Modify a Request

Build → Measure → REQUEST → Modify

Modifies a request.

Learn about Creating Requests.



Request Name Enter the name of the request to modify.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the request. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Define Using Type & Markers/Define Using Function Expressions/Define Using Subroutines

Set to:

• Define Using Type & Markers

• Define Using Function Expressions

• Define Using Subroutines

If you selected Define Using Type & Markers, the following options appear:

Output Type Select the type of output (Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, or Force).

I Marker/J Marker/R Marker Specify the markers with respect to which the output will be calculated.

If you selected Define Using Subroutines, the following options appear:

User Function Enter parameters to the user-written subroutine REQSUB. Enter the user function using the following format where r1 through r30 are constants passed to the subroutine: r1, ..., r30. Learn About Specifying a Subroutine.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine REQSUB. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument..

Title If you specified to write an output file (.out), enter up to eight headings for columns of request output. Separate each heading with a comma (,). Each heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters, including underscores (_). The first character in each heading must be alphabetic. You cannot use a comma (,), a semicolon (;), an ampersand (&), or an exclamation point (!). If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two quotation marks (" ") with no characters between them.

455J - OModify a Request

If you selected Define Using Function Expressions, the following options appear:

f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 Enter function expressions in the boxes f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 . Do not use f1 and f5 . Adams/Solver uses them to hold magnitudes for the three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a function in every text box. Learn About Specifying Function Expressions.

Title Enter a title for the top of each set of information output. The entire comment must be on one line. The title can be only eighty characters long. You can use blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters. However, you cannot use the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!).


Adams/ViewModify a Spring-Damper Force

456

Modify a Spring-Damper Force

Right-click spring damper → Modify

For a Translational spring damper, you can modify:

• Parts between which the spring damper acts.

• Stiffness and damping values, including specifying splines that defines the relationship of stiffness to displacement and damping to velocity. Learn about defining Splines.

• Preload values.

Learn about:

• Translational Spring Damper Tool

• Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers



Name Enter the name of the spring damper to modify.



Stiffness and Damping:

Stiffness Coefficient/

No Stiffness/

Spline: F=f(defo)


• Stiffness Coefficient and enter a stiffness value for the spring damper.

• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damper.

• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force to deformation.

Damping Coefficient/

No Damping/

Spline: F=f(velo)


• Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping value for the spring damper.

• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring.

• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force to velocity.

Length and Preload:

Preload Enter the preload force for the spring damper. Preload force is the force of the spring damper in its reference position.

457J - OModify a Spring-Damper Force

Default Length/

Length at Preload

Select either:

• Default Length to automatically use the length of the spring damper when you created it as its reference length.

• Length at Preload and enter the reference length of the spring at its preload position.

Tip: If you set preload to zero, then displacement at preload is the same as the spring’s free length. If the preload value is non-zero, then the displacement at preload is not the same as the spring’s free length.

Spring Graphic Specify whether coil spring graphics are always on, always off, or on whenever you have defined a spring coefficient.

Force Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body.

Damper Graphic Specify whether cylinder damper graphics are always on, always off, or on whenever you have defined a damping coefficient.


Select to change the position of the spring damper using the Precision Move dialog box.

Select to create a force measure.

Learn about creating Object Measures.


Adams/ViewModify a Torsion Spring

458

Modify a Torsion Spring

Right-click torsion spring → Modify

After you’ve created a Torsion spring, you can modify:

• Parts between which the torque acts

• Stiffness and damping values

• Preload values

• Force graphics


Name Enter the name of the torsion spring to modify.



Stiffness and Damping:

Stiffness Coefficient/

No Stiffness/

Spline: F=f(defo)


• Stiffness Coefficient to enter a stiffness value for the torsion spring.

• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damping force.

• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of stiffness to rotational deformation (radians). Learn about defining Splines.

Damping Coefficient/

No Damping/

Spline: F=f(velo)


• Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping coefficient for the torsion spring.

• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring force.

• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force to angular velocity (radians per second).

Length and Preload:

Preload Enter the preload force for the torsion spring. Preload force is the force of the torsion spring in its preload position.

Default Angle/

Angle at Preload


• Default Angle to set the rotation angle of the spring when you created it at its preload position.

• Angle at Preload and enter the angle of the spring at its preload position.

Torque Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none.

459J - OMotions

MotionsDisplays tools for creating motions.

Icon Link Icon Link

Joint Motions General Motions

Translational Motion Tool Single Point Motion Tool

Rotational Motion Tool General Point Motion Tool



Adams/ViewNew Color

460

New Color

Postprocessing → Edit → Preferences → Colors Tab → New Color button

Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to the Colors tab in the PPT Preferences dialog box to define its color values. See PPT Preferences - Colors.


Color Name Enter a name for the new color.

461J - ONew Dialog Box

New Dialog Box

Tools → Dialog Box → Create → Dialog Box → New

Creates a new dialog box.

Learn Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.


Library Enter the library in which to store the dialog box. By default, the library is .gui.

Name Enter a title for your dialog box.

Create Buttons Select any predefined buttons you'd like on your dialog box.

Adams/ViewNo Help Available

462

No Help AvailableThere is currently no help available for this dialog box.

463J - ONode Finder Dialog Box

Node Finder Dialog Box

Build → Flexible Bodies → Rigid to Flex/Flex to Flex → Node Finder

Searches for nodes on the replacement flexible body that are within a specified radius or closest to a given marker. It displays the nodes that it found in the lower portion of the dialog box. This is helpful if you are not sure to which node to transfer a marker.

Learn about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.


Find Nodes Select how you want to find nodes:

• Closest to Marker - Find those nodes closest to the marker specified.

• By Radius Around Marker - Find those nodes within a specified radius of the marker.

Marker Name Enter the name of the marker that you want to search for nodes closest to.


Number of Nodes Available only when Closest to Marker is selected.

Enter the number of nodes to search for which are closest to the specified marker. For example, find the 10 nodes closest to a marker.

Radius Available only when By Radius Around Marker is selected.

Enter the radius around the marker to search for nodes.

Interface Nodes Only Select to search only interface nodes.

Find Nodes Select to search for closest nodes.

Node listing Lists the nodes found. You can copy one of the nodes to the Swap a rigid body for another flexible body or Swap a flexible body for another flexible body dialog box:

1. Right-click a node, and then select Copy.

2. In the swap a rigid body/flexible body dialog box, right-click the Node ID text box, and then select Paste.

Adams/ViewObject Color Tool Stack

464

Object Color Tool Stack

Main Toolbox → Object Color Tool Stack

Contains 15 colors to which you can set the color of an object.

Learn about Changing an Object's Color.

465J - OObject Measure

Object Measure

Select object → Build → Measure → Object → Create/Modify

Creates a measure on an object in your model, including Point Measures. Its title changes depending on the type of object. For example, its title is Joint Measure if you are creating a measure on a joint.

In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.

Learn more about:

• Object Characteristics You Can Measure

• Point Characteristics you can measure


Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.


Measure Name Enter the name for the measure.

Characteristic Select the object characteristic to measure.

Component Select the component on which to report. You can select x, y, z, or magnitude (Mag).

Cartisian/Cylindrical/Spherical Set to the desired coordinate system (Cartesian, spherical, or cylindrical).

From/At area If it is appropriate, select a reference point indicating where the force will be measured or from where the kinematic quantities will be measured.

Note: The From/At selection does not apply to point measures because all forces are measured at the selected marker point and all kinematic quantities are measured from the global origin to the selected marker point.

Orientation Select to help you keep track of the orientations of your local part coordinate systems as you define them. See Orientation Measure dialog box help.

Represent coordinates in Enter the marker on which the vector quantity is projected. The default is the global coordinate system.

Adams/ViewObject Measure

466


Select to set the attributes of the measure. Only available when you are modifying a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help.


467J - OObject Position Handle

Object Position Handle

Settings → Object Position Handle

Main toolbox → Move toolstack →

Allows you to create a global position handle with respect to the which you can translate and rotate selected objects. When you create a global position handle, Adams/View turns off the object position handle for individual objects.

Learn more about Using Object Position Handle.


Set Handle Location Select and click on the screen to indicate the location of the handle.

Orientation Via First, in the pull-down menu, select how you want to orient the handle. You can orient the axes of the handle. By default, the orientation of the position handle is set to that of the current working grid axes.

Next, select Orientation Via to set.

Reset Select if you want to reset the location of the global position handle to the location of the selected object's position handle.

Adams/ViewOptimize Constraint Evaluate

468

Optimize Constraint Evaluate

Simulate → Design Constraint → Evaluate

Lets you interactively apply the design constraint to an analysis and print the resulting value. This helps you develop and debug constraints. It is a good idea to test your constraint on an existing analysis before using it in an optimization.

Adams/View prints the constraint value in the Information window.

Learn more About Optimization.



Constraint Name Enter the name of a constraint.

Analysis Name Enter the name of an analysis

469J - OOptimize Objective Evaluate

Optimize Objective Evaluate

Simulate → Design Objective → Evaluate

Lets you interactively apply the design objective to an analysis and print the resulting value. This helps you develop and debug objectives. It is a good idea to test your objective on an existing analysis before using it in an optimization.

Adams/View prints the objective value in the Information window.

Learn more About Optimization.



Objective Name Enter the name of a objective.

Analysis Name Enter the name of an analysis

Adams/ViewOrientation Joint Tool

470

Orientation Joint Tool

Build → Joints → orientation Joint Tool

Constrains the marker of one part so that it cannot rotate with respect to a second part as shown below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part. The axes of the coordinate systems must maintain the same orientation.

The location of the origins of the coordinate systems does not matter.

Learn:

• About Joint Primitives

471J - OOrientation Joint Tool

• Creating Joint Primitives










Normal to Grid/





Adams/ViewOrientation Measure

472

Orientation Measure

Build → Measure → Orientation → New/Modify

Measures an orientation characteristic listed in Orientation Characteristics You Can Measure.

Learn more :

• About Measuring Orientation Characteristics


Note: When creating an object or point measure, select the Orientation button from the Object Measure Dialog Box.


Measure Name Enter the name of the measure.

Characteristic Select a characteristic convention with which to associate the component.

Component Set to the rotational component you want to measure.

To Marker Enter the marker representing the coordinate system to which to measure.

From Marker Enter the marker representing the coordinate system from which to measure.



473J - OOutput (Out) Content

Output (Out) Content

Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Output (.out) Content

Selecting Output (Out) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the format of the tabular output file. You only receive a tabular output file when you are using External Adams/Solver. Learn about setting type of Adams/Solver.


Jacobian Matrix Prints the Jacobian matrix at each iteration. Learn about setting Jacobian matrix.

Request Data Prints the requests output at each iteration.

RHS and States Prints the YY array (state vector), RHS array (error terms), and DELTA array (increment to state vector) at each iteration.

Degrees of Freedom Prints a degree-of-freedom table in the tabular output file. The table indicates whether or not each of the six components of motion (that is, translation along the x- , y- , and z-axis and rotation about the x- , y- , and z-axis) is constrained for each part center of mass relative to the origin of the ground reference frame. These are the degrees of freedom as input.

To determine the degrees of freedom for the degree-of-freedom table, Adams/Solver factorizes the constraint matrix. Adams/Solver then checks for columns that are linear combinations of the other columns of the matrix. The components of motion corresponding to these columns are not constrained. After the matrix has been factored, Adams/Solver selects the components corresponding to the zero pivot elements as the degrees of freedom. Adams/Solver reports these as the independent coordinates in the degree-of-freedom table.

Equation Map Writes the internal representation of a model in the tabular output file after Adams/Solver reads and checks the input. It maps the equations and variables in the system and provides their numeric codes.

Adams/ViewOutput (Out) Content

474

P - Z

475P - ZPPT Preferences

PPT Preferences

Edit → Preferences

Changes the ways in which Adams/PostProcessor works. In addition, you can specify the directory to which Adams/PostProcessor saves files.

For description on each tab click the link below

Tab Link

Animation PPT Preferences - Animation

Colors PPT Preferences - Colors

Curves PPT Preferences - Curves

Files PPT Preferences - Files

Fonts PPT Preferences - Fonts

Geometry PPT Preferences - Geometry

Orientation PPT Preferences - Orientation

Page PPT Preferences - Page

Plot PPT Preferences - Plot

Units PPT Preferences - Units

Stereo PPT Preferences - Stereo

Adams/ViewPPT Preferences

476

Restore Select to restore the settings to their defaults

Save Save

Tab Link

477P - ZPage Layouts

Page Layouts

View → Page→ Page Layouts

Allows you to select different page layouts so you can see more than one viewport. Page layout is also referred to as the viewport layout.

Selecting a Layout

You can access the page layout palette in two ways. Both methods contain the same set of viewport options.

To select a layout:

1. Do either of the following:

• On the View menu, point to Page, and then select Page Layouts. The palette appears.

• On the Main toolbar, right-click the Page Layout tool stack . A selection of layouts appears.

2. Select a layout.

3. If you used the palette, select Close to close the palette. You can leave the palette open and continue working so you can quickly change the window.

Note: A page that contains a Fast fourier transform (FFT) or Bode plot has two viewports. For an FFT plot, the top viewport contains the plot with the input data and the bottom viewport contains the plot with the output from the FFT. For a Bode plot, the top viewport contains the gain plot and the bottom viewport contains the phase plot.

Adams/ViewParallel Axes Joint Tool

478

Parallel Axes Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Parallel Axes Joint Tool

Constrains the z-axis of the marker of one part so that it remains parallel to the z-axis of the marker of a second part, as shown below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.

The marker of the first part can only rotate about one axis with respect to the coordinate system of the second part.

Learn:


479P - ZParallel Axes Joint Tool











Normal to Grid/





Adams/ViewPart Create Equation Linear State Equation

480

Part Create Equation Linear State Equation

Build → System Elements → Linear State Equation → New

Creates a linear state equation.

Learn about:

• Creating and Modifying Linear State Equations

• System Elements



Linear State Equation Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the linear state equation.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the equation. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the equation to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

X State Array Name Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear system. The array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.

U Input Array Name Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must be an inputs (U) array. If you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also specify either a B input matrix, a Dnbsp;feedforward matrix, or both.

The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there are elements in the inputs (U) array.

Y Output Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional. If you enter an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix elements must have the same number of rows as there are elements in the outputs (Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.

IC Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The IC array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array (equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not specify an IC array, Adams/Solver initializes all states to zero.

481P - ZPart Create Equation Linear State Equation

A State Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of rows and columns), and it must have the same number of columns as the number of rows in the states (X) array.

B Input Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows as the A state matrix and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U) array.

Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you must also include an inputs (U) array.

C Output Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of columns as the A state matrix and the same number of rows as the number of elements in the outputs (Y) array. Entering a C output matrix is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include an outputs (Y) array name.

D Feedforward Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the feedforward matrix for the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same number of rows as the number of elements in the Y output array and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U) array.

When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a Y output matrix and an inputs (U) array.

Static Hold Select yes to hold states at the constant value determined during static and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.


Adams/ViewPart Modify Equation Linear State Equation

482

Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation

Build → System Elements → Linear State Equation → Modify

Modifies a linear state equation.

Learn about:

• Creating and Modifying Linear State Equations

• System Elements


Linear State Equation Name Change the name that you want assigned to the linear state equation.

Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the equation. See Adams/Solver ID.

Comments Add any comments about the equation to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

X State Array Name Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear system. The array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.

U Input Array Name Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must be an inputs (U) array. If you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also specify either a B input matrix, a D feedforward matrix, or both.

The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there are elements in the inputs (U) array.

Y Output Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional. If you enter an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix elements must have the same number of rows as there are elements in the outputs (Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.

IC Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The IC array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array (equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not specify an IC array, Adams/Solver initializes all states to zero.

A State Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of rows and columns), and it must have the same number of columns as the number of rows in the states (X) array.

483P - ZPart Modify Equation Linear State Equation

B Input Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows as the A state matrix and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U) array.

Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you must also include an inputs (U) array.

C Output Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of columns as the A state matrix and the same number of rows as the number of elements in the outputs (Y) array. Entering a C output matrix is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include an outputs (Y) array name.

D Feedforward Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the feed forward matrix for the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same number of rows as the number of elements in the Y output array and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U) array.

When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a Y output matrix and an inputs (U) array.

Static Hold Select yes if you do not want the linear state equation states to change during static and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change. For more information on holding values constant, see Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements..


Adams/ViewPerpendicular Axes Joint Tool

484

Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

Constrains the marker of one part so that it remains perpendicular to the z-axis of a second part as shown below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.

The marker of the first part can rotate about two axes with respect to the second part.

Learn:


485P - ZPerpendicular Axes Joint Tool











Normal to Grid/





Adams/ViewPicture of Marker and Node Table

486

Picture of Marker and Node Table

487P - ZPID Controller

PID Controller


The PID controller creates a general proportional-integral-derivative control block. Two inputs are necessary for this block: the proportional input and the derivative input. You must specify the derivative state for input to this block that is consistent with the proportional state. For example, if the proportional input is the measured x position of a part, the derivative input should be the linear velocity in the x direction.

This block automatically creates the integrated state of the proportional input for use as the integrated input. You can parameterize the P, I, and D gains of this block with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of changing control gains.




Deriviative Input Specify the signal representing the first-time derivative of the input.

P Gain Specify the gain applied to the input signal.

I Gain Specify the gain applied to the integral of the input signal.

D Gain Specify the gain applied to the derivative input.

Initial Condition Enter the initial condition for the input signal.




Adams/ViewPlanar Joint Tool

488

Planar Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Planar Joint Tool

Creates a planar joint that allows a plane on one part to slide and rotate in the plane of another part. The location of the planar joint determines a point in space through which the joint’s plane of motion passes.

The orientation vector of the planar joint is perpendicular to the joint’s plane of motion. The rotational axis of the planar joint, which is normal to the joint’s plane of motion, is parallel to the orientation vector.

Learn about:


489P - ZPlanar Joint Tool

• Modeling Two-Dimensional Body Using Planar Option






• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of these options, see Connecting Constraints to Parts.



• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.






Adams/ViewPlane Tool

490

Plane Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Plane Tool

Creates a two-dimensional box. You can draw a plane’s length and width in the plane of the screen or the Working grid, if it is turned on. You will find planes most useful when you are creating contact forces between objects, as explained in Contacts.

When you create a plane, you can select to create a new part consisting of the plane geometry or add the plane geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed of only wire geometry.

Learn about Creating Two-Dimensional Plane.

Notes on Modifying Planes: One hotpoint appears after you draw the plane. It lets you modify the length and height of the plane. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds plane to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the plane to ground.


491P - ZPlate Tool

Plate Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Plate Tool

Creates a plate, which is an extruded polygon solid with rounded corners. You create a plate by indicating the location of its corners. You must select at least three locations. The first location you select acts as an anchor point defining the position and orientation of the plate in space. The Plate tool creates markers at each location. The marker at the anchor point is called the reference marker.

After you indicate the locations, the Plate tool creates a polygon with the specified number of sides and extrudes it. By default, it creates the plate with a depth that is 1 and has corners with radii of 1 in current length units. Before drawing, you can also specify the thickness and radius of the corners of the plate.

Note: The reference marker of the plate determines the plate orientation and defines the plane of the plate to its x and y axes. Adams/View defines the x and y axes of the reference marker using the working grid, if it is turned on, or the view screen. Adams/View defines the plate vertices as the component of distance from the reference marker to the vertex marker as defined along the reference marker's y-axis. Therefore, if you choose a plate vertex marker that is out-of-plane from the xy plane of the reference marker, the vertex marker is not the actual plate vertex.

Adams/ViewPlate Tool

492

Learn about Creating a Plate.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds plate to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the plate to ground.


Thickness Select and then enter the thickness of the plate.

If you do not specify a thickness, Adams/View creates the plate with a thickness of 1 in current length units.

Radius Select and then enter the radius of the plate corners.

If you do not specify a radius, Adams/View creates the plate with corners with radii of 1 in current length units.

Note: After you draw a plate, a hotpoint appears at the reference marker. It lets you change the depth of the plate. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry

You can also use the Geometry Modify Shape Plate dialog box to change the markers used to define the plate, the thickness of the plate, and the radius of the corners of the plate.

493P - ZPlot Design Evaluation Results

Plot Design Evaluation Results


Automatically plots the results of a parametric analysis.

Learn about Generating Plots.


Result Set Enter the name of the parametric analysis result set you want to plot.

Create plot of measure/objective value vs. run

Select if you want to generate a plot of the measure or objectives versus the variable value, trial number, or iteration number.

Create plot of measure vs. time for all runs

Select if you want to generate a plot of the measure or objectives versus time with a curve for each trial or iteration. If you use this option,you must have specified a measure or an objective that refers to a measure or result set component (not a macro or function). In addition, you must have saved the results from the individual runs. Learn more about Saving Results from individual runs.

Adams/ViewPlots Transfer Function

494

Plots Transfer Function

Build → System Elements → Transfer Function → New or Modify → Check Format and Display Plot

Displays a plot of the transfer function you created using the Create/Modify Transfer Function dialog box. Learn more about Creating and Modifying Transfer Functions.

495P - ZPlots Transfer Function


Plot Select the type of plot to display:

• Magnitude - The magnitude of the transfer function element's frequency response.

• Phase Angle - Phase of the transfer function element's frequency response.

• Real Part - Real part of the frequency response of the transfer function element.

• Imaginary Part - Imaginary part of the frequency response of the transfer function element.

Plot Display Display a plot of the transfer function. Right-click to perform operations on the plot, such as clear the plot. Right-click on each element in the plot to delete that element.

Note: There are several operations displayed in the shortcut menu when you right-click but many are not supported in the plot display.

Min Set the minimum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to enable the Redraw button.

Max Set the maximum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to enable the Redraw button.

Scale Select either:

• log - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the same distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are equally spaced.

• lin - Displays the axis values linearly, starting at 0.

Redraw Redraws the plot after you change the scale of the plot.

Adams/ViewPlugin Manager

496

Plugin Manager

Tools → Plugin Manager Shared Dialog Box

Manages the add-on modules or plugins to Adams/View, which expand its functionality. The MSC plugins include Adams/Vibration, Adams/Controls, and Adams/Durability. The Plugin Manager lets you run these products from within Adams/View and set Adams/View to load them automatically when you start up. It also lets you unload them while in your current session of Adams/View, and view whether or not there is a license available to run them.

Learn about Loading and Unloading Plugins.


Name Displays the names of the plugins installed.

Load To load a plugin, next to the name of the plugin, select Yes. To unload a plugin, clear the selection of Yes.

Load at Startup To load a plugin automatically at startup, next to the name of the plugin, select Yes. To not have the plugin load automatically, clear the selection of Yes.

Description Displays a description of the plugin selected in the Name column.

Version Displays the version of the plugin selected in the Name column.

Author Displays the company that published the plugin selected in the Name column.

License Displays the number of total licenses of the plugin selected in the Name column, and how many of those licenses are available. A license must be available for you to load the plugin.

497P - ZPoint Motion

Point Motion

Right-click point motion → Modify

Lets you modify a single Point Motion.

Learn more about:



• DOF Removed by Motion


Name Enter the name of the point motion to modify.

Moving Point Change the marker that defines the location of the motion on the parts. Learn About Point Motion.

Reference Point Change the marker that defines the orientation of the motion on the parts.

Direction Specify direction axis on reference point marker.

Define Using Enter how you want to define the motion. Select Function to define using a numerical value or Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.






Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed to the MOTSUB user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is optional.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine MOTSUB. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.

Type Set to Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration to specify how motion magnitude is defined.

Displacement IC and Velocity IC

Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.

Adams/ViewPoint Motion/Joint Motion

498

Point Motion/Joint Motion

Right-click point/joint motion → Modify

Modifies either a Point Motion or a Joint motion. Its title and options change depending on the type of motion. Select a motion below for more information on the options available:

• Point Motion

• Joint Motion

499P - ZPoint Tool

Point Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Point Tool

Defines locations in three-dimensional space upon which you can build your model. Points allow you to build parameterization between objects, as well as position objects. For example, you can attach a link to points so that each time you move the points, the link’s geometry changes accordingly.

You can also use points to define the location where modeling objects connect, such as the point where a joint connects two parts. Points do not define an orientation, only a location.

As you create a point, you define whether Adams/View should add it to ground or to another part. In addition, you specify whether other parts near the same location should be attached (parameterized) to the point. If you attach other bodies to the point, then the location of those bodies is tied to the location of that point. As you change the location of the point, the location of all attached bodies change accordingly.

Learn about:

• Creating Points

• Parameterization

Note: You should not attach a part’s center of mass marker to a point, however. If you attach a center of mass marker, Adams/View removes the parameterization whenever it recomputes the center of a part, unless you defined mass properties for the part.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds point to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the point to ground.


Don't Attach/Attach Near

Don't Attach - Keep other objects surrounding the point unattached to the point. There will be no parameterization relationship set up.

Attach Near - Attach other nearby objects to the point. When you change the location of the points, the other objects locations and orientations update accordingly.

Adams/ViewPoint Tool

500

Note: After creating the point, you can modify its name and set its location using the Table Editor. Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.

501P - ZPoint-Curve Constraint Tool

Point-Curve Constraint Tool

Build → Joints → Point-Curve Constraint

The point-curve constraint restricts a fixed point defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second part. The first part is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second part. The curve on the second part can be planar or spatial or open or closed. The first part cannot lift off the second part; it must always lie on the curve. A point-curve constraint removes two translational Degrees of freedom from your model.

When you specify the location of the point-curve constraint on the first part, Adams/View creates a marker at that location. The marker is called the I marker. The I marker can only translate in one direction relative to the curve. The I marker, however, is free to rotate in all three directions.

You can use the point-curve constraint to model a Pin-in-slot mechanism or a Simple Cam Follower mechanism where a lever arm is articulated by the profile of a revolving cam.

When modeling a pin-in-slot mechanism, the point-curve constraint keeps the center of the pin in the center of the slot, while allowing it to move freely along the slot and rotate in the slot.

Learn more about:

• Point-Curve Constraints

• Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints


Curve/Edge Select whether you are defining the point-curve constraint along a curve or an edge of a part:

• Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered curves.

• Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For example, you can use a Parasolid object representing a cam that you imported into Adams/View.

Adams/ViewPoint-to-Point Measure

502

Point-to-Point Measure

Select object → Build → Measure → Point-to-Point → Create/Modify

Measures kinematic characteristics, such as displacement or velocity, between two locations on a model during a Simulation.

Learn more about:

• Point-to-Point Measures

• Methods for Creating Point-to-Point Characteristics




To Point Enter the marker or point to which to measure.

From Point Enter the marker or point from which to measure.

Characteristic Select the kinematic characteristic to be measured. The values you enter in the next text boxes depend on whether you select a translational or angular characteristics.

Learn about Point-to-Point Characteristics You Can Measure.

Component Select the component in which you are interested. The components available depend on the coordinate system.

Cartisian/Cylindrical/Spherical For translational characteristics only, set to the associated coordinate system (Cartesian, spherical, or cylindrical).

Represent Coordinates in Specify:

• A marker along whose axes the measure will be represented.

• Leave blank to represent in the ground reference frame.

Do time derivatives in (Available if you selected translational velocity, translational acceleration, or angular acceleration as the characteristic.)

You can:

• Enter a marker representing the measure reference frame.

• Leave blank to use ground as the reference frame.



503P - ZPolyline Tool

Polyline Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Polyline Tool

Creates single- and multi-line segments (polylines) and create open or closed polylines (polygons)

Before drawing lines or polylines, you can specify the length of the line or lines to be created so you can quickly create perfectly sized lines and polylines.

When creating a single line, you can also specify the angle of the line. The angle you specify is relative to the x-axis of the global coordinate system or the working grid, if it is turned on. When you create line geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the line geometry or add the line geometry to an existing part. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed of only wire geometry. You can extrude the lines into solid geometry that has mass. For more information, see Extruding Construction Geometry Along a Path.

Learn about Creating Lines and Polylines.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the polyline to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the polyline to ground.


Polyline/One Line Select either:

• Polyline - Creates a line made up of multiple lines.

• One Line - Creates a single line.

Adams/ViewPolyline Tool

504

Length Set the length of the single line or the individual lines making up the polyline. This should give you greater control.

Angle Set the angle of the line. If you set the angle for a polyline, Adams/View creates all the lines making up the polyline at the same angle.

Closed Set to create a closed polygon.


Note: Adams/View places hotpoints at the endpoint of each line segment after you draw the objects. The hotpoints let you reshape the lines. If you create a closed polyline, Adams/View maintains it as a closed polyline regardless of how you move the hotpoints. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

You can also use the line or polyline modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that make up the line or polyline. You can also read in location points from a file. For more information, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location Table.

505P - ZPrecision Move

Precision Move

Edit → Move

Moves objects either by increments or to precise coordinates.

You can select to move the objects relative to a specified object’s coordinate system, called the reference coordinate system. You can also select to move objects relative to the screen. In addition, you can use the Precision Move dialog box to view the coordinates of one object in relation to another.

Learn about Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box.

Option Description

Rotate Y, X, Z Select each to rotate an object with respect to a body-fixed or reference coordinate system in incremental amounts specified in the +/- text box. You specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to/About the options.

Translate Y, X, Z Select each box to translate an object with respect to a body-fixed or reference coordinate system in incremental amounts specified in the +/- text box. You specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to/About the options.

Relocate the Enter the object or objects to be moved.

Adams/ViewPrecision Move

506

Relative to/About the Select to define the coordinate system whose axes are to be used for defining rotations and translations. For rotations:

• Relative to rotates objects in place (their locations do not change) and their rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the Relative to the text box.

• About the rotates the objects rotate about the origin of the coordinate system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the About the text box.

Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either Relative to the or the About the.

Model/Part/Marker/View/Entity/Screen

By default, the Precision Move dialog box moves the selected objects relative to the default coordinate system. You can specify that Adams/View use a different coordinate system as the reference coordinate system. The rotational and translational coordinates you enter for the move or the incremental values you select are with respect to the origin and orientation of this coordinate system.

You can select the following types of objects:

• Model - Global coordinate system.

• Part or marker - Part or marker in your model.

• View - Adams/View defined View, such as front, right, or left. Use the Database Navigator to select the name of the view.

• Entity - Any entity, including those that are not on the screen. Entities also include the working grid and gravity.

• Screen - The plane of the screen. When you select to move objects relative to the screen, the Precision Move dialog box changes the dials on the left to those shown in this picture. The dials translate and rotate the objects:

• Think of the translation as pulling the object in the direction of the arrow. For example, when you select the small arrow that points up, you pull an object up along the vertical axis. The double arrows to the right translate an object along an axis that is normal to the screen (works only if the view is in perspective mode).

• Think of the rotation as pushing on an object at that point. For example, if you select the arrow that points to the right, you are pushing the horizontal axis back, resulting in a positive rotation around the vertical axis.

Option Description

507P - ZPrecision Move

C1 - C3 Enter the coordinates to which you want to move an object relative to another object’s coordinate system (the reference coordinate system). You specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to the and About the options.

Enter the coordinates in the default coordinate system (Cartesian, spherical, or cylindrical).

Note: If you select Load, C1 displays the current coordinates of an object.

A1 - A3 Enter the coordinates to which you want to rotate an object relative to another object’s coordinate system (the reference coordinate system). You specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to the and About the options.

Enter the coordinates in the default coordinate system (Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical).

Note: If you select Load, C1 displays the current coordinates of an object.

Load Select to view the current coordinates of an object with respect to the coordinate system of another object (reference coordinate system). Adams/View displays the coordinates in the six position text boxes (C1 through C3 for translation and A1 through A3 for rotation).

For example, if you want to ensure that two markers, which you want to connect using an inplane joint, are in the same plane, you can set one marker as the object to be moved and the other object as the relative to object. You can then view the rotation coordinates of the first marker to ensure that they are (0, 0, 0).

Option Description

Adams/ViewPrint

508

Print

Adams/PostProcessor → File → Print

You can print pages directly to a printer or store them in a file for printing at a later time.

Note: Adams/PostProcessor only prints the portion of a report or table that fits on the paper.

• To print a multi-page report, open the report in a browser and print from there.

• To print a multi-page table, export the table in HTML format, open the report in a browser, and print from there. Pages with only reports and tables on them print significantly faster than pages with mixed views (for example, plot and report), depending on the type of printer being used.


Print to Select either:

• Printer:

• On Linux, in the Print to area, select Printer and enter an operating system command to execute the print job (for example, lpr -Psp2 or lp -c -Ppd1).

• On Windows, select also show Windows print dialog to display the default Windows printer dialog box from which you can select a printer. The dialog box appears after you select OK.

• File:

• In the Print to area, select File and enter the location and name of the file to which you want to print the page.

Note that if you print more than one page to a file, Adams/PostProcessor uses the page number of each page as the name of the file.

If you selected to print to a file, select the type of file format. You can select Postscript, HPGL, Encapsulated Postscript, tif, jpg, xpm, bmp, and Native Windows (Windows only).

Note: If you select jpg format, you can set the level of quality.

(A)Paper Size Select the size of paper, or to accept the current default paper for the printer, select default.

Landscape Select if you want the page to print horizontally.

Portrait Select if you want the page to print vertically.

509P - ZPrint

Black and White Select if you want the page to print in black and white.

If you select Black and White, Adams/PostProcessor prints all colors in black and the background in white even if you are using a color printer.

Selecting black and white is generally considered more readable for presentations, but you should use altering line style or line thickness to distinguish between the curves on the plot.

Color Select if you want to print the plot in color.

If you print a plot in color but send it to a black-and-white printer, the printer approximates the colors using grayscale.

Current Page Select to print the page you currently have displayed.

All Pages Select to print all the pages.

Page Range Select to print specific pages and enter the first page and last page.


Adams/ViewRange Measure

510

Range Measure

Build → Measure → Range → New/Modify

Creates range measures with which you can obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure. Ranges dynamically calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any measure.

Learn about Range Measures.



Type Select the range characteristic to measure.

Of Measure Enter an existing measure to analyze.



511P - ZReading a Command File

Reading a Command FileBefore reading a command file, set the display and error options as described in Command File dialog box help.

To read (import) a command file:

1. From the Tools menu, select Read Command File.

2. Select the command file to import.

Shortcut: Press F2.

Learn about importing command files using Import - Adams/View Command Files.

Adams/ViewRename

512

Rename

Database Navigator → Rename

Renames any object in the Modeling database.

Learn about Renaming Objects Through the Database Navigator.


Text box Enter the new name for the object you selected in the tree list.

Apply Select to apply the new name to the object.

513P - ZRename Dialog Box

Rename Dialog Box

Tools → Dialog Box → Modify → Dialog Box → Rename

Renames a dialog box.

Learn more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.


Name Enter a new name for your dialog box.

Adams/ViewRename Object

514

Rename Object

Edit → Rename

Lets you rename any object in your Modeling database. You can change the default name assigned to the object but you cannot change its full name.

Learn About Object Naming.


New Name Enter the name you want to assign to the object.

Select to display the Database Navigator and rename another object in the database.

515P - ZResults (.res) Content

Results (.res) Content

Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Results (.res) Content

Selecting Results (.res) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the content of the results file.

Select the options for the content you want in the results file.

Adams/ViewResults (.res) Options

516

Results (.res) Options

Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Results (.res) Options

Selecting Results (.res) Options as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the format of the results file.


Comment Enter a title for the results file.

Format Set the type of format:

• Binary - By default, Adams/View saves the results file as a binary file. You cannot view a binary file nor can you move it to different computer platforms. It, however, provides greater precision, faster access, and more compact size than a standard Adams/View text file.

• ASCII - Standard Adams/View text file with no formatting.

• XML - XML is a license-free, platform-independent file format used often for Web applications. The XML format's structured data representation is an ideal framework for storing Adams information. Because XML is an ASCII file, you can use it across all platforms and read it in a text editor. Although the formatting is not optimized for reading in text editors, you will find it useful to quickly check the progress of a simulation, or debugging a model. You can tag XML-formatted results for retrieval from many database or pdm systems. Freely available tools for reading and writing XML files makes it easy to incorporate Adams results into other programs.

If you selected XML as the format, the following options are active:

Decimal Places Specify how many digits are written after the decimal point for real numbers. The default value is 17 decimal places (full precision for recovery of double-precision numbers).

Round Off Set to On to turn on the roundoff feature for real numbers (the default is disabled). The Significant digits option controls the actual numbers of digits retained during rounding off.

Scientific Notation Specify the boundaries at which the format for real numbers switches from a fixed point format to scientific notation. The values are exponents for the base ten. The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that any number less than or equal to 1.0E-04 or greater than or equal to 1.0E+05 will be written in scientific notation.

517P - ZResults (.res) Options

Shift Width Specify a positive integer that defines the number of spaces added at the left of each level of hierarchy in the XML data structure. The default is zero spaces to minimize the file size, but provides the lowest level Kof readability. The following shows an example of a portion of an XML file when Shift Width is set to 3.

-------------------------------------xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><Results> < Analysis> < ModelInfo title="model_1" /> < Units angle="deg" length="mm" mass="kg" time="sec" />...

Significant digits Specify how many significant figures of a real number are retained during round off (when round off is enabled). The default is to use ten significant figures. This number is distinct from the number of places actually printed for a real number, which the Decimal Places option controls. Significant Figures includes digits to the left and right of the decimal point.

Trailing Zeros Set to On to specify that trailing zeros are printed for real numbers. The default is not to print trailing zeros. When enabled, all the digits after the decimal point will be printed, whether they are zero or not. When disabled, any zeros at the end of the fractional part of the number will be dropped, leaving the last digit as a non-zero digit.

Zero Threshold Enter the zero threshold value for numbers being written to an output file. If a number has an absolute value smaller than the zero threshold value, then it will be written out as zero. This value is independent of units.


Adams/ViewRevolute Joint Tool

518

Revolute Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Revolute Joint Tool

Creates a revolute joint that allows the rotation of one part with respect to another part about a common axis. The revolute joint can be located anywhere along the axis about which the joint’s parts can rotate with respect to each other.

The orientation of the revolute joint defines the direction of the axis about which the joint’s parts can rotate with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the revolute joint is parallel to the orientation vector and passes through the location.

Learn about:


519P - ZRevolute Joint Tool







• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of these options, see Connecting Constraints to Parts.









Adams/ViewRevolution Tool

520

Revolution Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Revolution Tool

Creates geometry by revolving a profile. You specify the profile and the axis about which to revolve the profile. The Revolution tool revolves the profile around the axis in a counterclockwise direction (right-hand rule)

You can create an open or closed revolution. If you create a closed revolution, the Revolution tool closes the profile by drawing a line segment between the profile’s first and last points and creates a solid revolution from this profile. If you leave the revolution open, the Revolution tool creates a skin that has no mass properties.

You can also select to create the revolution using the Non-analytical Method or Analytical Method.

Learn about Creating a Revolution.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the revolution to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the revolution to ground.


Create by Picking Select:

• Points to select the locations on the screen that define the profile.

• Curve to select the curve to be used to define the profile.

521P - ZRevolution Tool

Closed Select to create a closed revolution. (Available only when you set Create by Picking to Points.)

Analytical Select to create a revolution using the analytical method. Clear to use the non-analytical method


Note: After you draw a revolution, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to create the revolution, the hotpoints appear at the vertexes of the profile. If you used the analytical method, hotpoints appear at points along the curves that define the revolution. The hotpoints let you resize and reshape the revolution. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

You can also use the revolution modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that make up the profile and read in location points from a file. For more information, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location Table.

Adams/ViewRotational Motion Tool

522

Rotational Motion Tool

Build → Joints → Rotational Motion Tool

Rotates the first part that the joint connects about the z-axis of a second part. The right-hand rule determines the sign of the motion. The z-axis of the first part must be aligned with the z-axis of the second part at all times. The angle is zero when the x-axis of the first part is also aligned with the x-axis of the second part.

Learn about:

• Overview of Motion

• Creating Joint Motion


Rot. Speed Specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By default, creates a rotational motion with a speed of 30 degrees per second.

To enter a function expression or User-written subroutine, right-click the Rot. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.



523P - ZSave Binary Notebook As

Save Binary Notebook As

Postprocessing → File → Save As

In stand-alone mode, Adams/PostProcessor saves your current session in notebooks, which are binary files that store all the simulation results, animations, and plots that you are working on. You can also save a copy of a notebook with a different name or in a different location. When you save a notebook, Adams/Posrocessor saves all the pages you created and their content. It also saves the simulation results in the binary file. The results are not associated with the files you imported.


File Name Enter a name for the notebook.

To save the document in a different directory, right-click the File Name text box, select Browse, and then select the desired directory.

Adams/ViewSave Database

524

Save Database

File → Save Database

Alerts you that Adams/View is saving the current Modeling database as an Adams/View binary file and asks you if you want to create a backup file. To save the model data in another format, see the File Export dialog box.

Learn about Modeling Database.


model_name exists. Create backup?

• Yes - Creates a backup file of the existing database file and saves the database. When Adams/View creates a backup file, it adds a % to the end of the file extension (for example, model.bin%).

• No - Overwrites the existing database file with the current database contents without creating a backup.

• Cancel - Exits the command without saving the database.

525P - ZSave Database As

Save Database As

File → Save Database As

Saves the current Modeling database to a binary file with a new name. This lets you keep several versions of your database under different names and reduces the risk of losing your work if you inadvertently change or delete your model. Saving your modeling database saves all modeling information, including any customization changes you made.

To save the model data in another format, export the data as explained Exchanging Data in Adams. To save your preferences, see Saving and Restoring Settings.


File Name Specify the name you want to assign to the file.

If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box.


Adams/ViewSave Design Evaluation Results

526

Save Design Evaluation Results


Allows you to save a single set of results for a parametric analysis.

Learn about Saving Results.


Name Enter a name for the analysis.

Auto-Increment Name Select if you want Adams/View to add a unique number at the end of the name. Adams/View copies the current parametric results to a new analysis with the name you specify.

527P - ZSave Model at Simulation Position

Save Model at Simulation Position


Saves the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use it as your new design configuration.

Learn about Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.


New Model Enter a name for the model to be created.

Analysis Specify the simulation containing the frame you want to save.

Frame Enter the frame number of the configuration you want to save to a new model.

Adams/ViewSave Run Results

528

Save Run Results


Saves the results of the last Simulation under a new name so that you can animate or plot the results at a later time. Saving simulation results is particularly important when you want to compare the results from several design variations.

Be sure to save your Modeling database after you save your simulation results (File → Save Database).

Note: By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the modeling database, not to external Adams/Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams/Solver analysis files, set the simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting Simulation Controls. To export the results to analysis files, see Export - Adams/Solver Analysis Files.


Name Enter the name for the simulation results.

Auto-Increment Name Select if you want Adams/View to automatically increment the run names when you save subsequent simulations.

529P - ZScrew Joint Tool

Screw Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Screw Joint Tool

Creates a screw joint that specifies the rotation of one part about an axis, as the part translates along the axis with respect to a second part.

The screw joint does not require that the two parts remain parallel with respect to the axis of rotation and translation. However, the z-axis of the coordinate system marker on the first part and the z-axis of the coordinate system marker on the second part must always be parallel and co-directed. Although the screw joint does not enforce this parallelism, the chain of parts and joints that connects the two markers should.

After you create a screw joint, you need to specify the pitch value. The pitch value is the distance from one peak on a thread of the screw to the next thread. It defines the amount of translational displacement of the first part for every rotation of the second part about the axis of rotation.

By default, Adams/View sets the pitch value to 1. The pitch value is in length units. A positive pitch creates a right-hand thread, and a negative pitch creates a left-hand thread.

Adams/ViewScrew Joint Tool

530







• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints to Parts.









531P - ZScripted Simulation

Scripted Simulation

Simulate → Scripted

Display tools for performing Scripted simulation.

Learn about Performing a Scripted Simulation.

Adams/ViewScripted Simulation

532

Icon Description

Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.

You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to continue simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation and continue.

Shortcut: Double-click the Select tool.

Stops any further processing, and the modeling objects appear in the positions that Adams/Solver last successfully calculated.

Starts the Simulation.

Replays an Animation of the last Simulation. Replaying an animation displays the results much faster than if you simulate the model again and watch the frames update as the solution calculates results. You can also replay an animation of a saved simulation; for more information, see Animation Controls.

How Adams/View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you have finished the simulation and reset the model back to its initial design configuration.

• If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the animation, Adams/View animates the model up to the last simulation step and leaves your model there.

• If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the animation, Adams/View automatically sets the model back to the initial design configuration when the animation is complete.

Model Verify Tool

Simulation Script Name Enter the name of the simulation Script.

Reset before and after Sets your model back to its initial design configuration before you run the Simulation.

Interactive/Scripted Displays tools for controlling either an interactive or Scripted simulation.

533P - ZScripted Simulation

Save/Delete Simulation Results

• Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can save the simulation results.

• Right-click to select a set of simulation results to delete.

Save Simulated Position

Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name.

Displays the Animation Controls dialog box.

Displays the Linear Modes Controls dialog box.

Displays Adams/PostProcessor.

Simulation Settings... Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the Simulation performed.

Icon Description

Adams/ViewSecond-Order Filter Block

534

Second-Order Filter Block


The second-order filter block creates a second-order filter by specifying the undamped natural frequency and the damping ratio. You can parameterize the undamped natural frequency or damping ratio constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the frequency or damping ratio of the associated block.




Natural Frequency

Specify the natural frequency.

Damping Ratio Specify the damping ratio.




535P - ZSelect List

Select List

Database Navigator → Select List

Allows you to view objects that you've selected. You can also add and remove objects from the select list.

Learn about:

• Managing the Select List

• Showing , Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator


Add Select to add objects from the tree list or view window.

Remove Select to remove the highlighted objects from the list.

Clear All Select to clear all objects from the select list.

Adams/ViewSelect List Manager

536

Select List Manager

Edit → Select List

Lets you view objects you’ve selected and add to and remove objects from the select list. You can add and remove objects based on their name, type, group, and parent.

Learn more about Selecting Objects.



Number of Objects in Select List

Lists the objects currently selected (in the select list).

Object Name Enter the name of the object that you want to add, and then select the Add button next to the text box.

Add Select to add the object in the Object Name text box to the select list.

Name Filter Enter the name of the objects that you want to add to or remove from the select list. Type any wildcards that you want included. For example, to remove all objects that contain a particular character, such as an h.

Type Filter Set to the type of object or objects that you want to add or remove. To display all the different object types, select Browse.

Scope Limit the scope of objects to be added or removed to only objects belonging to a certain object by entering the name of the parent object. For example,you can tell Adams/View to limit the scope from all markers to only markers belonging to a PART_1.

Expand Groups Select to add or remove objects in a group to the Select List Manager. Before adding the object to the select list, you can set whether or not you want to list each object in the group in the Select List Manager or just list the name of the group.

Remove Objects Select and then select the objects to be removed from a list.

Tips To select objects: in a list.

Clear All Select to quickly remove all objects in the select list.

Refresh Select to update the list of objects in the Select List Manager window so that it reflects any selections that you made using the mouse or Shortcut menus.

Add Select to add the object in objects to and from the select list based on search criteria.

Remove Removes multiple objects from the select list based on search criteria.

537P - ZSetting Screen and Printer Fonts

Setting Screen and Printer Fonts

Settings → Fonts

Changes the font Adams/View uses to display text in a view, such as the name of a part or a note on the screen, or to print text to a printer. The fonts available for displaying text in a view are those available with your operating system. The fonts available for printing text are a fixed set of 12 fonts.

Note: Your printer may not support all of these printer fonts.


Screen Font Enter the name of the font you want Adams/View to use to display text in a view.

To browse for a font, right-click the text box, point to Browse, and then select a font.

Postscript Font Select the font you want to use to print the text.

Adams/ViewSimulation Controls

538

Simulation Controls

Simulate → Interactive/Scripted

Main toolbox → Click

Displays tools for controlling Interactive Simulation and Scripted simulations. Select a topic below:

• Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

• Scripted Simulation

539P - ZSingle-Component Force tool

Single-Component Force tool

Build → Forces → Single-Component Tool

Applies a translational force in one of two ways:

• To one movable part - You select the part, the location of the point of application, and the direction. Adams/View automatically applies the force to ground.

• To two parts - You select the parts and the locations of the point of application on each part. Adams/View automatically defines the direction based on the line of sight between the two locations. The direction is continuously updated during Simulation.

You cannot use the line-of-sight method if the two points that define the force will become coincident during a simulation because the force direction becomes undefined. When running a simulation, Adams/Solver warns you when the points become nearly coincident. The following shows an example of a warning:

You can ignore the warning only if the computed force is zero when the points are coincident (for example, when you are using a BISTOP function that is inactive when its markers are coincident). Otherwise, having coincident points is a modeling error with unpredictable results.

Learn more about:

Caution: The direction cosines for SFORCE model_1.FORCE_1 are invalid. This is usually caused by a (nearly) zero length SFORCE or SPRINGDAMPER.

Adams/ViewSingle-Component Force tool

540

• Single-Component Forces


Run-Time Direction Specify the number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can select the following:

• Space Fixed

• Body Moving

• Two Bodies

Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.

Construction Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:

• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.

• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a part.

Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:

• Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let Adams/View use a default value.

• Spring-Damper - Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and lets Adams/View create a function expression for damping and stiffness based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the Main toolbox to access the force tool.)

• Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.

If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:

Force Value Enter a constant torque value.

If you selected Spring-Damper, the following two options appear:



541P - ZSingle-Component Torque tool

Single-Component Torque tool

Build → Forces → Single-Component Torque Tool

Applies a rotational force to either one part or two about a specified axis. You specify the point of application and the direction. The following figure shows an example of a single-component torque applied to one part.

Learn more about:

• Single-Component Forces


Run-Time Direction Specify the number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can select the following:

• Space Fixed

• Body Moving

• Two Bodies

Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.

Construction Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:

• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.


Adams/ViewSingle-Component Torque tool

542


• Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let Adams/View use a default value.

• Spring-Damper - Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and lets Adams/View create a function expression for damping and stiffness based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the Main toolbox to access the force tool.)


If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:

Force Value Enter a constant torque value.

If you selected Spring-Damper, the following two options appear:




543P - ZSingle Point Motion Tool

Single Point Motion Tool

Build → Joints → Single Point Motion Tool

Creates a single Point Motion.

Learn more about:



• Types of Motion

• Creating Point Motions Using the Motion Tools



Set how you want the motion connected to parts:





Set how you want the motion oriented:

• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the motion along the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.

• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the motion along a direction vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.

Characteristic Specify the direction of the motion.

Adams/ViewSingle Point Motion Tool

544

Trans. Speed If you set Characteristic to Translational, specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By default, Adams/View creates a translational motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per second.

To enter a function expression or user-written subroutine, right-click the Trans. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to display the Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see Function Builder and the Adams/View Function Builder online help.

Rot. Speed If you set Characteristic to Rotational, specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By default, creates a rotational motion with a speed of 30 degrees per second.

To enter a function expression or user-written subroutine, right-click the Rot. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder.




545P - ZSix-Component General Force tool

Six-Component General Force tool

Build → Forces → Six-Component General Tool

Creates rotational and translational force between two parts in your model using six orthogonal components.

Learn more about:

• Multi-Component Forces



• 1 Location




Normal to Grid/

Pick Feature





• Constant - Lets you enter a constant force and torque values or lets Adams/View use a default value.

• Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and lets Adams/View create a function expression for damping and stiffness based on the coefficient values.


If you selected Constant Force, the following options appears:

Force and Torque Enter a constant force value.

Adams/ViewSix-Component General Force tool

546

If you selected Bushing Like, the following options appear:

K and KT Enter the stiffness coefficients.

C and CT Enter the damping coefficients.


547P - ZSizes

Sizes

Dialog-Box Builder → Preferences → Sizes

Displays the default size of a new interface object if you create it by clicking in the new dialog box or container.

It does not display the size for the objects you created and modified by dragging the item to a desired size.

Learn more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.


Default Height Displays the default height for the object.

Default Width Displays the default width for the object.

Adams/ViewSnap Grid

548

Snap Grid

Dialog Box-Builder →Preferences → Snap Grid

Allows you to restrict the possible positions and sizes of your interface objects, similar to the Working grid in the modeling window.

When you drag an item with the mouse to move or resize it, the mouse position will snap to the nearest grid point. Because the snap grid points are not visible, and the default grid is very fine (2 pixel distance) it is generally not very noticeable.

You can turn this option on or off in the Option menu in the Dialog-Box Builder.


Horizontal Grid Spacing Enter a value to set the horizontal distance between grid points.

Vertical Grid Spacing Enter a value to set the vertical distance between grid points.

Horizontal Grid Offset/

Vertical Grid Offset

Enter the number of pixels from the top left border to begin grip snaps.

549P - ZSolver Settings

Solver Settings

Settings → Solver → Dynamics/Kinematics/Equilibrium/Initial

Conditions/Executable/Display/Output/Optimizer/Debugging

Displays options for setting the Simulation depending on the command you selected:

• Dynamics

• Kinematics

• Equillibrium

• Initial Conditions

• Executable

• Display

• Output

• Pattern for Jacobian

• Optimizer

• Debugging

• Contacts

• Flexible Bodies

Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Contacts

550

Solver Settings - Contacts

Settings → Solver → Contacts

You can set default options for the performing three-dimensional contact operations.


Category Set to Contacts.

Model Enter the name of the model associated with the settings.

Geometry Library Select the geometry library to be used for contact operations:

• Parasolids - Specifies that the Parasolid geometry library to be used for three-dimensional contact determination. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) supports Parasolid version 19.0.17.

• Default_Library - Specifies that the default geometry library to be used for three-dimensional contact determination. The default library is based on RAPID, a polygon-based interference detection package developed at the University of North Carolina. Currently, Adams/Solver supports RAPID version 2.01.

For many models, the Default Library can substantially reduce simulation time. Because it is polygon-based, however, it is not always as accurate as the Parasolids geometry engine. Parasolids is an exact boundary-representation geometric modeler, which makes it highly accurate, but not as fast as a polygon-based engine. For these reasons, you can switching from one to the other depending on your needs.

Faceting Tolerances Specify the faceting tolerances when you select the Default_Library as the geometry library (see above). Faceting is the process of approximating the surface of an object by a mesh of triangles. All polygon-based geometry engines used faceted representations of surfaces.

The default value Faceting Tolerances is 300. Increasing this value will result in a finer mesh of triangles, which gives a more accurate representation of surfaces which are curved. Increasing the tolerance, however, also increases the memory requirements of the geometry engine and adds to the computational overhead, which makes it run slower. Setting the faceting tolerance to values greater than 1000 is not recommended. Values smaller than 300 will give negligible performance improvements. The faceting tolerance has no effect on inherently polygonal surfaces such as boxes.

551P - ZSolver Settings - Debugging

Solver Settings - Debugging

Settings → Solver → Debugging

You can set default options for the debugging information that appears when you run a Simulation.

You can also turn on the display of Strip charts and step through a simulation. Learn more about Debugging Your Model.


Category Set to Debugging.

Debugger Set to:

• On - Turn on the Simulation Debugger

• Off - Turn off the Simulation debugger

Display Set to:

• None - Displays no information.

• Table - Displays the Debug table.

• Highlighting - Highlights those objects experiencing the most error or the most change, force, or acceleration, depending on the element you select to track. Note that selecting highlighting of objects will significantly slow down your simulation.

• Table and Highlighting - Displays both the Debug table and highlights objects. The objects highlighted are the same objects shown at the top of the Element list in the Debug table.

Track Maximum Set to track:

• Error - Track objects with the largest equation residual error. This number is an indicator of how far Adams/Solver is from a solution. It should decrease with every iteration.

• Force - Track objects generating the greatest force. Includes forces and constraints.

• Change - Track variables with the most change.

• Acceleration - Track objects experiencing the greatest acceleration. Includes only parts.

More Select to display options for stepping through a simulation and displaying strip charts.

Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Debugging

552

Single Step Set to Yes to single step through a simulation. The Simulation Debugger pauses after each simulation output step, time step, or iteration so you can closely inspect the simulation behavior. You can step through a simulation with any of the other debugger options selected, such as strip charts, tables, or object highlighting. As you run a simulation, Adams/View displays a dialog box that gives you the option to continue with the simulation or cancel it.

Display Stripchart Select the type of strip chart you want to display to provide you with insight into the simulation.

Learn about the types of strip charts.


553P - ZSolver Settings - Display

Solver Settings - Display

Settings → Solver → Display

Controls how Adams/View displays your model during a single Simulation or how it displays your model during a parametric analysis. You can also set the information that Adams/View displays during a parametric analysis.

Use the Solver Settings dialog box so you see just the amount of information you need during a simulation. For example, when you perform a simulation on a new model, set up the display to see the model change as the solution proceeds to determine if the simulation is working properly. Updating the display of the model frequently can, however, slow down the overall solution process. Once your model runs properly, change the options so Adams/View only updates the model at the end of the simulation. You can even set Adams/View so it never updates the model. You can then play an animation of the simulation, as required.


Category Set to Display.

Show Messages If you are running Adams/Solver externally, set to Yes to display the messages that Adams/Solver generates into an Information window. The messages include the diagnostic messages that Adams/Solver generates during a simulation, as well as warnings and errors, which are always displayed. Adams/View displays all messages output during a simulation to the message window and to its Log file.

Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Display

554

Update Graphics Set to one of the options below to indicate when you want your model updated during the simulation. The options are listed from option that sets the fewest updates to the option that sets the most.

• Never - No updates. Use this option only when you are sure that your simulation will run to completion without difficulty, and you want to maximize the efficiency of the simulation. (You can also set this option directly from the Interactive Simulation Palette and Container when Running an Interactive Simulation.)

• At Simulation - Update your model display only at the end of the simulation.

• At Output Step - Update your model display at every output time step that you specified when you submitted your simulation and omit any contact steps. Because it does not display contact steps, your simulation time may improve because the graphical processing operations will not be burdened with intermediate contact events.

• At Contact/Output Step - Update the model display at each output time step and contact step. This is the default.

• At Integration Step - An update of your model display at every integration time step that Adams/Solver requires to provide a solution to your specified level of accuracy. This option only applies to dynamic simulations since they are the only type requiring numerical integration. It is helpful for debugging purposes but can lead to significantly longer simulation times. For more information, see Solver Settings - Dynamic.

• At Iteration - Update your model display at every iteration. This option is most useful when debugging static simulations because they are purely iterative in nature since there is no integration required. This option is also available for dynamic simulations, in which case Adams/View displays the model at every corrector step associated with each predictor step.Using the At Every Iteration option with dynamic simulations can result in significantly longer simulation times.

Icons To see all your model icons as your model is updated, set to On. Keeping your icons on as your model is updated can help you understand how model objects behave, especially constraints and forces. By default, icons are not visible during animations.

More Select to more display options, including those for parametric analysis.

Prompt Set to Yes to indicate that you want to be prompted whether or not Adams/View should display each updated frame. By default, there is no delay and you are not prompted to display each updated frame.

Time Delay Enter the number of seconds Adams/View should pause after displaying each updated frame so you can study it. By default, there is no delay.


555P - ZSolver Settings - Display

Update Toolbar Select an option to set how Adams/View should update the simulation information that appears in the status bar as the solution proceeds. The options are a subset of the options available under the Update Graphics pull-down menu and behave in a similar way.

Chart Objective Select to display a strip chart of the following depending on the type of parametric analysis:

• Objective value versus variable value for a Design study.

• Objective value versus trial for a Design of experiments (DOE).

• Objective value versus iteration number for an Optimization.

Adams/View updates the strip chart at every trial or iteration.

Chart Variables Displays a strip chart for each design variable, plotting its value versus the trial or iteration number. Adams/View updates the strip chart every trial or iteration.

Save Curves Clears all displayed measures at the beginning of the parametric analysis and automatically saves the curve from each trial or iteration. If you do not select Save Curves, Adams/View does not clear or save any curves. It only displays the curve for the current simulation and any curves you previously saved.

Show Report Automatically displays a tabular report at the end of the parametric simulation. You can use the Tabular Report

tool to display this table at any time, write it to a file, and control its format (see Generating a Table).


Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Dynamic

556

Solver Settings - Dynamic

Settings → Solver → Dynamic

Dynamic simulations are transient or time-varying simulations used to investigate the movements of parts over time; these movements result from the combined effects of forces and constraint relationships. You can perform dynamic simulations on models that have any number of Degrees of freedom (DOF).

It is computationally more efficient, however, to perform Kinematic simulations on models with zero DOF and to perform dynamic simulations only on models with one or more DOF. For dynamic simulations, Adams/Solver can use several numerical algorithms to calculate an approximate solution to the equations of motion it formulates for your mechanical system.

Learn more About Dynamic Simulations.


Category Set to Dynamic.

Integrator Select an integrator (the integrators HASTIFF, HHT and Newmark are only available with Adams/Solver (C++)).

For more on the integrators, see Comparison of Integrators and the:

• INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) online help

• INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver (C++) help

Note: Unknown appears if your model uses an integrator that is not used or no longer supported. For example, if you import a dataset (.adm) file that contains the statement "INTEGRATOR/DSTIFF", which is discontinued, Adams/View displays Unknown. If you try to select Unknown, Adams/View defaults to GSTIFF.

Formulation If you selected the integration method GSTIFF, WSTIFF, HASTIFF or Constant BDF, select a formulation for the integrator:

• I3

• SI2

• SI1 - only available in Adams/Solver (FORTRAN)

See Equation Formulation Comparison and the INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver online help, for more on the integrators.

Note: Unknown appears if your model uses an integration method that is not used or no longer supported. If you try to select Unknown, Adams/View defaults to I3.

557P - ZSolver Settings - Dynamic

Corrector Specify the corrector algorithm that is to be used with the stiff integrators GSTIFF, WSTIFF, or Constant BDF. The corrector in a stiff integrator ensures that all the unknowns satisfy the equations of the system. The two algorithms, original and modified, differ primarily in the algorithm that they use to define when the corrector iterative process has converged.

• Original - Specifies that the corrector available in the previous releases of Adams/Solver be used. This is the default. This implementation of the corrector requires that at convergence, the error in all solution variables be less than the corrector error tolerance.

• Modified - Specifies that a modified corrector is to be used. This implementation of the corrector requires that at convergence, the error in only those variables for which integration error is being monitored, be less than the corrector error tolerance. This is a slightly looser definition of convergence, and you should use proper care when using this. The modified corrector is helpful for models containing discontinuities in the forcing functions. Problems with contacts belong in this category.

For additional information, see Extended Definition in the INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

Error Specify the relative and absolute local integration error tolerances that the integrator must satisfy at each step. For BDF, HHT, and Newmark integrators, Adams/Solver monitors the integration errors in the displacement and state variables that the other differential equations (differential equations, linear state equations, general state equations, and transfer functions) define. ABAM, SI1, and SI2 formulations also monitor errors in velocity variables. The larger the error, the greater the error per integration step in your solution.

Note that the value for error is units-sensitive. For example, if a system is modeled in mm-kg-s units, the units of length must be in mm. Assuming that all the translational states are larger than 1 mm, setting ERROR=1E-3 implies that the integrator monitors all changes of the order of 1 micron.

The error tolerances (e) are enforced as:

|| Yc - Y || < MAX (e, e * ||Y||)

where:

• Yc is the column matrix of computed values for the unknowns, Y.

• The symbol || . || indicates the root-mean-square of the array of numbers.



558

Hmax Enter the maximum time step that the integrator is allowed to take.

When setting the Interpolate option, the integration step size is limited to the value that is specified for Hmax. If Hmax is not defined, no limit is placed on the integration step size. If you do not set the Interpolate option, the maximum step size is limited to the output step.

Range is 0 < Hmin Hinit Hmax.

Note: In the dialog box, click More to see Interpolate, Hinit, and Hmin options.

More Click to set more advanced options.

Hmin Specify the minimum time step that the integrator is allowed to take.

Default is 1.0E-6*HMAX for GSTIFF and WSTIFF integrators, and machine precision for ABAM, SI1, and SI2 formulations and HHT and Newmark integrators.

Range is 0 < HMIN HINIT HMAX.

Hinit Enter the initial time step that the integrator attempts. The default is 1/20 of the output step.

Range is 0 < HMIN HINIT HMAX.



Adaptivity All of the BDF integrators (GSTIFF, WSTIFF, HASTIFF and Constant BDF) use Newton-Raphson iterations to solve the nonlinear Differential-Algebraic equations of motion. This iteration process is referred to as correcting the solution. The adaptivity value modifies the corrector error tolerance to include a term that is inversely proportional to the integration step size. This is intended to loosen the corrector tolerance when the step size gets small (many corrector failures occur because of small step size). If the integration step size is equal to h, Adaptivity/h is added to the corrector tolerance.

When setting a value for Adaptivity, begin with a small number, such as 1E-8. Note that this relaxes the tolerance of the corrector, which can introduce additional error into the dynamic solution. The corrector tolerance must be at least a factor of 10 stricter than the integration tolerance. The ratio advocated in theoretical literature ranges from .1 to .001 and is a function of the integrator order and step size. The ratio that Adams/Solver uses varies with the integrator chosen, but is within the range specified above. If you use an Adaptivity value to relax the corrector tolerances, be sure to validate your results by running another simulation using a different integration error tolerance.

The Adaptivity value affects only the GSTIFF, WSTIFF, and Constant BDF integrators.

An Adaptivity value is typically required to overcome corrector convergence difficulties and you should not use it in normal situations.

The default is 0, and the range is Adaptivity 0.

Interpolate Set to Yes when you don't want the integrator to control the integration step-size to precisely hit an output step. The integrator might then overshoot an output point and in this case an interpolation algorithm will provide an approximation of the solution at the output point. This approximate is then refined to provide for the consistent solution at the output point.



560

Kmax Specify the maximum order that the integrator can use. The order of integration refers to the order of the polynomials used in the solution. The integrator controls the order of the integration and the step size, and, therefore, controls the local integration error at each step so that it is less than the error tolerance specified.

For problems involving discontinuities, such as contacts, setting Kmax to 2 can improve the speed of the solution. However, we do not recommend that you set the Kmax option unless you are a very experienced user. Any modification can adversely affect the integrator’s accuracy and robustness.

Kmax's default and range depend on the integrator you selected:

For the integrator:

The default is: The range is:

ABAM 12 1 Kmax 12

GSTIFF, WSTIFF,HASTIFF, Constant BDF

6 1 Kmax 6

RKF45, HHT, Newmark

Not applicable

Not applicable

Note: KMAX is irrelevant (ignored) if the integrator selected is HHT or Newmark. Both these integrators are constant order (order 2 and 1, respectively) and, therefore, the order does not change during simulation as is the case for the rest of the integrators available in the solver.

Maxit Enter the maximum number of iterations allowed for the Newton-Raphson iterations to converge to the solution of the nonlinear equations. The correctors in GSTIFF and WSTIFF use the Newton-Raphson iterations. ABAM also uses Newton-Raphson iterations to solve for the dependent coordinates.

We recommend that you do not set Maxit larger than 10. This is because round-off errors start becoming large when a large number of iterations are taken. This can cause an error in the solution.

The default is 10, and the range is Maxit > 0.



Scale Enter the sum of the relative and absolute error tolerances. If T is the sum of the relative and absolute error tolerances applied to the state vector, then the following tolerance is applied:

r1 * T to the translational displacementsr2 * T to the angular displacementsr3 * T to the modal coordinates

The scale applies to only WSTIFF and ABAM. It is does not apply to GSTIFF and Constant BDF. The use of scale factors is not supported in Adams/Solver (C++).

Beta One of the two defining coefficients associated with the Newmark method. Learn more about the Newmark integrator with INTEGRATOR statement help.

Default value is 0.36.

Range is defined in conjunction with Gamma. Together they must satisfy the stability condition.

Gamma One of the two (together with Beta) defining coefficients associated with the Newmark method.

Default value is 0.7.

Range is defined in conjunction with Beta. Together they must satisfy the stability condition.

Alpha Defining coefficient for the HHT method.

Default value is -0.3.

Range is -0.3 < Alpha < 0.


Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Equilibrium

562

Solver Settings - Equilibrium

Settings → Solver → Equilibrium

Specifies error tolerances and other parameters for Static equilibrium and Quasi-static simulations.

A static or quasi-static equilibrium analysis is appropriate only when inertia forces, such as, d’Alembert forces, are not important and the system has one or more Degrees of freedom (degrees of freedom after Adams/Solver has removed any redundant constraints). Static and quasi-static equilibrium simulations solve for displacement and static forces, but not for velocity, acceleration, or inertia forces, which are all assumed to be zero.

563P - ZSolver Settings - Equilibrium

To set the Jacobian matrix for dynamic simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.


Category Set to Equilibrium.

Equilibrium Type Select either:

• Static - Performs a static equilibrium operation. Learn more.

• Dynamic - Performs a dynamic simulation to find the static equilibrium. Learn more

If you selected Static, the following options are available:

Error Specifies the relative correction convergence threshold. The iterative process carried out during the equilibrium analysis can not converge prior to all relevant relative corrections being smaller than this value.

The default is 1.0E-04 and the range is Error > 0

Tlimit Specifies the maximum translational increment allowed per iteration during static simulations performed using static simulations.

The default is 20 and the range is Tlimit > 0.

Alimit Specifies the maximum angular increment allowed per iteration. The default is 10 degrees, and the range is Alimit > 0. Enter the value in the current modeling units (degrees by default).

Maxit Specifies the maximum number of iterations allowed for finding static equilibriums.

The default is 25 and the range is Maxit > 0.

Stability Specifies the fraction of the mass and damping matrices Adams/Solver adds to the stiffness matrix. Adding a fraction of the mass and damping matrices to the stiffness matrix can stabilize the iteration process and prevent the iteration from diverging. Often the stiffness matrix is singular for a system because the system is neutrally stable (for example, the system moves in certain directions without affecting the potential energy). Adding a fraction of the mass and damping matrices to the stiffness matrix removes this singularity and makes it possible to solve for equilibrium positions. The value of Stability does not affect the accuracy of the solution, but it does affect the rate of convergence of the iteration process.

The default is 1.0E-05 and the range is Stability > 0.

Imbalance Specifies the equation imbalance convergence threshold. The iterative process carried out during the equilibrium analysis can not converge prior to each equation imbalance being smaller than this value.

The default is 1.0E-04 and the range is Imbalance > 0.


564

Static Method Select either:

1. ORIGINAL, for running only the ORIGINAL Solver

2. ADVANCED, runs, in order, the following methods until one shows progress:

a. ORIGINAL

b. ORIGINAL+Krylov

c. ORIGINAL+UMF

d. Newton+Krylov

e. Tensor-Krylov block-3

f. Tensor-Krylov block-2+

3. AGGRESSIVE, runs, in order, the following methods until one shows progress:

a. ORIGINAL

b. ORIGINAL+Krylov

c. ORIGINAL+UMF

d. Newton+Krylov



g. Broyden-Armijo

h. Trust-Region

4. ALL, runs, in order, all the available methods, until one shows progress:

a. ORIGINAL

b. ORIGINAL+Krylov

c. ORIGINAL+UMF

d. Newton+Krylov



g. Broyden-Armijo

h. Trust-Region

i. Hooke-Jeeves

If you selected Advanced, the following options are available:

Atol Specify the absolute tolerance value.

The default is 1.0E-06 and the range is


0.0 atol 1.0<≤

565P - ZSolver Settings - Equilibrium

Rtol Specify the relative tolerance value.

For all solvers, except ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov, the tolerance is defined as : TOL=ATOL+||xIC||*RTOL.

For ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov solvers the tolerance is equal to ERROR.

The default is 0.0 and the range is .

Maxitl Specifies the maximum number of allowed inner loops in all the solvers, except ORIGINAL, ORIGINAL+Krylov and ORIGINAL+UMF. For Hooke-Jeeves method, allowed budget of function evaluations is set to MAXITL*N, where N is the size of the problem (number of unknowns).

The default is 40 and the range is .

Etamax Specify the maximum threshold for the error tolerance of the linear Krylov solver (for Newton+Krylov and Tensor-Krylov methods), that solves the linear systems, required by Krylov algorithm. Maximum error tolerance for residual in inner iteration. The inner iteration terminates when the relative linear residual is smaller than eta*| F(x_c) |. eta is determined by the modified Eisenstat-Walker formula if etamax > 0. If etamax < 0, then eta = |etamax| for the entire iteration.

The default is 0.9 and the range is .

If you selected Aggressive or All, along with the above options (i.e Atol, Rtol, Maxitl and Etamax) following additional options will also be available:

Eta Specify the initial residual tolerance for the linear Krylov Solver for Tensor_Krylov method. The Tensor-Krylov ETA parameter is maintained adaptively by the Krylov algorithm but ETA is the indicated starting value, while ETAMAX is the maximum threshold for ETA.

Default: 1.0e-4Range: 0.0 < ETA < 1.0

Specify the dimensionless radius of the trust-region for Trust-region method. The smaller the value, the more the refinement of Trust-region solution (hence more work).

Range: 0.0 < ETA < 0.25

If you selected Dynamic, the following options are available:

Global Damping Specify the coefficient for global damping applied to all bodies during static simulations performed using dynamic analyses.

The default is 0 and the range is Global Damping > 0.


0.0 rtol 1.0<≤

maxit1 1.0≥

0.0 etamax 1.0<≤


566

Settling Time Specify the maximum time allowed to reach equilibrium during static simulations performed using dynamic analyses.

The default is 100 and the range is Settling Time > 0.

Acceleration Error Specify the maximum acceleration error allowed during static simulations performed using dynamic analyses.

The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Acceleration Error > 0.

Kinetic Energy Error

Specify the maximum kinetic energy error allowed in static simulations performed using dynamic analyses.

The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Kinetic Energy Error > 0.


Note: Convergence happens when both of the following occur:

• Maximum (Static Equation Residual Values) < Imbalance

AND

• Maximum (Relative State Errors) < Error

567P - ZSolver Settings - Flexible Bodies

Solver Settings - Flexible Bodies

Settings → Solver → Flex Bodies ...

Sets the options for flexible body linear limit feature.


Category Set to Flexible Bodies.


Limit Check Select the limit check option to be used

• Skin - Adams/Solver C++ will check the deformation of all the nodes on the skin to see whether they exceed the linear limit. To use this option, MNF_FILE or DB_FILE need to be specified in FLEX_BODY statement.

• Selnod - Adams/Solver C++ will only check the nodes specified in SELNOD section in MTX file.

• None

The linear limit is defined as 10% of the characteristic length of the flexible body. You can use CHAR_LEN in FLEX_BODY statement to specify the characteristic length. If CHAR_LEN is not specified, Adams/Solver C++ will calculate the characteristic length using MNF or MD DB if MNF_FILE or DB_FILE is specified. Otherwise, Adams/Solver C++ issues a warning.

Limit Action Select the action to be performed when flexible body exceeds its linear limit.

• Halt - Terminates execution of Adams/Solver C++.

• Return - Stops the simulation and returns to the command level.

• Message Only - Issues a warning message only (Default).

Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Executable

568

Solver Settings - Executable

Settings → Solver → Executable

Sets the type of Adams/Solver to run.


Category Set to Executable.

Executable Select:

• Internal - Run Adams/Solver from within Adams/View and animate the results as they are calculated, which is the default

• External - Perform a Simulation with Adams/Solver while in Adams/View, but without seeing the model update on your screen during the simulation. Adams/View automatically plays an animation of the simulation when the simulation is complete.

• Write Files Only - Instruct Adams/View to write out the files that are needed to run a simulation using Adams/Solver from outside of Adams/View. The files include the:

• Dataset (.adm) file

• Command (.acf) file, which contains the commands necessary to run the desired simulation.

If you select Internal, you can perform either an Interactive Simulation or a Scripted simulation. If you select External or Write Files Only, you can only perform a scripted simulation. Adams/View issues an error if you try to perform an interactive simulation after choosing either of these options.

If you selected Internal or External, you can set the following options:

Solver Library Set it to use the standard Adams/Solver executable (leave it blank) or a user-defined or customized Adams/Solver library. A customized Adams/Solver library is required if you used subroutines to define any objects in your model, such as motions or forces. For more information, see the following:

• Adams/Solver help

• Running and Configuring Adams

Note: On Linux, you can use the Adams Toolbar to set the Adams/Solver library to run and create different tools on the Adams Toolbar for each library you have.


../../adams_configure/master.htm

569P - ZSolver Settings - Executable

Choice Select either:

• FORTRAN - Our existing version of Adams/Solver.

• C++ - Our new, C++-based version of Adams/Solver, which promises to be faster, provide new linear analysis capabilities, and have an improved methodology for identifying and handling redundant constraints. Currently, it supports several new capabilities that Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) does not support, though not all modeling elements that the Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) supports are included.

As you create modeling objects in Adams/View, it lets you know whether or not they are compatible with the C++ version or the FORTRAN. If you use the Adams/Solver C++, please provide us with feedback through the Adams Feedback Database at http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com/KB8019304. Be sure to select the product Adams/Solver (C++). For more information on the different solvers, see Release Notes and Adams/Solver (C++) help.

Verify First Set to yes to verify your model before running a simulation. See Model Verify Tool dialog box help.

Hold License Set whether or not the Adams/Solver license is checked back in once the simulation is complete. By default, Adams/View does not check the license back in for another user. You must exit Adams/View before other users can use the Adams/Solver license.

• If you set Hold License to Yes, then Adams/View checks out the necessary licenses when you perform a model verify operation (because of the degrees of freedom calculation, which uses Adams/Solver) or any type of simulation using the internal Adams/Solver. It only releases the licenses when you exit Adams/View or when you run a simulation using the external Adams/Solver.

• If you set Hold License to No, Adams/View releases all Adams/Solver licenses (static, kinematic, and dynamic), and all module licenses (Adams/Tire, Adams/Linear, and Adams/SmartDriver) in these cases:

• You run a simulation using the external Adams/Solver (as before).

• After a model verify operation.

• When you reset after a single simulation using the internal Adams/Solver.

• After a parametric analysis (licenses are held throughout the parametric analysis)

More Select to display options for setting the remote computer on which to run Adams/Solver.



http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com/infocenter/index?page=content&id=KB8019304

Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Executable

570

Remote Compute • Linux only; not displayed when running on Windows

• Enter the name of the remote host where you run Adams/Solver or leave blank to use local machine. The option you select depends on where the Adams/Solver is licensed at your site.

Note: Network access and multi-task package licenses allow you to submit tasks to Adams/Solver while Adams/View runs on one of many desktop workstations. To see if you can submit multiple tasks to Adams/Solver, check the licensing information on the password certificate that is included in the Installer’s Kit. If you do not know the type of license you have, check with the administrator who installed the Adams.

If you set Remote Compute to Yes, the following options are available:

Node Name Enter the node ID of the remote computer.

MDI Directory Enter the name of the Adams/Solver installation directory on the remote machine.

Remote Directory Specify a directory that Adams/Solver uses to write out its files and search for input files. The directory is optional. You need to specify it only if the user’s file system is not automounted on the remote machine upon log in.

The following options are available for Adams/Solver (C++) only

Thread Count Adams/Solver (C++)

Specify the number of parallel threads that Adams/Solver (C++) uses when performing the simulation. The number of threads, n, must be an integer in the range of 1 to 8. The default value is 1. By executing multiple threads in parallel across multiple processors, Adams/Solver (C++) can reduce the walltime required for a simulation.

Typically, the optimal number of threads is between N and 2N, where N is the number of processors (including virtual processors in the case of Pentium processors with HyperThreading enabled).

Learn more about Threaded (Parallel) Operation of Adams/Solver(C++).


571P - ZSolver Settings - IC (Initial Conditions)

Solver Settings - IC (Initial Conditions)

Settings → Solver → IC (Initial Conditions)

Sets error tolerances and other parameters for an Initial conditions simulation. By default, the integrators ABAM, WSTIFF, and DSTIFF reconcile integrator results to be consistent with constraints; GSTIFF does not, unless you set Interpolate to Yes in Solver Settings - Dynamic.

The initial conditions simulation ensures that the system satisfies all constraints within the system. If necessary, Adams/Solver moves parts until both parts of each joint are in contact. The simulation involves three separate phases:

• First, Adams/Solver makes the displacements between all parts and joints in the system physically consistent. This requires the use of Newton-Raphson iteration to solve a set of nonlinear algebraic equations. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG statement in the Adams/Solver online help.)

• Once the displacements are consistent, Adams/Solver makes the velocities physically consistent. Because this requires solving a set of linear equations, iteration is not necessary.

• Finally, Adams/Solver calculates consistent accelerations and forces. This solution also requires solving a set of nonlinear equations using Newton-Raphson iteration.

When reconciling, the integrator uses the initial conditions solution process at each Output step to ensure that velocities, accelerations, and forces are consistent with the system constraints. If you set Interpolate to Yes, the integrator also uses the initial conditions solution at each output step to ensure displacements are consistent with the constraints. The IC parameters control those solutions as well as the initial conditions solution.

Because the initial conditions simulation relies on an iterative procedure, it is possible for it to fail if model inconsistencies are initially too large. If this ever occurs, you should review your model for errors in part and constraint inconsistencies. When using the Stabilized Index 2 (SI2) and Stabilized Index 1 (SI1) integrators, it is also important to ensure that initial velocities do not introduce discontinuities at time equal to zero. The initial conditions settings can be used to adjust the convergence criteria as appropriate for problematic modeling scenarios. See Equation Formulation Comparison for more information.

To set the Jacobian matrix for initial condition simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.


Category Set to IC (Initial Conditions).

Error Specify the maximum displacement error Adams/Solver is to allow for the assembly process.

The default is 1.0E-10 and the range is Error > 0.


Adams/ViewSolver Settings - IC (Initial Conditions)

572

Tlimit Specify the maximum translational increment Adams/Solver is to allow while testing trial solutions during a solution step.

The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.

Alimit Specify the maximum angular increment Adams/Solver is to allow while testing trial solutions for a set of consistent initial conditions that satisfy all system constraints. The default units for Alimit are radians. To specify Alimit in degrees, add a D after the value.

The default is 30D and the range is Alimit > 0.


Maxit Specify the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding displacements during initial conditions, or when reconciling displacement output.


Amaxit Specify the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding accelerations during an initial conditions solution or for reconciling acceleration output.

The default is 25 and the range is Amaxit > 0.

Aerror Specify the maximum acceleration error Adams/Solver is to allow during an initial conditions solution or for reconciling acceleration output.

The default is 1.0E-4 and the range is Aerror > 0.


573P - ZSolver Settings - Kinematic

Solver Settings - Kinematic

Settings → Solver → Kinematic

Specifies error tolerances and other parameters for Kinematic simulations.

A kinematic simulation is only appropriate when a system has zero Degrees of freedom. A kinematic analysis solves for the displacements, velocities, accelerations, and forces (if any) at a series of points in time. To find the displacements,Adams/Solver uses Newton-Raphson iteration to solve a nonlinear set of algebraic equations. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG statement in the Adams/Solver online help.)

After finding the displacements, Adams/Solver solves a system of linear equations to find the velocities, then solves another set of nonlinear equations to find accelerations and forces. Adams/Solver repeats this procedure at successively later times until it obtains results over the period of time specified in a SIMULATE command.

To set the Jacobian matrix for dynamic simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.


Category Set to Kinematic.


Error Specifies the maximum displacement error Adams/Solver is to allow for each time step.

The default is 1.0E-4 and the range is Error > 0.

Tlimit Specifies the maximum translational increment Adams/Solver is to allow per iteration.

The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.

Alimit Specifies the maximum angular increment Adams/Solver is to allow per iteration. The default units for Alimit are radians. To specify Alimit in degrees, add a D after the value.

The default is 30D and the range is ALIMIT > 0.


Maxit Enter the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding the displacements at a point in time.


Aerror Enter the maximum acceleration error Adams/Solver is to allow for each time step.

The default is 1.0E-4 and the range is Aerror > 0.


Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Kinematic

574

Amaxit Enter the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding accelerations at a point in time.

The default is 25 and the range is Amaxit > 0.

Hmax Enter the maximum time step that the kinematics solver is allowed to take.

The default is the output step size.


575P - ZSolver Settings - Optimizations

Solver Settings - Optimizations

Settings → Solver → Optimizer

Allows you to set options for Optimizations.


Category Set to Optimization.

Algorithm Specify the algorithm used to perform the optimization. The OPTDES algorithms are provided with Adams/View. The DOT algorithms can be purchased from Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. You can also include your own optimization algorithm. The contact information for Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. is:

Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.

1767 S. 8th Street, Suite. 100

Colorado Springs, CO 80906

http://www.vrand.com/

http://www.vrand.com/dot.htm

More about Algorithms.

Tolerance Specify the limit below which subsequent differences of the objective must fall before an optimization is considered successful. If the condition: ABS(objective[now] - objective[now-1]) < convergence_tolerance is true for a certain number of iterations (usually two), then the convergence tolerance criterion is met. Note that this is only one test that is made by most optimization algorithms before they terminate successfully.

Like other Adams/Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this tolerance to find the right value for your application. Display the objective versus iteration Strip chart. (See Solver Settings - Display) If the optimizer quits even though the last iteration made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the optimizer continues iterating even after the objective has stopped changing very much, make the tolerance larger.

Max. Iterations Set how many iterations the optimization algorithm should take before it admits failure. Note that a single iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of analysis runs.

Rescale Enter the number of iterations after which the design variable values are rescaled. If you set the value to -1, scaling is turned off.

http://www.vrand.com/

http://www.vrand.com/dot.htm

Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Optimizations

576

Differencing Control how the optimizer computes gradients for the design functions. Centered differencing perturbs each design variable in the negative direction from the nominal value, then again in the positive direction using finite differencing between the perturbed results to compute the gradient. If you choose forward differencing, each design variable is perturbed in a positive direction only. Centered differencing can sometimes generate smoother, more reliable gradients (especially in noisy models), but it causes twice as many analysis runs to be performed.

More Click to set more advanced options, listed below.

Increment The differencing increment specifies the size of increment to use when performing finite differencing to compute gradients. When using forward differencing, this value is added to the nominal value of each design variable on successive runs. When using central differencing, this value is first subtracted from the nominal value and then added to it.

Smaller increments may give more accurate approximations of the gradient, but are also more susceptible to random variations from run to run. Larger increments help minimize the effects of variations, but give less accurate gradients.

Debug Set to display messages from the optimizer. Turning on debugging output sends copious optimizer diagnostics to the window that launched Adams/View. Keep an eye on that window anyway, as some important warnings might be written there. The debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from Adams/View, among other things. If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may help you determine the source of the problem.

User Adams/View passes the user parameters to a user-written optimization algorithm. Realizing that there may be parameter information that is not conveyed through the existing parameter set, this parameter was added to allow you to pass any real numeric data to your algorithm.

Min. Converged The number of consecutive iterations for which the absolute or relative convergence criteria must be met to indicate convergence in the DOT Sequential Linear Programming method.


577P - ZSolver Settings - Output

Solver Settings - Output

Settings → Solver → Output

Sets whether or not Adams/View stores Simulation results in three external files: graphics, request, and results.

Selecting More lets you set options for the format and content of the results files, and the format and content of the message and tabular output file when you are using External Adams/Solver. In addition, you can set up how Adams/View stores the simulation results in the Modeling database.

To learn more, see the DEBUG statement in the Adams/Solver online help.


Category Set to Output.

Save Files Set to Yes to create Adams/Solver analysis files in the directory from which you ran Adams/View. Adams/View saves the files after each simulation.

Prefix After setting Save Files to Yes, enter the prefix you want added to the name of each saved analysis file to help identify it.

Graphics Set to Yes to save a graphics file.

Request Set to Yes to save a request file.

Results Set to Yes to save a results file.

More Select to display more files to which to save output.

Output Category Select what you'd like to set about the files. Click the output category to learn more about its options.

• Files

• Database Storage

• Results (.res) Options

• Results (.res) Content

• Output (Out) Content

• Message (.msg) Content

• Durability Files - For more information, see Adams/Durability online help.



Adams/ViewSolver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian

578

Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian

Settings → Solver → Pattern for Jacobian

Specifies as many as ten character strings that together establish the pattern for evaluating the Jacobian matrix during the modified Newton-Raphson solution for a dynamic, kinematic, or Initial conditions simulation. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG statement in the Adams/Solver online help.)

For each iteration, T or TRUE indicates that Adams/Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian, and F or FALSE indicates that Adams/Solver is not to evaluate the Jacobian, instead it is to use the previously calculated Jacobian matrix as an approximation of the current one. Therefore, cj determines whether or not Adams/Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian at the jth iteration. If necessary, Adams/Solver repeats the pattern of evaluations until it reaches the maximum number of iterations (set by the option Amaxit or Maxit).


Category Set to Pattern for Jacobian.

Integrator Pattern Select a pre-defined pattern:

• TFFFTFFFTFFFTF - Sets the pattern to the default for dynamic simulations.

• T - Sets the pattern to all TRUEs, which evaluates the Jacobian at every iteration.

• F - Sets the pattern to all FALSEs. A pattern of all FALSEs implies that Adams/Solver is to not evaluate the Jacobian until it encounters a corrector failure. For problems that are almost linear or are linear, this setting can improve simulation speed substantially.

• Advanced - Indicates that you created a custom pattern by selecting More and setting options as explained below. Select More to see the custom pattern. Not available until you created a custom pattern.

Tip: Selecting a pattern to request less frequent evaluations of the Jacobian matrix can decrease the computation time, decreasing the cost and improving the response time. However, infrequent evaluations could also be more expensive since the modified Newton-Raphson algorithm might require more iterations due to the slower convergence rates.

More Select to create your own pattern.

Specify Pattern for Set the type of solution for which you are setting the Jacobian pattern.

Number of Entries Enter the number of TRUE's and FALSE's. The number of T’s or TRUE’s and F’s or FALSE’s together must be at least one and no more than 10.

Pattern Click a box to set the pattern. A check mark indicates TRUE.


579P - ZSorting Settings

Sorting Settings

Tools → Table Editor → Sorting

Allows you to sort the type of objects and category information after you have set it up in the Filter menu of the Table Editor.

You can sort the information by object name or by a particular column. You can set the type of sorting. You can select:

• Alphanumeric sorting - Sorts the information so that alphabetic characters are first followed by numeric characters

• Numeric sorting - Sorts objects based on their numeric values. It sorts any alphanumeric characters as zeros.

Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.

Note: When you sort the Table Editor, Adams/View sets the values displayed in cells back to those stored in the Modeling database. Therefore, you lose any changes you made to cells and did not apply to your modeling database.


Category on which objects are sorted

Choose from:

• No sorting - Object appear in the Table Editor in the order they are stored in the modeling database.

• Sort By Name - Sorts the objects by their name (by rows).

• Sort By Column Labeled - Select and enter the name of the column on which to sort the objects. To select a column name from a list, select Select.

Type of Sorting • Choose alphanumeric to sort alphabetic characters first.

• Choose numeric to sort in numeric order. It sorts any alphabetic characters as zero.

Adams/ViewSphere Tool

580

Sphere Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Sphere Tool

Creates a solid ellipsoid whose three radii are of equal length. You draw the sphere by indicating its center point and the radius for the three radii.

Before you draw the sphere, you can also specify the radius value for the three radii

Learn about Creating a Sphere.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the sphere to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the sphere to ground.


Radius Select, and then enter the desired radius.

Note: After you draw the sphere, three hotpoints appear on it that let you reshape the radii of the sphere. For example, you can elongate the sphere into an ellipsoidal shape. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

581P - ZSpherical Joint Tool

Spherical Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Spherical Joint Tool

Creates a spherical joint that allows the free rotation about a common point of one part with respect to another part. The location of the spherical joint determines the point about which the joint’s parts can pivot freely with respect to each other.

Learn about:


Adams/ViewSpherical Joint Tool

582










For more on the effects of these options, see About Connecting Constraints to Parts.

Normal to Grid/








• Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching solvers.

583P - ZSpline Tool

Spline Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Spline Tool

Creates a spline, which is a smooth curve that a set of location coordinates define.

You create splines by defining the locations of the coordinates that define the curve or by selecting an existing geometric curve or edge and specifying the number of points to be used to define the spline. The Spline tool produces a smooth curve through the points.

You can also close the spline or leave it open. A closed spline must be composed of at least eight points; an open spline must be composed of at least four points.

Tip: You can also create a spline in the following ways:

• Creating Trace Spline

• Creating and Modifying Data Element Splines

Adams/ViewSpline Tool

584

Learn about Creating Splines.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the spline to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the spline to ground.


Closed Select if you want to create a closed spline. Note that it must contain eight points.

Tip: You can extrude a closed spline into solid geometry that has mass. For more information, see the Extrusion Tool.

Create by Picking Select:

• Points to select the locations on the screen where you want the spline to pass through. You must specify at least eight locations for a closed spline and four locations for an open spline.

• Curve to select the curve to define the spline.

• Edge to select the edge to define the edge.

If you selected Curve or Edge for Create by Picking, you have one additional option:

Spread Points Set how many points you want used to define the curve or clear the selection and let Adams/View calculate the number of points needed.

Note: If you are using this tool from the Main toolbox, the Spread Points text box is called # of Points.

Note: Adams/View places hotpoints at locations on the spline as you draw it. The hotpoints let you reshape the spline. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

You can also modify the spline by editing the point locations directly or by changing the curve and matrix data elements that Adams/View creates to support the spline. In addition, you can change the number of segments that Adams/View creates through the spline. For more information on modifying splines, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry.

585P - ZSplit Tool

Split Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Split Tool

Splits a complex solid (often referred to as a CSG) that you created using the other Boolean tools back into its primitive solids. It creates a part for each solid resulting from the split operation.

Learn about Splitting a Solid.

Adams/ViewStatic Equilibrium Tool

586

Static Equilibrium Tool

Interactive Simulation dialog box → Static Equilibrium Tool

Performs a static simulation on your model. Adams/Solver iteratively repositions all the parts in an attempt to balance all the forces for one particular point in time. Each static simulation is independent of the time-varying effects of velocity and acceleration. Therefore, no inertial forces are taken into account. A positioning of your parts for which all your forces balance is known as an equilibrium configuration.

If your force and motion inputs change over time and you want to investigate how your equilibrium configurations change, you can choose to perform a series of static simulations over an interval of time. A series of static simulations is often referred to as a quasi-static simulation because time is allowed to vary between static simulations but time-varying inertial effects are neglected for each individual static simulation. Quasi-static simulations are useful for approximating the dynamic response of models that move very slowly and for which you can assume that the effects of inertial force can be neglected.

Since Adams/Solver must be able to move parts around as it attempts to iterate to an equilibrium configuration, it does not make sense to perform a static simulation on a model that has no Degrees of freedom (DOF). If the model has no DOF, no parts are allowed to move.

Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations.

587P - ZStereo Viewing

Stereo Viewing

Settings → Stereo Viewing

Sets options for using Adams/View with stereo viewing. Stereo viewing is available on all Linux platforms but not Windows.

Before running Adams/View in stereo-viewing mode, you need to set the MDI_STEREO environment variable MDI_STEREO (setenv MDI_STEREO 1). Learn more about setting Adams/View Environment Variables.

Stereo viewing is only available when running Native OpenGL graphics with the OpenGL_Software_Assisted registry setting set to disabled. You use the Registry Editor.

To set this registry setting:

1. From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Toolbar tool , and then select Registry Editor.

The Registry Editor appears.

2. Select AView → Preferences → Graphics → OpenGL_Software_Assisted.

Using Stereo Viewing on SGI Machines

There are two types of stereo views available on SGI machines:

• Above-and-below viewing - The first, and least useful, is above-and-below viewing. This type of viewing is used with non-stereo- ready hardware and splits the screen into two halfs, a top half and bottom half. The result is that the screen size in pixels is effectively cut in half in the vertical direction. For example, on a monitor set for a screen size 1024 x 768 pixels, the screen size changes to 1024 x 384. This changes the aspect ratio of the screen and of the resulting images displayed within Adams/View and Adams/PostProcessor. They appear to be one half as tall as they should be.

• Interlaced stereo viewing - The second type of viewing is Interlaced stereo viewing, which is available on stereo-capable graphics cards. This approach has the advantage that the screen aspect ratio is not changed and, therefore, the resulting images maintain the same proportions has their non-stereo counterparts. To enable this mode in the current Adams code, the video format for the monitor must be set to a format that supports interlaced stereo viewing. To do this, use the SGI setmon(1) shell command. For example, on a SGI tezro machine with a V12 graphics card, you could use the following command:

/usr/gfx/setmon -n 1280x1024_100s


Stereo viewing Select to enable stereo viewing.

Depth of Field Slide to control the depth of the perspective matrix.

Eye Separation Slide to control of offset between the left and right modeling views.

Adams/ViewStereo Viewing

588

Parallax Control the type of parallax view used to display the model:

• Positive - Positive parallax viewing produces images that appear to be within the space of the monitor. For engineering purposes where objects are often cut off by the window borders or partially obscured by dialog boxes, positive parallax viewing produces images that are less confusing to the viewer and are, therefore, easier to view.

• Negative - Negative parallax viewing produces images that appear to float in space in front of the display. Viewing floating images that are partially obscured by interface items produces confusing cues to the viewer. While the image appears in front of the screen, the interface items appear to be on the screen but these interface items can obscure part of the image. These conflicting inputs can be confusing and lead to extra strain.

Eye Position Use with Negative parallax viewing and use it to control how far the image floats in front of the screen.


589P - ZSumming Junction Block

Summing Junction Block


Summing junction blocks add or subtract the outputs from other standard blocks. You can select whether the positive or negative value of an input to a summing junction is used by single-clicking on the +/- sign button.

A summing junction block takes any valid controls block output as its input.



Input 1/Input 2

Specify the assembly name of any controls block, including input function blocks, in either text box. You can select whether the positive or negative value of the input to a summing junction is used by single-clicking on the +/- sign button. Single-click on the +/- button to select whether the positive or negative value of an input to a summing junction is used.




Adams/ViewSwap a flexible body for an external system

590

Swap a flexible body for an external system

Build → External Systems → Flex to External System...

Lets you substitute an existing flexible body in your model for an external system.

To substitute a flexible body for an external system, use the following tabs:

• Alignment

• Connections

Alignment


Flexible Body Enter the flexible body to be replaced

External System Select either:

• An existing external system in the model

• Or Create an external system on the fly

The “…” button can be used to invoke the ‘External System Cremod’ dialog, in order to create an external system as a replacement for the rigid body.

Note: Only external systems with an MNF or an MD DB specified are supported for the swap operation. If the selected external system does not have either an MNF or an MD DB specified, then an error message is seen, indicating that such external systems are not supported.

External System Positioning

Align External System CM with CM of Current Part

Select to align the external system by comparing the center of mass and inertia tensor of the two bodies. The external system is:

• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the flexible body CM.

• Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident with the part's principal inertia directions.

If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely aligns the external system with the flexible body. If the bodies are symmetric about a plane, this method may rotate the external system 180° from the flexible body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the flexible body 180° back into position.

Launch Precision Move Panel

Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects either by increments or to precise coordinates.

591P - ZSwap a flexible body for an external system

Connections

3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the external system. A point pair consists of a point on the original flexible body and a point on replacement external system. The three points on each body must uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the flexible body and the second and third points define the orientation. The external system is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the External System reside in the plane defined by points 2 and 3 on the flexible body.

Flip about Only available if you used Align External System CM with CM of Current Part.

Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding axis:

• X axis - Rotate external system 180° about its largest principal inertia direction.

• Y axis - Rotate external system 180° about its second largest principal inertia direction.

• Z axis - Rotate external system 180° about its smallest principal inertia direction.

View parts only Select to display only the flexible body and its replacement external system.

View topology Select to display a flexible representation of the body and its connections to other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.

Copy original part Leave a copy of the flexible body in the modeling database. This is helpful if you want to reactivate the flexible body.


Update Table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you have made.

Reset Table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.

Node Finder Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.

Node ID/Apply

Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.

Move to node

Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the location of the specified node.

Preserve expression

Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams/View expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.



592

Preserve location

Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams/Flex preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.

Note: Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from their attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams/Flex (FORTRAN) automatically introduces a massless link between the marker and the flexible body. Learn more.

Number of digits

Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and Node table.


593P - ZSwap a flexible body for an external system

Sort by Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns. For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its selected node.

• Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name

• Connections - Sort by markers with connections

• Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node

• Interface - Sort by interface nodes

• Distance - Sort by markers that are most distant from the selected node

• Move - Sort by the values in the Move column



594

Marker and Node Table

Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be transferred on the replacement external system. See the Picture of Marker and Node Table. Note that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in the table for each node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker individually for each of the nodes.

• Marker - All the markers on the flexible body that will be transferred to the external system.

• Connections - All the forces and joints on the flexible body that use the marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the external system.

• Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement external system.

• Interface - The existing or replacement node may or may not be an interface node. An asterisk appears if the node is an interface node.

• Old Relative Location - The x, y, and z coordinates of the old node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system.

• Old Distance - The magnitude of the old relative location vector.

• New Node - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred to the external system. When Adams/Flex initially creates the table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.

• New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.

• New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.

• Move column - Indicates how Adams/Flex will position the marker. The three options are:

• move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the external system, it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be moved is given in the Distance column.

• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's position was defined by an Adams/View expression, the parameterization will be lost.

• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams/View expression, the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the marker's current position will be preserved. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location using the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.

Use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set the Move column value.


595P - ZSwap a flexible body for another flexible body

Swap a flexible body for another flexible body

Build → Flexible Bodies → Flex to Flex

(Template-based products, Standard Interface: Adjust → Flexible Body → Modify)

Lets you substitute an existing flexible body in your model for another flexible body. The name of the replacement flexible body is the name of the existing body with _flex appended to it.

Learn more about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.

To substitute a flexible body for a flexible body, you use the following tabs:

• Alignment

• Connections

Alignment


Flexible Body Enter the flexible body to be replaced.

MNF File/ MD DB file

• Select the Modal Neutral File (MNF) containing the replacement flexible body.

• MD DB File, and then select the name of the MD DB to import. The index parameter applies only to MD DBs.



Flex body positioning

Adams/ViewSwap a flexible body for another flexible body

596

Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part

Select to align the flexible body by comparing the center of mass and inertia tensor of the two bodies. The flexible body is:

• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the rigid body CM.


If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely aligns the flexible body with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric about a plane, this method may rotate the flexible body 180° from the rigid body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the flexible body 180° back into position.



3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the flexible body. A point pair consists of a point on the original flexible body and a point on replacement flexible body. The three points on each body must uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the flexible body and the second and third points define the orientation. The flexible body is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the flexible body reside in the plane defined by points 2 and 3 on the original flexible body.

Flip about Only available if you used Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part.


• X axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its largest principal inertia direction

• Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its second largest principal inertia direction

• Z axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its smallest principal inertia direction

View parts only Select to display only the original flexible body and its replacement.

View topology Select to display a flexible representation of the body and its connections to other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.

Copy original part Leave a copy of the original flexible body in the modeling database. This is helpful if you want to reactivate the original flexible body.



Connections


Update Table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you've made.

Reset Table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.


Node ID/Apply

Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.

Move to node Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the location of the specified node.

Preserve expression

Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams/View expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.

Preserve location

Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams/Flex preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.


Number of digits

Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and Node table.

Adams/ViewSwap a flexible body for another flexible body

598

Sort by Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns. For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its selected node.

• Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name.

• Connections - Sort by those markers with connections.

• Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node.

• Interface - Sort by those nodes that are interface nodes.

• Distance - Sort by those markers the most distant from the selected node.

• Move - Sort by the values in the Move column.




Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be transferred on the replacement flexible body. See a Picture of Marker and Node Table. Note that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in the table for each node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker individually for each of the nodes.

• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the flexible body.

• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the flexible body.

• Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement flexible body.

• Interface - Whether or not the existing or replacement node is an interface node. An asterisk appears if the node is an interface node.

• Old Relative Location - The x, y, and z coordinates of the old node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system.

• Old Distance - The magnitude of the old relative location vector.

• New Node - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred to the flexible body. When Adams/Flex initially creates the table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.

• New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.

• New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.


• move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the flexible body, it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be moved is given in the Distance column.



You use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set the Move column value.


Adams/ViewSwap a rigid body for an external system

600

Swap a rigid body for an external system

Build → External Systems → Rigid to External System...

Lets you substitute a rigid body for an external system.

To substitute a rigid body for an external system, use the following tabs:

• Alignment

• Connections

Alignment


Current Part Enter the rigid body to be replaced

External System Select either:

• An existing external system in the model

• Or Create an external system on the fly

The “…” button can be used to invoke the ‘External System Cremod’ dialog, in order to create an external system as a replacement for the rigid body.

Note: Only external systems with an MNF or an MD DB specified are supported for the swap operation. If the selected external system does not have either an MNF or an MD DB specified, then an error message will be shown, indicating that such external systems are not supported.

External System Positioning

Align External System CM with CM of Current Part

Select to align the external system by comparing the center of mass and inertia tensor of the two bodies. The external system is:

• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the flexible body CM.


If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely aligns the external system with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric about a plane, this method may rotate the external system 180° from the rigid body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the rigid body 180° back into position.



601P - ZSwap a rigid body for an external system

Connections

3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the external system. A point pair consists of a point on the original rigid body and a point on replacement external system. The three points on each body must uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the rigid body and the second and third points define the orientation. The external system is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the External System reside in the plane defined by points 2 and 3 on the rigid body.

Flip about Only available if you used Align External System CM with CM of Current Part.


• X axis - Rotate external system 180° about its largest principal inertia direction.

• Y axis - Rotate external system 180° about its second largest principal inertia direction

• Z axis - Rotate external system 180° about its smallest principal inertia direction.

View parts only Select to display only the rigid body and its replacement external system.

View topology Select to display a representation of the rigid body and its connections to other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.

Copy original part Leave a copy of the rigid body in the modeling database. This is helpful if you want to reactivate the rigid body.


Update table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you have made.

Reset table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.


Node ID/Apply Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.




602

Preserve expression Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams/View expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.

Preserve location Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams/Flex preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.

Number of digits Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and Node table.


603P - ZSwap a rigid body for an external system

Sort By Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns. For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its selected node.

• Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name

• Connections - Sort by markers with connections

• Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node

• Interface - Sort by interface nodes

• Distance - Sort by markers most distant from the selected node

• Move - Sort by the values in the Move column



604


Displays the markers on the external system and the node to which the marker will be transferred on the replacement external system.

• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the external system.

• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the external system.

• Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred to the external system. When Adams/Flex initially creates the table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.

• Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen attachment node is an interface node.

• Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.

• Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.


• move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the external system, it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be moved is given in the Distance column.



Use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set the Move column value.


605P - ZSwap a rigid body for another flexible body

Swap a rigid body for another flexible body

Build → Flexible Bodies → Rigid to Flex

(Template-based products, Standard Interface: Adjust → General Part → Rigid to Flex)

Lets you substitute a rigid body for an Adams/Flex flexible body. The name of the replacement flexible body is the name of the existing body with _flex appended to it.

Learn more about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.

To substitute a rigid body for a flexible body, you use the following tabs:

• Alignment

• Connections

Alignment


Current Part Enter the rigid body to be replaced.

For template-based products: Enter the general part to be replaced. If the general part has a symmetric brother (counterpart), both the left/right general parts will be set to asymmetric, and only the general part specified will be made flexible.

Flex Body/MNF File/MD DB File

Select either:

• Flex Body, and then select a flexible body that already exists.

• MNF File, and then select the name of the MNF to import.

• MD DB File, and then select the name of the MD DB to import. The index parameter applies only to MD DBs. The appropriate index of the body in the specified DB file, is input here. If not specified, it is assumed that the value is 1.



Adams/ViewSwap a rigid body for another flexible body

606

Load The load button needs to be/can be used only when the user specifies a MD DB option, to create the replacement flexible body from. Pressing the load button, after specifying a valid MD DB file (and index if specified), loads the appropriate flexible body from the MD DB.

For the flex-body and MNF option, the load button stays disabled and cannot be used.

Flex Body Positioning

Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part

Select to align the flexible body by comparing the center of mass and inertia tensor of the two bodies. The flexible body is:

• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the rigid body CM.


If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely aligns the flexible body with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric about a plane, this method may rotate the flexible body 180° from the rigid body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the flexible body 180° back into position.



3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the flexible body. A point pair consists of a point on the rigid body and a point on the flexible body. The three points on each body must uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the flexible body and the second and third points define the orientation. The flexible body is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the flexible body reside in the plane defined by points 2 and 3 on the rigid body.

Flip about Only available if you used Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part.


• X axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its largest principal inertia direction

• Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its second largest principal inertia direction

• Z axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its smallest principal inertia direction



Connections

View Parts Only Select to display only the rigid body and the replacement flexible body.

View Topology Select to display a representation of the rigid body and its connections to other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.

Copy original part Leave a copy of the original rigid body in the modeling database. This is helpful if you want to reactivate the rigid body.

For template-based products: The original part is always copied.


Update table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you've made.

Reset table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.


Node ID/Apply Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.


Preserve expression Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams/View expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.

Preserve location Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams/Flex preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.


Number of digits Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and Node table.


Adams/ViewSwap a rigid body for another flexible body

608

Sort By Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns. For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its selected node.

• Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name.

• Connections - Sort by those markers with connections.

• Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node.

• Interface - Sort by those nodes that are interface nodes.

• Distance - Sort by those markers the most distant from the selected node.

• Move - Sort by the values in the Move column.



Marker and Node Table Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be transferred on the replacement flexible body.

• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the flexible body.

• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the flexible body.

• Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred to the flexible body. When Adams/Flex initially creates the table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.

• Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen attachment node is an interface node.

• Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.

• Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.


• move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the flexible body, it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be moved is given in the Distance column.



You use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set the Move column value.


Adams/ViewSwitch Block

610

Switch Block


The switch is a convenient means to “zero” the signal into any block. Connect the switch at a point in the feedback loop to quickly see the change from open loop control to closed loop control. The switch takes any control block as its input.




Close Switch Set the loop to be closed.




611P - ZTable Editor

Table Editor

Tools → Table Editor

Allows you to enter values for all types of objects. It displays the objects in your Modeling database in table format so you can compare, update, and manage the objects. The object information you can view and update depends on the type of object. You can create and delete object.

To set the type of objects displayed:

• Select a check box of the desired object type from along the bottom of the Table Editor.

Adams/View updates the Table Editor to display the selected type of object.

Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.


Select to insert the text in the input cell into the selected cell.

(Insert tool)

Select to insert text from the input cell into the selected cells.

(Object Name & Field tool)

Select to insert the database name for the next selected cell into the input box. Learn about entering database names into cells.

(Cell Variable tool) Select to insert the self-reference operator into the input cell. Learn about entering modifying cells based on their current contents.

Input cell Enter text to add to more than one cell at a time and quickly update the values in the cell. Learn more about Working with Cells in the Table Editor.

Apply Click to execute the object table's commands.

OK Click to execute the object table's commands and close the Table Editor.

Create Select to create a new object for the current table type.

Filters Displays the Table Editor Filters dialog box.

Sorting Displays the Sorting Settings dialog box.

Write Select to write out the contents of this object table.

Reload Select to reload the values in the database into the Table Editor.

Adams/ViewTable Editor Filters

612

Table Editor Filters

Tools → Table Editor → Filters

Narrows the display of objects in Table Editor based on an object’s name or parent, such as to display only markers that belong to PART_1, which is called setting the scope. You can also narrow the display based on the names of objects. For example, you can set the name filter to only display the names of objects that contain the number 2 (MARKER_20, MARKER_21, and so on). Using the scope and name filter together, you can focus on those objects of interest and filter out the rest.

The categories of information that you can display about an object depend on the type of object. For example, for parts, you can display their location, initial conditions, and attributes, such as whether they are visible or active in the current Simulation. For markers, you can view their locations, as well as their locations relative to ground. For forces, you cannot change the information displayed, only the types of forces displayed. For joints, you can change the information displayed as well as the type of joints displayed.

Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.


Scope You can limit the scope of the search, if you want, to all objects beneath a particular object in the database hierarchy by entering the name of the object.

For example, enter .model_1 to display all objects under your entire model or enter .model_1.PART_3 to display objects belonging only to PART_3.

Note: You cannot enter wildcards.

Name Filter Enter the name of the object or objects that you want to display. Type any wildcards that you want included. By default, Adams/View displays all objects that meet the scope entered in the previous step regardless of their name.

Select the categories of information or set the type of object that you want displayed and then select OK.

613P - ZThree-Component Force tool

Three-Component Force tool

Build → Forces → Three-Component Tool

Creates a translational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.

Learn more about:




• 1 Location




Normal to Grid/

Pick Feature





• Constant force - Lets you enter a constant force value or let Adams/View use a default value.



If you selected Constant Force, the following option appears:

Force Value Enter a constant force value.

If you selected Bushing Like, the following two options appear:

Adams/ViewThree-Component Force tool

614




615P - ZThree-Component Torque tool


Build → Forces → Three-Component Torque Tool

Creates a rotational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.

Learn more about:




• 1 Location




Normal to Grid/

Pick Feature





• Constant - Lets you enter a constant force value or let Adams/View use a default value.



If you selected Constant , the following option appears:

Torque Enter a constant torque value.

If you selected Bushing Like, the following two options appear:

Adams/ViewThree-Component Torque tool

616

KT Enter the stiffness coefficients.

CT Enter the damping coefficients.


617P - ZTool Settings

Tool Settings

View → Toolbox and Toolbars

Turns on and off the Model Browser, Ribbon Capability and Standard toolbar. You can also set where the model browser and status toolbars appear. By default, the model browser appears at the left of the main window and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.


Model Browser Select to display the Modal Browser.

Ribbon Select to display the Ribbon Capability.

Status toolbar Select to display the Status toolbar.

Adams/ViewTool Settings (Classic)

618

Tool Settings (Classic)

View → Toolbox and Toolbars

Turns on and off the Main toolbox and the Standard toolbar and Status bars. You can also set where the Standard and status toolbars appear—either at the top of thes main window under the menu bar or at the bottom of the window. By default, the Main toolbox appears at the left of the main window, the Standard toolbar is turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.


Main toolbox Select to display the Main toolbox.

Standard toolbar Select to display the Standard toolbar.

Status toolbar Select to display the Status toolbar.

619P - ZToolbar Settings

Toolbar Settings

View → Toolbars → Settings

Allows you to turn the display of toolbars on and off. The toolbars are:

• Main toolbar - The Main toolbar appears by default. It contains tools for setting options and performing operations. The contents of the toolbar change depending on the Adams/PostProcessor mode. Learn About the Main Toolbar.

• Curve Edit toolbar - Lets you manipulate curve data. Learn about using the Curve Edit toolbar.

• Statistics toolbar - Lets you view statistics about curves, such as the minimum and maximum values. Learn about viewing statistics.

• Status bar - Displays information messages and prompts while you work. The right side of the status bar displays the number of the displayed page and the total number of pages.

You can also set where the toolbars appear—either at the top of the window under the menu bar or at the bottom of the window. You can also turn on and off the dashboard and treeview. By default, the dashboard and treeview are displayed, the Main toolbar appears at the top of the window, the Curve Edit and Statistics toolbars are turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.


Main Toolbar, Curve Edit Toolbar, Statistics Toolbar, and Status Toolbar

Select which toolbars you want visible. The changes take place immediately.

Top Select if you want the toolbar placed at the top of your screen.

Treeview Select if you want to display the treeview.

Dashboard Select if you want to display the dashboard.

Adams/ViewTopology By Connections

620

Topology By Connections

Database Navigator → Topology By Connections

Allows you to display information about a selected constraint or force with the parts that they connect and act on.



Save to File Select if you want to save the topology to a file.

621P - ZTopology By Parts

Topology By Parts

Database Navigator → Topology By Parts

Allows you to display information about a selected part of your model. It displays information of the selected part and shows its connections to other parts.



Save to File Select if you want to save the topology to a file.

Adams/ViewTorsion SpringTool

622

Torsion SpringTool

Build → Forces → Torsion SpringTool

Creates a Torsion spring.

Learn about:

• Torsion Springs



• 1 Location








KT Enter the torsional stiffness coefficients.

CT Enter the torsional damping coefficients.

623P - ZTorus Tool

Torus Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Torus Tool

Creates a solid circular ring. You draw the ring from the center outward. By default, the Torus tool makes the radius of outer ring (minor radius) 25% of the inner ring (major radius).

You can also specify the minor and major radii before you draw.

Learn about Creating a Torus.



Select either:


• Add to Part - Adds the torus to another part in your model.

• On Ground - Adds the torus to ground.


Minor Radius If desired, select and enter the inner radius for the torus.

Major Radius If desired, select and enter the outer radius for the torus.

Adams/ViewTorus Tool

624

Note: Two hotpoints appear on a torus after you draw it. One controls the centerline of the torus’ circular shape and the other controls the radius of the circular cross-section. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

625P - ZTranslate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

Build → Flexible Bodies → Adams/Flex → FEM Translate

Translates either:

• MSC.Nastran output data into a Modal Neutral File (MNF) using the MSC.Nastran-Adams Interface. You generate the output data by running MSC.Nastran first and then running the Adams/Flex DMAP alter.

• Universal file into an MNF that you can use to create a flexible body with a constant coupling inertia invariant formulation. Learn more.

To set the type of translation:

• Set the option menu in the upper left corner to either:

• MSC.Nastran

• Test Modal

MSC.Nastran


OUTPUT2 File Name Enter the name of the output (.out) file that you generated by running MSC.Nastran with the AdamsMNF Case Control command or a special DMAP alter. Learn about generating output. The MCS.Nastran translator generates the MNF file based on the .out file name.

Invariants Set which inertia invariants should be computed and stored in the MNF. You can select:

• Fast Set - If you select Fast Set, Adams/Flex does not compute invariants five and nine. It corresponds to the Partial Coupling formulation mode for modal flexibility. It is also suitable for use with the Constant Coupling formulation. Only Full Coupling requires all nine invariants. Unless you think you might need the Full Coupling formulation, you can safely select Fast Set. Learn about the different formulations.

• Full Set - If you select Full Set, Adams/Flex computes all inertia invariants, including invariants five and nine.

• None - If you select None, Adams/Flex does not perform any invariant calculations, and must compute invariants each time you save an Adams/Solver dataset with a modified selection of modes or nodes.

Adams/ViewTranslate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

626

Units Do one of the following:

• To preserve the units in the original MNF, select Original. If you select to preserve the units, Adams/Flex performs the unit scaling as it performs different operations, which can degrade performance noticeably.

• To convert all data to Adams/View internal units, which are meters, kilogram, seconds, and Newtons, select SI. This is the optimal setting for processing flexible bodies in Adams/View.

Formatting From the Formatting pull-down menu, do either of the following:

• To turn off the encoding that makes the MNF platform independent, select Platform Specific.

The encoding has some computational overhead that you may want to remove if you are not concerned about MNF portability.

• To keep the encoding and portability, select Standard Portable.

Remove Internal Solid Element Geometry

Select to remove certain interior geometry, such as the mated faces of two brick elements, to enhance graphics performance. When used with invariants computation (explained above), removing interior geometry can significantly reduce the size of an MNF.


627P - ZTranslate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

Test Modal

Automatic Select the tab Automatic, and then select Remove Internal Solid Element Geometry.

When you remove the interior geometry, the graphics performance of Adams/View is greatly enhanced. When you remove both interior geometry and calculate the invariants, Adams/Flex removes nodes that were only connected to the geometry that it also removed. Occasionally, the removal of the geometry may be undesirable especially when a particular interior node is to be the target for an attachment in Adams.

Apply Mesh Coarsening Algorithm

Select and then use the sliders to set the following:

• Target Mesh Resolution - Slide the Mesh Resolution slider to the fraction of the total component size below which Adams/Flex removes the detail of the mesh. For example, if your component is approximately 1 m long, and you select 15% mesh resolution, the coarsening results in a mesh with 15 cm-wide mesh cells.

• Face Smoothing - Slide the Face Smoothing slider to the angle between adjacent faces below which Adams/Flex should merge faces. For example, if you select 15, the coarsening algorithm does not merge two faces when one face is more than 15o out of the plane of the other face.

• Colinear Point Removal - Select Remove Colinear Points to control removal of nodes that are intermediate nodes on the straight edge of a face.

• Retain Particular Nodes - In the Retained Node List text box, specify a list of nodes that Adams/Flex should not remove during coarsening.

When you use mesh coarsening and also calculate the invariants, Adams/Flex removes nodes that were only connected to the geometry that was removed by coarsening, which results in a great reduction in MNF size.


Universal File Enter the name of the Universal file containing datasets 15, 55, 82.

I-DEAS/CADAX/STAR Specifies the program from which the Universal file was generated.

MNF File Enter the name of the MNF to be created. If you do not provide a file name, Adams/Flex generates an MNF with the same path and prefix as the Universal file.

Total Mass Enter the global mass of the tested component.


Adams/ViewTranslate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

628

Center of Mass Enter the x, y, and z coordinates of the tested component’s center of mass, relative to datum used to measure the nodal positions in dataset 15 of the Universal file.

Inertia Tensor Enter the inertia tensor of the tested component relative to the center of mass.

Title Enter a title for the MNF to help you identify it (optional).

Comment #1/ Comment #2/ Comment #3

Enter comments for the MNF to help you identify it (optional).

Length/Mass/Time/Force Units

Set Length Units, Mass Units, Time Units, and Force Units to, Mass Units, Time Units, and Force Units toto the units used in the Universal file and the data entered in this dialog box.

629P - ZTranslate Tool Stack

Translate Tool Stack

Main Toolbox → Translate Tool Stack

Contains tools for translating the view in the View window and setting the perspective.

Icon Link

Dynamically Translating a View

Setting the View Perspective

Adams/ViewTranslational Joint Tool

630

Translational Joint Tool

Build → Joints → Translational Joint Tool

Creates a translational joint that allows one part to translate along a vector with respect to another part. The parts can only translate, not rotate, with respect to each other.

When you create a translational joint, you specify its location and orientation. The location of a translational joint does not affect the motion of the joint. It simply determines where Adams/View places the joint. The orientation of the translational joint, however, determines the direction of the axis along which the parts can slide with respect to each other. The direction of the motion of the translational joint is parallel to the orientation vector and passes through the location.

Learn about:


631P - ZTranslational Joint Tool















• Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching solvers.

Adams/ViewTranslational Motion Tool

632

Translational Motion Tool

Build → Joints → Translational Motion Tool

Moves the first part that the joint connects along the z-axis of the second part.

Learn about:

• Overview of Motion

• Creating Joint Motion


Trans. Speed Specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By default, Adams/View creates a translational motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per second. To enter a function expression or User-written subroutine, right-click the Trans. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.


633P - ZTranslational Spring Damper Tool


Build → Forces → Spring-Damper Tool

Adds a translational spring damper to your model by defining the locations on two parts between which the spring-damper acts. You define the action force that is applied to the first location, and Adams/Solver automatically applies the equal and opposite reaction force to the second location.

Learn about:

• Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers

• Translational Spring Dampers


Translational K Enter stiffness coefficients.

Translational C Enter damping coefficients.

Adams/ViewUnite Tool

634

Unite Tool

Build → Bodies/Geometry → Unite Tool

Creates complex geometry by joining two intersecting solids. It merges the second part you select into the first part, resulting in a single part.

The union has a mass computed from the volume of the new solid. Any overlapping volume is only counted once.

Learn about Creating One Part from the Union of Two Solids

635P - ZUnits

Units

Settings → Units

Changes the default units Adams/View uses in modeling, importing, and exporting files. You can select individual units or select a set group of units.

Learn about:

• Units of Measurement in Adams/View

• Unit Labels

• Entering Unit Measurements in Text Boxes


Length Select the desired unit.

Mass Select the desired unit.

Force Select the desired unit.

Time Select the desired unit.

Angle Select the desired unit.

Frequency Select the desired unit.

MMKS Select to set length to millimeters, mass to kilograms, and force to Newtons. When you select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion of the dialog box.

MKS Select to set length to meters, mass to kilograms, and force to Newtons. When you select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion of the dialog box.

CGS Select to set length to centimeters, mass to grams, and force to Dyne. When you select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion of the dialog box.

IPS Select to set length to inches, mass to pound mass, and force to PoundForce. When you select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion of the dialog box.

Note: In all the unit systems, time is in seconds and angle is in degrees.

Adams/ViewUpdate Design Variables

636

Update Design Variables


Allows you to set the design variable values to those of a trial or iteration. This is helpful if you want to:

• Update your model to match the best trial of a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE).

• Visualize the variable settings of a particular trial or iteration.

• Use an intermediate iteration in an optimization instead of the final values.

Learn more about Updating Variables.


Result Set Enter the name of the parametric analysis result set that you want to use to update the variables.

Trial Enter the trial or iteration number you want to use. Adams/View sets the design variable values to match those used in the specified trial or iteration, and updates the model graphics to reflect the new values.

637P - ZUser-Defined Transfer Function Block

User-Defined Transfer Function Block


The user-defined transfer function block creates general rational polynomial blocks by specifying the polynomial coefficients. Specify the coefficients in the order n0, n1, n2 for the numerator.

Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.




Numerator Coefficients/Denominator Coefficients

Specify the polynomial coefficients in the order n0, n1, n2.




Adams/ViewView Accessories

638

View Accessories

View → View Accessories

Sets the display of the following in the currently active View window:

• Working grid

• Screen icons

• View triad

• View title

Note: You can also use the tools in the Main toolbox to set the display of these items. If you use the tools, you can change the accessories for all view windows at once but you cannot change the view title.


Working grid Select to display the working grid.

Screen icons Select to display the screen icons.

View triad Select to display the view triad.

View title Select to display the view title.

639P - ZView Orientation Tools

View Orientation Tools

View → Pre-Set → A ViewMain Toolbox → View Orientation tool

Provide seven pre-set views of your model that you can display in any of your view windows. You can access the pre-set views using the Pre-set command on the View menu or using the set of View Orientation Tool Stacks on the Main toolbox.

Learn about:

• The different Orientations and the tools that activate them

• Changing the View in a Window

Adams/ViewView Rotation

640

View Rotation

Main toolbox → Toggle toolstack → View Rotation

Rotates the View in a View window about the x, y, and z screen axes by a specified increment.

Learn about Dynamically Rotating a View.

Icon Description

Rotate view about the screen’s z-axis

Rotate view about screen’s x- and y-axis

Set the amount by which you want to incrementally rotate the view in the text box.

641P - ZWelcome

WelcomeLets you start your Adams session by creating a new model or opening an existing one. It also lets you to specify your working directory.


How would you like to proceed?

Sets how you will proceed with Adams/View:

• New Model - Lets you start a new modeling session with a new

modeling database.

• Existing Model - Lets you open an existing model.

• Exit - Lets you exit Adams/View without performing an

operation.

If you selected New Model, following options available.

Model name Enter the name you want assigned to the new Model. You can enter up to 80 alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as spaces or periods.

Gravity Select the gravity settings for the new model. You can select:

• Earth Normal - Sets the gravity to 1 G downward.

• No Gravity - Turns off the gravitational force.

• Other - Lets you set the gravity as desired. The Gravity Settings dialog box appears after you select OK on the Welcome dialog box. Learn about Specifying Gravitational Force.

Units Select a preset unit system for your model. In all the preset unit systems, time is in seconds and angles are in degrees. You can set:

• MMKS - Sets length to millimeter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.

• MKS - Sets length to meter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.

• CGS - Sets length to centimeter, mass to gram, and force to Dyne.

• IPS - Sets length to inch, mass to slug, and force to PoundForce.

If you do not want any of the preset unit systems, you can change the units as required. Learn about Setting Units of Measurement.

Working Directory Specify the directory to be used as your working directory. Adams/View saves all files in this directory. Learn about Specifying Working Directory.

Adams/ViewWelcome

642

If you selected Existing Model, following options available.

File Name Specify the file name you wish to open. Use the browse option to locate the files.

Working Directory The set working directory will be displayed. It defaults to the directory in which the selected file resides. Optionally, you can also browse for a different directory. Learn about Specifying Working Directory.


643P - ZWelcome (Classic Interface)

Welcome (Classic Interface)Appears when you start Adams/View or create a database (File - New Database)

Lets you create a new Modeling database or use an existing one. It also lets you import modeling data and specify your working directory. Learn about creating a modeling database.


How would you like to proceed?

Sets how you will proceed with Adams/View:

• Create a new model - Lets you start a new modeling session with a new modeling database.

• Open an existing database - Lets you open an existing modeling database.

• Import a file - Lets you start a new modeling session by reading in a model from an Adams/View command file or an Adams/Solver dataset. For more information, see:

• Import - Adams/Solver Dataset

• Import - Adams/View Command Files

• Exit - Lets you exit Adams/View without performing an operation.

Start in Specify the directory to be used as your working directory. Adams/View saves all files in this directory. Learn about Specifying Working Directory.

Model name Enter the name you want assigned to the new Model. You can enter up to 80 alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as spaces or periods.

Adams/ViewWelcome (Classic Interface)

644

Gravity Select the gravity settings for the new model. You can select:

• Earth Normal - Sets the gravity to 1 G downward.

• No Gravity - Turns off the gravitational force.

• Other - Lets you set the gravity as desired. The Gravity Settings dialog box appears after you select OK on the Welcome dialog box. Learn about Specifying Gravitational Force.

Units Select a preset unit system for your model. In all the preset unit systems, time is in seconds and angles are in degrees. You can set:

• MMKS - Sets length to millimeter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.

• MKS - Sets length to meter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.

• CGS - Sets length to centimeter, mass to gram, and force to Dyne.

• IPS - Sets length to inch, mass to slug, and force to PoundForce.

If you do not want any of the preset unit systems, you can change the units as required. Learn about Setting Units of Measurement.


645P - ZWindow Layout

Window Layout

View → Layout

Main toolbox → Window Layouts toolstack

Provides 12 View window layouts for the Main window. The layouts vary from a single view window of your model up to six windows. Each window displays a different view of your model. Adams/Views displays the current model (if there is one) into any of the views that are empty.

Adams/ViewWindow Layout

646

You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window Layouts tool stack on the Main toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts. If you display the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.


Any of layout choices Select the choice to change the view window to your desired layout.

Close Select to close the palette. You can keep it open to quickly switch between layouts.

647P - ZWorking Grid

Working Grid

Settings → Working Grid

Main tool box → Move toolstack →

Sets the appearance of various elements in the Working grid and toggle their visibility..

Learn about Setting Up the Working Grid.


Show Working Grid Set to display the working grid.

Rectangular Set to select a Rectangular working grid. Adams/View changes the coordinate system settings accordingly.

Adams/ViewWorking Grid

648

Polar Set to select a Polar working grid. Adams/View changes the coordinate system settings accordingly. For more information, see Coordinate System dialog box.

Size For a rectangular grid only, enter the size of the grid in the x and y directions in length units.

Spacing For a rectangular grid only, enter the spacing between each point in the grid in the x and y directions in length units.

Maximum Radius For polar grid only, enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to its outermost circle.

Circle Spacing For polar grid only, enter the amount of space between each circle in the working grid. The smaller the spacing, the more circles Adams/View defines.


649P - ZWorking Grid

Radial Increments For polar grid only, enter the number of lines radiating from the origin of the working grid. Adams/View spaces the lines equally around the working grid. The lines do not include the axes. The number of lines (N) determines the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in the formula:

θ = 360×/N

In the picture above 8 lines are specified for an angle increment between the lines of 45.

Dots, Axes, Lines, and Triad

Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can also set the color of the objects to Contrast, which indicates that Adams/View should select a color that contrasts with the color currently set for the view background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful when you set each of your view windows to a different background color or when you frequently change the view background.

The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided for setting the color of objects. The colors do not include any new colors that you created.

The weight values are from 1 to 3 screen pixels.

Set Location Select either:

• Global Origin to set the center location of the working grid to the center of the view window.

• Pick and click a location on the screen to set as the center of the working grid.

Set Orientation Select how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation by picking points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select Pick for orientation, you will also set the location of the working grid.


Adams/ViewWorking Grid

650

view dbox help

Documents

curvecurve constraints

object active

hierarchical database

threedimensional plot

selected object

parasolid object

objects children

adamsview closes